Controlling data collection, manipulation and storage on a network with service assurance capabilities

ABSTRACT

The present disclosure provides for controlling the collection, manipulation and storage of network performance data and network even data of a network with service assurance capabilities. Upon the receipt of an activation signal, a signal is transmitted to initiate the retrieving of network performance data and network event data generated from at least one network monitor. Such network monitor is adapted for monitoring a network system and the relocating of the data into a common directory. A signal is then transmitted to initiate the manipulation of the data and the loading of the manipulated data into a database.

FIELD OF THE INVENTION

The present invention relates to the data collection control and more particularly to data collection, manipulation and storage on a network with service assurance capabilities.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

A network system architecture enables multiple applications like voice, data and video to be mixed over the network that comprises switching nodes and communications links. Networks for these applications generally have been designed for a particular type of application, such as teleconferencing applications. Different types of applications, however, have diverse requirements.

“Quality of Service” or “QoS” parameters in part define these requirements. In the case of ATM networks, such parameters may include errored cell ratio (ECR), cell loss ratio, fixed delay and delay variation parameters. Applications may also indicate a set of parameters called a “traffic contract” that relates to the bandwidth required from the network. The Errored Cell Ratio (ECR) value is the ratio of the ATM cells in error to all the ATM cells sent during some interval. The remaining parameters are described later. Each application may have a maximum or minimum acceptable value for each parameter and a requested value for each parameter.

As previously indicated, networks are implemented with switching nodes and communications links. The communications links typically have been based upon conventional telephony transmission systems and comprised fiber optic, microwave or wireline links. Fiber optic links transfer typically an error rate of 10.sup.-9; microwave and wireline connections, 10.sup.-7. More recently, communications links have begun to comprise terrestrial and satellite mobile wireless communications links and cable television systems. Each of these communications links are prone to introducing errors at significantly greater rates.

Some present ATM networks attempt to overcome such errors by implementing a transformation process in the form of a correction, or data manipulation, technique at each switching node on a “per-communications link” basis. That is, the network is designed such that certain links operate with a transforming process that is not alterable on a dynamic basis. For example, it is fairly common that satellite systems have a single error correcting code that operates over the entire bit stream passing over the link, notwithstanding the specific application. Using error correcting codes, such as forward error correction (FEC) codes, requires significant amounts of redundant information to be sent with each block of bits wherein a “block” may comprise a partial ATM cell, a single ATM cell or a plurality of ATM cells. This redundant information adds “overhead” to the transfer. This, in turn, reduces the bandwidth available for transporting an ATM cell. To be effective, an error correcting code must also match the anticipated error burst characteristics of the transmission system; systems that are subject to longer bursts require larger codewords or interleaving or both. Interleaving adds significant amounts of fixed delay to that already present in the transmission system. Such fixed delays manifest themselves, for example, as awkward conversation and user discomfort in a teleconferencing application or even as motion sickness and disorientation in a virtual reality application.

Despite the foregoing efforts, network failures are inevitable, and there is a need of monitoring network performance for the purpose of maintaining a predetermined agreed upon QoS.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

The present invention provides for controlling the collection, manipulation and storage of network performance data and network event data of a network with service assurance capabilities. Upon the receipt of an activation signal, a signal is transmitted to initiate the retrieving of network performance data and network event data generated from at least one network monitor. Such network monitor is adapted for monitoring a network system and the relocating of the data into a common directory. A signal is then transmitted to initiate the manipulation of the data and the loading of the manipulated data into a database.

In one embodiment, the signal to initiate the manipulating and storing of the data initiates a controller program that transmits a signal to initiate the manipulation of the data. Such controller program transmits a signal to initiate the calculation of statistics from the data, and further transmits a signal to initiate the assigning of key codes to the data.

In one aspect of the present invention, the controller program also transmits a signal to initiate the sorting of the data, and further transmits a signal to initiate the concatenating of the data. Still yet, the controller program transmits a signal to initiate the loading of the data into the database.

As an option, the present invention may further transmit a signal to initiate a clean archive program for deleting files from an archive directory, a signal to initiate a table extract program for extracting data from tables stored in the database, a signal to initiate a trigger reporting program for generating reports, a signal to initiate a purge record program for deleting records from the database, and a signal to initiate a database backup program for backing up data stored on the database.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

The invention will be better understood when consideration is given to the following detailed description thereof. Such description makes reference to the annexed drawings wherein:

FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a hardware implementation of one embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 2 illustrates an embodiment of the present invention which provides service assurance for a network;

FIG. 3 illustrates one embodiment of the present invention for dispatching network event information of a network with service assurance capabilities;

FIG. 4 illustrates an embodiment of the present invention for assigning time-based identifiers to data stored in a database;

FIG. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an embodiment of the present invention for collecting data;

FIG. 6 is a flowchart that provides an overview of a data collection process of one embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 7 illustrates an embodiment of the present invention for retrieving and relocating event and performance data of a network with service assurance capabilities;

FIG. 8 illustrates operation of the main data acquisition script (get_(—)data.pl) for each entry in the configuration file (get_(—)data.cfg) during data acquisition in accordance with one embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 9 illustrates an exemplary configuration of an architecture of the present invention for manipulating data using a Patroller and an Event Controller and Manager;

FIG. 10 depicts an embodiment of the present invention which generates an alarm to indicate a status of a network for service assurance purposes;

FIG. 11 illustrates an embodiment of the present invention used to develop a database;

FIG. 12 illustrates an exemplary database configuration chart of an embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 13 illustrates an exemplary report indicating required table space allotments in a database;

FIG. 14 depicts an exemplary report which lists statistics relating to the data in the database in accordance with one embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 15 is an exemplary report indicating times to load various amounts of data in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 16 depicts an embodiment of the present invention which graphically conveys availability in a network with service assurance capabilities

FIG. 17A depicts a main ad hoc screen for navigating when making an ad hoc request for a report in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 17B illustrates a graphical user interface for selecting a report type in accordance with one embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 18 illustrates a form which receives report criteria in accordance with one embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 19 illustrates exemplary batch reporting requirements in accordance with one embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 20 lists generic report types;

FIG. 21 shows exemplary ad hoc reporting requirements in accordance with one embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 22 illustrates sample metric information in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 23 depicts a line graph report in accordance with one embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 24 shows a line graph report in accordance with one embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 25 depicts a comparison box-plot report in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 26 illustrates a trend box-plot report in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 27 depicts a bar graph report in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 28 shows an availability spectrum report in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 29 illustrates an exception spectrum report in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 30 depicts an exception test report in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 31 illustrates an embodiment of the present invention which maps events on a network with service assurance capabilities; and

FIG. 32 depicts an exemplary data/directory structure in accordance with one embodiment of the present invention.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS

A preferred embodiment of a system in accordance with the present invention is preferably practiced in the context of a personal computer such as an IBM compatible personal computer, Apple Macintosh computer or UNIX based workstation. A representative hardware environment is depicted in FIG. 1, which illustrates a typical hardware configuration of a workstation in accordance with a preferred embodiment having a central processing unit 110, such as a microprocessor, and a number of other units interconnected via a system bus 112. The workstation shown in FIG. 1 includes a Random Access Memory (RAM) 114, Read Only Memory (ROM) 116, an I/O adapter 118 for connecting peripheral devices such as disk storage units 120 to the bus 112, a user interface adapter 122 for connecting a keyboard 124, a mouse 126, a speaker 128, a microphone 132, and/or other user interface devices such as a touch screen (not shown) to the bus 112, communication adapter 134 for connecting the workstation to a communication network (e.g., a data processing network) and a display adapter 136 for connecting the bus 112 to a display device 138. The workstation typically has resident thereon an operating system such as the Microsoft Windows NT or Windows/95 Operating System (OS), the IBM OS/2 operating system, the MAC OS, or UNIX operating system. Those skilled in the art will appreciate that the present invention may also be implemented on platforms and operating systems other than those mentioned.

A preferred embodiment is written using JAVA, C, and the C++ language and utilizes object oriented programming methodology. Object oriented programming (OOP) has become increasingly used to develop complex applications. As OOP moves toward the mainstream of software design and development, various software solutions require adaptation to make use of the benefits of OOP. A need exists for these principles of OOP to be applied to a messaging interface of an electronic messaging system such that a set of OOP classes and objects for the messaging interface can be provided.

OOP is a process of developing computer software using objects, including the steps of analyzing the problem, designing the system, and constructing the program. An object is a software package that contains both data and a collection of related structures and procedures. Since it contains both data and a collection of structures and procedures, it can be visualized as a self-sufficient component that does not require other additional structures, procedures or data to perform its specific task. OOP, therefore, views a computer program as a collection of largely autonomous components, called objects, each of which is responsible for a specific task. This concept of packaging data, structures, and procedures together in one component or module is called encapsulation.

In general, OOP components are reusable software modules which present an interface that conforms to an object model and which are accessed at run-time through a component integration architecture. A component integration architecture is a set of architecture mechanisms which allow software modules in different process spaces to utilize each others capabilities or functions. This is generally done by assuming a common component object model on which to build the architecture. It is worthwhile to differentiate between an object and a class of objects at this point. An object is a single instance of the class of objects, which is often just called a class. A class of objects can be viewed as a blueprint, from which many objects can be formed.

OOP allows the programmer to create an object that is a part of another object. For example, the object representing a piston engine is said to have a composition-relationship with the object representing a piston. In reality, a piston engine comprises a piston, valves and many other components; the fact that a piston is an element of a piston engine can be logically and semantically represented in OOP by two objects.

OOP also allows creation of an object that “depends from” another object. If there are two objects, one representing a piston engine and the other representing a piston engine wherein the piston is made of ceramic, then the relationship between the two objects is not that of composition. A ceramic piston engine does not make up a piston engine. Rather it is merely one kind of piston engine that has one more limitation than the piston engine; its piston is made of ceramic. In this case, the object representing the ceramic piston engine is called a derived object, and it inherits all of the aspects of the object representing the piston engine and adds further limitation or detail to it. The object representing the ceramic piston engine “depends from” the object representing the piston engine. The relationship between these objects is called inheritance.

When the object or class representing the ceramic piston engine inherits all of the aspects of the objects representing the piston engine, it inherits the thermal characteristics of a standard piston defined in the piston engine class. However, the ceramic piston engine object overrides these ceramic specific thermal characteristics, which are typically different from those associated with a metal piston. It skips over the original and uses new functions related to ceramic pistons. Different kinds of piston engines have different characteristics, but may have the same underlying functions associated with it (e.g., how many pistons in the engine, ignition sequences, lubrication, etc.). To access each of these functions in any piston engine object, a programmer would call the same functions with the same names, but each type of piston engine may have different/overriding implementations of functions behind the same name. This ability to hide different implementations of a function behind the same name is called polymorphism and it greatly simplifies communication among objects.

With the concepts of composition-relationship, encapsulation, inheritance and polymorphism, an object can represent just about anything in the real world. In fact, one's logical perception of the reality is the only limit on determining the kinds of things that can become objects in object-oriented software. Some typical categories are as follows:

-   -   Objects can represent physical objects, such as automobiles in a         traffic-flow simulation, electrical components in a         circuit-design program, countries in an economics model, or         aircraft in an air-traffic-control system.     -   Objects can represent elements of the computer-user environment         such as windows, menus or graphics objects.     -   An object can represent an inventory, such as a personnel file         or a table of the latitudes and longitudes of cities.     -   An object can represent user-defined data types such as time,         angles, and complex numbers, or points on the plane.

With this enormous capability of an object to represent just about any logically separable matters, OOP allows the software developer to design and implement a computer program that is a model of some aspects of reality, whether that reality is a physical entity, a process, a system, or a composition of matter. Since the object can represent anything, the software developer can create an object which can be used as a component in a larger software project in the future.

If 90% of a new OOP software program consists of proven, existing components made from preexisting reusable objects, then only the remaining 10% of the new software project has to be written and tested from scratch. Since 90% already came from an inventory of extensively tested reusable objects, the potential domain from which an error could originate is 10% of the program. As a result, OOP enables software developers to build objects out of other, previously built objects.

This process closely resembles complex machinery being built out of assemblies and sub-assemblies. OOP technology, therefore, makes software engineering more like hardware engineering in that software is built from existing components, which are available to the developer as objects. All this adds up to an improved quality of the software as well as an increased speed of its development.

Programming languages are beginning to fully support the OOP principles, such as encapsulation, inheritance, polymorphism, and composition-relationship. With the advent of the C++ language, many commercial software developers have embraced OOP. C++ is an OOP language that offers a fast, machine-executable code. Furthermore, C++ is suitable for both commercial-application and systems-programming projects. For now, C++ appears to be the most popular choice among many OOP programmers, but there is a host of other OOP languages, such as Smalltalk, Common Lisp Object System (CLOS), and Eiffel. Additionally, OOP capabilities are being added to more traditional popular computer progranu\ring languages such as Pascal.

The benefits of object classes can be summarized, as follows:

-   -   Objects and their corresponding classes break down complex         programming problems into many smaller, simpler problems.     -   Encapsulation enforces data abstraction through the organization         of data into small, independent objects that can communicate         with each other. Encapsulation protects the data in an object         from accidental damage, but allows other objects to interact         with that data by calling the object's member functions and         structures.     -   Subclassing and inheritance make it possible to extend and         modify objects through deriving new kinds of objects from the         standard classes available in the system. Thus, new capabilities         are created without having to start from scratch.     -   Polymorphism and multiple inheritance make it possible for         different programmers to mix and match characteristics of many         different classes and create specialized objects that can still         work with related objects in predictable ways.     -   Class hierarchies and containment hierarchies provide a flexible         mechanism for modeling real-world objects and the relationships         among them.     -   Libraries of reusable classes are useful in many situations, but         they also have some limitations. For example:     -   Complexity. In a complex system, the class hierarchies for         related classes can become extremely confusing, with many dozens         or even hundreds of classes.     -   Flow of control. A program written with the aid of class         libraries is still responsible for the flow of control (i.e., it         must control the interactions among all the objects created from         a particular library). The programmer has to decide which         functions to call at what times for which kinds of objects.     -   Duplication of effort. Although class libraries allow         programmers to use and reuse many small pieces of code, each         programmer puts those pieces together in a different way. Two         different programmers can use the same set of class libraries to         write two programs that do exactly the same thing but whose         internal structure (i.e., design) may be quite different,         depending on hundreds of small decisions each programmer makes         along the way. Inevitably, similar pieces of code end up doing         similar things in slightly different ways and do not work as         well together as they should.

Class libraries are very flexible. As programs grow more complex, more programmers are forced to reinvent basic solutions to basic problems over and over again. A relatively new extension of the class library concept is to have a framework of class libraries. This framework is more complex and consists of significant collections of collaborating classes that capture both the small scale patterns and major mechanisms that implement the common requirements and design in a specific application domain. They were first developed to free application programmers from the chores involved in displaying menus, windows, dialog boxes, and other standard user interface elements for personal computers.

Frameworks also represent a change in the way programmers think about the interaction between the code they write and code written by others. In the early days of procedural programming, the programmer called libraries provided by the operating system to perform certain tasks, but basically the program executed down the page from start to finish, and the programmer was solely responsible for the flow of control. This was appropriate for printing out paychecks, calculating a mathematical table, or solving other problems with a program that executed in just one way.

The development of graphical user interfaces began to turn this procedural programming arrangement inside out. These interfaces allow the user, rather than program logic, to drive the program and decide when certain actions should be performed. Today, most personal computer software accomplishes this by means of an event loop which monitors the mouse, keyboard, and other sources of external events and calls the appropriate parts of the programmer's code according to actions that the user performs. The programmer no longer determines the order in which events occur. Instead, a program is divided into separate pieces that are called at unpredictable times and in an unpredictable order. By relinquishing control in this way to users, the developer creates a program that is much easier to use. Nevertheless, individual pieces of the program written by the developer still call libraries provided by the operating system to accomplish certain tasks, and the programmer must still determine the flow of control within each piece after it's called by the event loop. Application code still “sits on top of” the system.

Even event loop programs require programmers to write a lot of code that should not need to be written separately for every application. The concept of an application framework carries the event loop concept further. Instead of dealing with all the nuts and bolts of constructing basic menus, windows, and dialog boxes and then making these things all work together, programmers using application frameworks start with working application code and basic user interface elements in place. Subsequently, they build from there by replacing some of the generic capabilities of the framework with the specific capabilities of the intended application.

Application frameworks reduce the total amount of code that a programmer has to write from scratch. However, because the framework is really a generic application that displays windows, supports copy and paste, and so on, the programmer can also relinquish control to a greater degree than event loop programs permit. The framework code takes care of almost all event handling and flow of control, and the programmer's code is called only when the framework needs it (e.g., to create or manipulate a proprietary data structure).

A programmer writing a framework program not only relinquishes control to the user (as is also true for event loop programs), but also relinquishes the detailed flow of control within the program to the framework. This approach allows the creation of more complex systems that work together in interesting ways, as opposed to isolated programs, having custom code, being created over and over again for similar problems.

Thus, as is explained above, a framework basically is a collection of cooperating classes that make up a reusable design solution for a given problem domain. It typically includes objects that provide default behavior (e.g., for menus and windows), and programmers use it by inheriting some of that default behavior and overriding other behavior so that the framework calls application code at the appropriate times.

There are three main differences between frameworks and class libraries:

-   -   Behavior versus protocol. Class libraries are essentially         collections of behaviors that you can call when you want those         individual behaviors in your program. A framework, on the other         hand, provides not only behavior but also the protocol or set of         rules that govern the ways in which behaviors can be combined,         including rules for what a programmer is supposed to provide         versus what the framework provides.     -   Call versus override. With a class library, the code the         programmer instantiates objects and calls their member         functions. It's possible to instantiate and call objects in the         same way with a framework (i.e., to treat the framework as a         class library), but to take full advantage of a framework's         reusable design, a programmer typically writes code that         overrides and is called by the framework. The framework manages         the flow of control among its objects. Writing a program         involves dividing responsibilities among the various pieces of         software that are called by the framework rather than specifying         how the different pieces should work together.     -   Implementation versus design. With class libraries, programmers         reuse only implementations, whereas with frameworks, they reuse         design. A framework embodies the way a family of related         programs or pieces of software work. It represents a generic         design solution that can be adapted to a variety of specific         problems in a given domain. For example, a single framework can         embody the way a user interface works, even though two different         user interfaces created with the same framework might solve         quite different interface problems.

Thus, through the development of frameworks for solutions to various problems and programming tasks, significant reductions in the design and development effort for software can be achieved. A preferred embodiment of the invention utilizes HyperText Markup Language (HTML) to implement documents on the Internet together with a general-purpose secure communication protocol for a transport medium between the client and the Newco. HTTP or other protocols could be readily substituted for HTML without undue experimentation. Information on these products is available in T. Berners-Lee, D. Connoly, “RFC 1866: Hypertext Markup Language-2.0” (November 1995); and R. Fielding, H, Frystyk, T. Berners-Lee, J. Gettys and J. C. Mogul, “Hypertext Transfer Protocol—HTTP/1.1: HTTP Working Group Internet Draft” (May 2, 1996). HTML is a simple data format used to create hypertext documents that are portable from one platform to another. HTML documents are SGML documents with generic semantics that are appropriate for representing information from a wide range of domains. HTML has been in use by the World-Wide Web global information initiative since 1990. HTML is an application of ISO Standard 8879; 1986 Information Processing Text and Office Systems; Standard Generalized Markup Language (SGML).

To date, Web development tools have been limited in their ability to create dynamic Web applications which span from client to server and interoperate with existing computing resources. Until recently, HTML has been the dominant technology used in development of Web-based solutions. However, HTML has proven to be inadequate in the following areas:

-   -   Poor performance;     -   Restricted user interface capabilities;     -   Can only produce static Web pages;     -   Lack of interoperability with existing applications and data;         and     -   Inability to scale.

Sun Microsystem's Java language solves many of the client-side problems by:

-   -   Improving performance on the client side;     -   Enabling the creation of dynamic, real-time Web applications;         and     -   Providing the ability to create a wide variety of user interface         components.

With Java, developers can create robust User Interface (UI) components. Custom “widgets” (e.g., real-time stock tickers, animated icons, etc.) can be created, and client-side performance is improved. Unlike HTML, Java supports the notion of client-side validation, offloading appropriate processing onto the client for improved performance. Dynamic, real-time Web pages can be created. Using the above-mentioned custom UI components, dynamic Web pages can also be created.

Sun's Java language has emerged as an industry-recognized language for “programming the Internet.” Sun defines Java as: “a simple, object-oriented, distributed, interpreted, robust, secure, architecture-neutral, portable, high-performance, multithreaded, dynamic, buzzword-compliant, general-purpose programming language. Java supports programming for the Internet in the form of platform-independent Java applets.” Java applets are small, specialized applications that comply with Sun's Java Application Programming Interface (API) allowing developers to add “interactive content” to Web documents (e.g., simple animations, page adornments, basic games, etc.). Applets execute within a Java-compatible browser (e.g., Netscape Navigator) by copying code from the server to client. From a language standpoint, Java's core feature set is based on C++. Sun's Java literature states that Java is basically, “C++ with extensions from Objective C for more dynamic method resolution.”

Another technology that provides similar function to JAVA is provided by Microsoft and ActiveX Technologies, to give developers and Web designers wherewithal to build dynamic content for the Internet and personal computers. ActiveX includes tools for developing animation, 3-D virtual reality, video and other multimedia content. The tools use Internet standards, work on multiple platforms, and are being supported by over 100 companies. The group's building blocks are called ActiveX Controls, small, fast components that enable developers to embed parts of software in hypertext markup language (HTML) pages. ActiveX Controls work with a variety of programming languages including Microsoft Visual C++, Borland Delphi, Microsoft Visual Basic programming system and, in the future, Microsoft's development tool for Java, code named “Jakarta.” ActiveX Technologies also includes ActiveX Server Framework, allowing developers to create server applications. One of ordinary skill in the art readily recognizes that ActiveX could be substituted for JAVA without undue experimentation to practice the invention.

Overall Architecture

One embodiment of the present invention is composed of multiple software programs which are linked together to create an architecture which is capable of monitoring a network for events and checking system functions and resources. Such events can include alarms, faults, alerts, etc. Other embodiments of the present invention may each include an individual software program.

Reports on system performance, errors, etc. can be generated and output. For example, the reports may depict to operators/administrators of the network what is happening inside the network in real-time. This allows the administrators to respond to problems before disruptions to service occur.

Accordingly, FIG. 2 illustrates an embodiment of the present invention which provides service assurance for a network. In operation 200, an alarm is generated to indicate a status of a network. Network event information of the network is dispatched in operation 202 upon generation of the alarm after which the network event information is mapped in operation 204. The data collected on the status of the network is manipulated and stored in a database. See operations 206 and 208. In operation 210, availability of the network is conveyed graphically.

Collector

A collector may be used to collect system information including events and performance data and route pertinent portions of the system information to a notifier program which informs a system administrator of the system information. One example of a collector is Netcool® manufactured by Micromuse Inc., whose headquarters are located at 139 Townsend St., San Francisco, Calif. 94107.

Notifier

In one aspect of the present invention, a notifier may form part of the architecture or may stand alone. The notifier is a configurable decision engine that determines how to dispatch system information to users. Notification actions can include initiating alphanumeric pages, trouble tickets, log messages, and external scripts. The notifier is integrated closely with the collector and is able to forward alerts to specific individuals based on the contents of the alert and the time/day it was. The notifier also allows an alert to trigger more than one type of notification. This enables functionality like creating a trouble ticket before paging so that the trouble ticket number can be sent along with an alphanumeric page.

The notifier creates integration between the Collector, and any of a number of other programs which may include an alphanumeric paging program and/or a trouble tickets generation program. Preferably, the notifier can be modified to integrate with existing systems. The notifier may be written in the PERL language.

Accordingly, FIG. 3 illustrates one embodiment of the present invention for dispatching network event information of a network with service assurance capabilities. In operation 300, a network is monitored for an event. Thereafter, in operation 302, at least one notification action is generated based upon the occurrence of the event. The notification action may include an alphanumeric page, an e-mail message, a resolution script, a remedy trouble ticket, and/or a log message. Further, the notification action may be transmitted in operation 304 to notify a recipient about the occurrence of the event.

In one aspect of the present invention, the step of generating the notification action further includes the steps of: determining the type of event that occurred, and generating at least one notification action associated with the determined type of event. Further, the order in which notification actions are generated upon the occurrence of the event may be based upon the determined type of event.

In another aspect of the present invention, the step of transmitting the notification action may further include the steps of: determining characteristics of the occurred event, selecting at least one recipient for receiving the notification action based upon the determined characteristics of the occurred event, and transmitting the notification action to the selected recipient.

In still yet another aspect of the present invention, the step of transmitting the notification action may further include the step of determining the time of occurrence of the occurred event. Such selection of the recipient for receiving the notification action may be further based upon the occurrence time of the occurred event. In addition, the occurred event may be compared to a list of scheduled events such that the generation of the notification action may be inhibited when the occurred event matches of the listed scheduled events.

Automation Programs

Automations are a configurable function in the collector. Automations enhance the collector's functionality by adding intelligence and/or automating tasks. Exemplary automations include:

Fault/Resolution Pairing—each resolution alert received (e.g. Link Up) will trigger an automation to try and find its corresponding fault notification (Link Down, which would have been generated earlier) by matching the node and the problem uniquely. When a F/R pair is found, the resolution alert is removed and the fault alert is cleared (no longer a “critical” or “warning” status). Additional information can be added to the alert including the duration of the fault.

Event and Notification Logging—when a notification is sent out by the notifier, an automation can update the alert for which a notification was generated to indicate what action was taken (page, trouble ticket number, logged, etc;).

Maintenance—all cleared alerts can be removed from the event list after a specified period, reducing distractions from the operators.

Data Acquisition

In another embodiment of the present invention, Data Acquisition scripts are programs which coordinate the collection and transfer of application logs to a central location. Data Acquisition can be used so that log files containing performance statistics gathered by a monitoring program can be transferred to a central server for processing by the Performance Data Manipulator (see below). The Data Acquisition scripts may be written in PERL.

Performance Data Manipulator (PDM)

In an embodiment of the present invention, a PDM is a script that processes log files that have been collected by Data Acquisition in order to load the data into a database. The PDM converts the log files from formats specific to a particular monitoring program into a common format. PDM then formats the file based on data warehousing techniques which include converting nodes and performance metrics to key codes which are stored in the database. The coded data file is then bulk loaded into the database. The PDM may be written in PERL.

Database Data Warehouse Design

An embodiment of the present invention includes a database schema for storing and reporting on network element performance data. The schema should be built for the efficient storage, processing, and aging of performance data.

Time Key Preloader

The Time Key Preloader is a script that supports the efficient loading of data in the database. In prior art database systems, due to the use of “key codes” in the design of databases a unique time key needed to be created for each entry stored in the database. The original solution to this was to create a time key every time an entry was received. This is inefficient. One embodiment of the present invention includes the Time Key Preloader which pre-generates time keys for every second, minute, five minutes, and/or hour, etc. of the day all at once using a direct interface to the database. Thus, the time key for the time an alert or metric is received becomes associated with the alert or performance metric. The Time Key Preloader may be written in PERL.

FIG. 4 illustrates an embodiment of the present invention for assigning time-based identifiers to data stored in a database. First, prior to receiving data, a plurality of time-based identifiers are generated in operation 400. Next, in operation 402, the time-based identifiers are saved. Upon receipt of data in operation 404, one of the appropriate time-based identifiers is assigned to the received data in operation 406. In operation 408, the received data is stored with the assigned time-based identifier in a database.

In one aspect of the present invention, the time-based identifiers are generated for every second, minute, and hour of every day at once. The time-based identifiers may be generated using an interface to the database. Further, the time-based identifiers may be stored in a database separate from that in which the data is stored.

In yet another aspect of the present invention, the received data relates to a parameter of a network. Further, the data may be stored for service assurance purposes on the network.

Event Correlator and Manager (ECM)

One embodiment of the present invention includes an event correlation application which uses behavior models to correlate network conditions, identify critical problems, filter out superfluous events and take appropriate actions. An example of an ECM is NerveCenter manufactured by Seagate Software, 920 Disc Drive, Scotts Valley, Calif. 95067.

Patroller

An embodiment of the present invention includes a patroller which discover the environment of a network, continuously surveys related systems, and/or initiates alarms based on preset parameters. An example of a Patroller is BMC Patrol manufactured by BMC Software, BMC Software, Inc., 2101 CityWest Blvd., Houston, Tex. 77042-2827.

Alarm Definitions

Alarm Definitions are customizations to an ECM which allow for event correlation and alarm suppression. Preferably, the Alarm Definitions are specific to particular networks in order to add automated intelligence for problem resolution and to reduce unneeded alarm traffic sent to operators.

Automation Scripts and Knowledge Modules

Automation scripts allow the automation of application and system management tasks. Automation scripts may monitor application health and perform corrective actions when the status of an application changes. Other functions may include sending SNMP traps when specific conditions are detected in an application or system.

Reporting Interface Development, Customer Service Integration Module

One embodiment of the present invention provides the ability to correlate network events to individual customers (or providers in a Managed Network Services world) and notify customer service representatives of known outages affecting customers through a web interface. This allows proactive notification to customers of problems that affect them as well as builds confidence in customers calling to report problems that the provider is aware of.

Data Collection

Data Collection Overview

Referring to FIG. 5, in one embodiment of the present invention, an activation signal is received in operation 500. Upon receipt of the activation signal, a signal is transmitted in operation 502 to initiate the retrieving of network performance data and network event data generated from at least one network monitor. Such network monitor is adapted for monitoring a network system and the relocating of the data into a common directory. Then, in operation 504, the signal is transmitted to initiate the manipulation of the data and the loading of the manipulated data into a database.

In one embodiment, the signal to initiate the manipulating and storing of the data initiates a controller program that transmits a signal to initiate the manipulation of the data. Such controller program transmits a signal to initiate the calculation of statistics from the data, and further transmits a signal to initiate the assigning of key codes to the data.

In another aspect of the present invention, the controller program also transmits a signal to initiate the sorting of the data, and further transmits a signal to initiate the concatenating of the data. Still yet, the controller program transmits a signal to initiate the loading of the data into the database.

As an option, the present invention may further transmit a signal to initiate a clean archive program for deleting files from an archive directory, a signal to initiate a table extract program for extracting data from tables stored in the database, a signal to initiate a trigger reporting program for generating reports, a signal to initiate a purge record program for deleting records from the database, and a signal to initiate a database backup program for backing up data stored on the database.

The following subsections describe an embodiment of the present invention that controls the collection, manipulation and storage of network performance data and network event data of a network with service assurance capabilities and provides an exemplary step-by-step overview of the flow of data from collection to when it's loaded into the database. FIG. 6 is a flowchart that provides an overview of a data collection process of one embodiment of the present invention.

In this exemplary embodiment, Seagate NerveCenter will be used as the Event Correlator and Manager 600 and BMC Patrol will be used as the Patroller 602.

Applications

The data collection is started by the network monitory applications creating their ASCII text data files. These files are generally stored locally on the machines they are running on. Specifics on where these files should be stored are located in the installation & configuration instructions for each application.

Cron

The cron 604 process daily activates the processing scripts. The .crontab file should be modified on the system which will do the actual processing of the files.

The cron process starts one script, sa_(—)master_(—)process_(—)control.pl 606, which then begins the rest of the processes

sa_(—)master_(—)process_(—)control.pl

The sa_(—)master_(—)process_(—)control.pl script 606 does not actually move or manipulate any of the data files, but instead starts other scripts which will move and manipulate the data to the appropriate locations and into the required formats. There are 8 sequential steps to this process, each beginning after the previous has finished. The steps are as follows:

-   1. clean.pl 608 -   2. get_(—)data.pl

The get_(—)data.pl script 610 is designed to move files from the systems where the data is being collect to the /sa directory structure where it will then be further processed. There are three options that this script can do. The three options are (a) to move files locally on a Unix system, (b) to move files from a remote Unix system, and (c) to move files from a remote NT system.

The script gets its settings from a configuration file named get_(—)data.cfg 612. The most important part is the configuration section for each application:

#******************** Host Identification Section *******************

#$NodeName˜$Location˜$SourcePath˜$SourceExt˜$TargetPath˜$TmpExt˜$Mov eMethod˜$Archive˜#$ArchivePath˜$ArchiveExt˜$TransferType˜$Platform˜$Targ etExt˜$DestHost˜$LogFile˜$UnixRemoteScript

#*********************Example****************************** ***

nsmmws16˜remote˜/opt/PATROLLER/Solaris25-sun4/remote/˜.dat˜/sa/dev/dat/pr ocess/˜.tmp˜move˜yes˜/opt/PATROLLER3.2/Solaris25-sun4/remote/˜.old˜ftp˜Un ix˜.pat˜twmmdb02˜/files0/home/noc/bin/UnixRemote.log˜/files0/home/noc/bin/Un ixRemote.pl

Use the definition above and the example as a guide on adding more applications and host systems.

For moving files remotely from a Unix system, the UnixRemote.pl script 614 is called using remsh. Once UnixRemote.pl finishes, the verify.cmp file is used to make sure that all the files were properly transferred.

UnixRemote.pl

UnixRemote.pl 614 is called using remsh on the system which the files are to be moved. It first deletes the *.old files, which are the data files from the previous day. Then the current data files are renamed to $node_(—)$date_(—)*.$extension. A verify.cmp file is created to later verify that all the files are transferred. The *.$extension files and the verify.cmp file are then transferred to the /sa directory structure, usually by ftp. Once that's done, the old files are archived by change $extension to $extension.old, which flags them for deletion the next day.

-   3. extract 616 -   4. data_(—)manip_(—)wrapper.pl

The data_(—)manip_(—)wrapper.pl script 618 controls the action manipulation of the data by calling a number of subscripts, each performing it's own function. Each script is called when the previous script has finished.

data_(—)manip_(—)stage1.pl

The data_(—)manip_(—)stage1.pl script 620 is the main script which massages the data. If new applications are added, this is the script which will need to be modified. This script takes the individual data files in the /sa directory structure, reads in the data_(—)manip_(—)stage1.cfg configuration files, manipulates the data so that it's in the format defined by data_(—)manip_(—)stage1.cfg, and then outputs files in the form of $element.element.

calculate_(—)stats.pl

The calculate_(—)stats.pl script 622 calculates the mean, max, min, sample, and standard deviation for each element file. The output of the script is $element.element.stage2 and $element.element.stat for each element file.

key_(—)codes.pl

The key_(—)codes.pl script 624 uses perf_(—)metric_(—)tb.ext and network_(—)element_(—)tb.ext to look up the codes associated with the node or element being monitored. It assigns the key code as the name of the file (i.e. keycode.element.stage2 and keycode.element.stat). It also produces perf_(—)metric_(—)time_(—)tb.dat.

sort_(—)elmnt_(—)files.pl

The sort_(—)elmnt_(—)files.pl 626 sorts all of the keycode.element.stage2 and keycode.element.stat files and renames them keycode.element.stage2.sorted and keycode.element.stat.sorted. union_(—)all.pl

The union_(—)all.pl script 628 takes the keycode.element.stage2. sorted files and concatenates them into perf_(—)fact_(—)tb.dat and the keycode.element.stat.sorted files and concatenates them into perf_(—)fact_(—)dly_(—)tb.dat.

move.pl

The move_(—)all.pl script 630 moves perf_(—)fact_(—)tb.dat, perf_(—)fact_(—)dly_(—)tb.dat and perf_(—)metric_(—)time_(—)tb.dat to /files6/ipsa/data_(—)loads/data_(—)files.

-   5. data_(—)2_(—)db.pl 632 -   6. purge_(—)records.pl 634 -   7. backup.pl 636 -   8. trigger_(—)reporting.pl 638     Call Script

This script does system calls and utilizes FTP to run other scripts. It calls the scripts in a specific order and logs successes and failures.

Scripts on other machines

If scripts need to be run on other machines, FTP should be used. With FTP, a configuration file is needed to house user and password information. Also, an account may have to be set up on that machine to be able to run that script.

NT Account

From the NT host:

Open Microsoft Internet Information Service (IIS), from there open Internet Services Manager

Right-Click on SA Ftp Site. Click on home directory and make sure this is share, not local. Add path, Network Share path, and make sure that Write and Log Access is accessed.

In the Security Accounts tab, make sure that the radio button for “Not allow anonymous connections is clicked.

In the FTP Site tab, make sure that the connections are limited to 1.

In the Directory Security tab, make sure the radio button for Denied Access is clicked and add the domain for the server that is attempting the FTP.

UNIX

The user and password being used to FTP must be supported by the system being accessed.

FTP example

-   # -   # Trigger daily reporting -   #Create $ReportingScript in /sa/dev/dat/tmp with string “This file     is used to trigger the daily reporting process” -   open (FILE,>$SACommon::SATempDir${ReportingScript})||die “not able     to open $ReportingScript ($!)”; -   print FILE “This file is used to trigger the daily reporting     process”; -   #Transfer the file to $NTHost -   $ftp=Net::FTP->new(“$NTHost”); -   $ftp->login(“$User”, “$Password”); -   $ftp->cwd(“$NTPath”); -   $Return=$ftp->put(“$SACommon::SATempDir$ {ReportingScript}”,     “$NTPath\$ReportingScript”); -   $ftp->quit; -   #Process the return value -   if(0!=Return) {     -   &SACommon::WriteLog(“FTP of $ReportingScript failed”); -   }elsif (0=$Return) {     -   &SACommon::WriteErrorLog(“FTP of $ReportingScript was         successful”); -   } -   #Delete $ReportingScripts file from /sa/dev/dat/tmp -   close (FILE); -   unlink ($SACommon::SATempDir$ {ReportingScript}); -   Scripts on Local machines

The local scripts are called with a system call then logged successful or failure.

System command example

-   # -   #Call Cleanup Utility -   $Return=(system($SACommon::SABinDir/$CleanupScript)); -   if (0!=$Return) {     -   &SACommon::WriteLog(“$CleanupScript was successful”); -   }elsif (0=$Return) {     -   &SACommon::WriteErrorLog(“$CleanupScript failed to run”); } -   Order of Scripts Called -   1. Cleanup Utility 608 -   2. Data Acquisition Utility 610 -   3. Table Extract 616 -   4. Data Manipulation 618 -   5. Data Loader 632 -   6. IPSA_(—)ProcessTheBatchQueue.txt (Reporting SPSS) 638 -   7. Purge Records 634 -   8. Backup 636     get data.pl script

The get_(—)data.pl script, along with the get_(—)data.cfg file, retreves data from both local and remote hosts and relocates it in a common directory. The get_(—)data.pl script also uses the UnixRemote.pl script, which resides on the remote UNIX machines from which data is being acquired. A similar script could also be designed for use with remote NT machines. The get_(—)data.cfg file is the configuration file used to define all program specific information and parameters. There are additional variables and settings defined in the SACommon.pm Perl module, which is located in /sa/usr/mod/. In general, SACommon.pm contains global variables and sub-routines.

Configuration File (get_(—)data.cfg):

The following is an example of what the configuration file entries look like. Each line is read by _(—)data.pl and then acted on according to the logic defined in the script.

#******************** Host Identification Section (continuous line) *******************

$NodeName˜$Location˜$SourcePath˜$SourceExt˜$TargetPath˜$TmpExt˜$Move Method˜$Archive˜

$ArchivePath˜$ArchiveExt˜$TransferType˜$Platform˜$TargetExt˜$DestHost˜$L ogFile˜$UnixRemoteScript

#***********************Example (continuous line)********************************

nsmmws16˜remote˜/opt/PATROLLER/Solaris25sun4/remote/test/˜.dat˜/sa/dev/dat /process/˜.tmp˜

move˜yes˜/opt/PATROLLER/Solaris25sun4/remote/test/˜.old˜ftp˜Unix˜.pat˜twm mdb02˜/files0/home/noc/bin/UnixRemote.log˜/files0/home/noc/bin/UnixRemote.pl

The information contained in each entry is unique to the data being retrieved. The “˜” character is used as field delimiter throughout the file. Following is a description of the fields that must be defined for each entry:

-   $NodeName—DNS name or alias for the local/remote host from which     files need to be collected. -   $Location—Options include “local” or “remote”. -   $SourcePath—Complete source path designating the directory from     which data will be retrieved. -   $SourceExt—File extension used to designate which files need to be     collected. -   $TargetPath—Complete target path designating the destination     directory, on -   $DestHost, where files should be transferred to. -   $TmpExt -   $MoveMethod -   $Archive -   $ArchivePath -   $ArchiveExt -   $TransferType -   $Platform -   $TargetExt -   $DestHost—DNS name or alias for the host where files will to be     transferred to.

It is not necessary for the destination host to be the system calling get_(—)data.pl.

-   $LogFile -   $UnixRemoteScript

There is a single variable, $ScriptName, defined locally within get_(—)data.pl. It is recommended for use with the WriteErrorLog and WriteLog sub-routines provided in SACommon.pm. This is a static variable, and should not need to be changed unless the name of the script is changed.

Data Acquisition Local and Remote

FIG. 7 illustrates an embodiment of the present invention for retrieving and relocating event and performance data of a network with service assurance capabilities. First, in operation 700, a data file is obtained from a host. The data file includes event data collected on a network and/or performance data collected on the network. In operation 702, a verification control file is created that is associated with the data file. The data file is renamed in operation 704 and copied to a target directory in operation 706. Thereafter, the copying of the renamed data file is verified with the verification control file in operation 708.

In one aspect of the present invention, information is added to the renamed data file relating to host name, date, and application extension. Further, the type of host is determined from which the data file was obtained. The type of host is selected from a local host and/or a remote host.

In another aspect of the present invention, a platform of the determined host is determined when the host is determined to be a remote host. Further, the verification control file may be copied with the renamed data file to the target directory. In addition, the data file may be archived.

In yet another embodiment, previously archived data files may be deleted. Further, a move method may be determined for the data file. A temporary copy of the data file may be created based on the move method. Such move method includes moving the data file and/or copying the data file.

FIG. 8 illustrates operation of the main data acquisition script (get_(—)data.pl) 800 for each entry in the configuration file (get_(—)data.cfg) 802. As shown in FIG. 8, the main data acquisition script (get_(—)data.pl) reads the configuration file (get_(—)data.cfg) once, at the beginning of processing, and stores necessary information in memory. Specifically, user and password are stored as variables, and the host entries are stored as an array. Each host entry is then processed in order:

-   1. If the data files are local, the get_(—)data.pl script will     execute the following steps. -   Remove old archived files. 804 -   If the files are to be moved, they are renamed with .tmp. 806 -   Parse the system data and reconfigure for file renaming. 808 -   Rename the files, add machine name, date and application extension.     810 -   Copy the files to the target directory. 812 -   Archive the moved files, rename by appending old to the file name.     814 -   2. If the data files are remote and Unix, the remote shell command     is used to run the UnixRemote.pl script, which resides on the remote     machines. UnixRemote.pl will execute and perform the following steps     remotely. -   Delete old archived files. 816 -   If the files are to be moved, they are renamed with .tmp. 818 -   Parse the system data and reconfigure for file renaming. 820 -   Rename the files, add machine name, date and application extension.     822 -   Ftp the files to the target directory and create a verification     file. 824 -   Archive the moved files, rename by appending old to the file name.     826 -   It returns to get_(—)data.pl and get_(—)data.pl continues to execute     the verification of the FTP. (To be able to execute FTP commands,     the Net::FTP Perl module must be used). 828 -   3. If the data files are remote and the platform is NT, the remote     shell command will be used to run a script that will reside on the     remote machine. The script will execute the following steps     remotely. -   Delete old archived files. 830 -   If the files are to be moved, they are renamed with .tmp. 832 -   Parse the system data and reconfigure for file renaming. 834 -   Rename the files, add machine name, date and application extension.     836 -   Ftp the files to the target directory and create a verification     file. 838 -   Archive the moved files, rename by appending .old to the file name.     840 -   It returns to get_(—)data.pl and get_(—)data.pl continues to execute     the verification of the FTP. (To be able to execute FTP commands,     the Net::FTP Perl module must be used). 842     Data Manipulation Scripts

The scripts contained in the general function of data manipulation are: data_(—)manip_(—)stage1.pl. calculate_(—)stats.pl, key_(—)codes.pl, sort_(—)elmnt files.pl, union_(—)all.pl and move_(—)all.pl. The combination of these scripts takes the data from /sa/dev/dat/process, manipulates it and performs mathematical computations on it then moves it to the /files6/ipsa/data_(—)loads/data_(—)files so that the SQL loader can load it into the database.

Detailed Description of Modules

data_(—)manip_(—)stage.pl

The data_(—)manip_(—)stage1.pl script is the main script which manipulates the data. If new applications are added, this will need to be modified. This script takes the individual data files in the configuration files, manipulates the data so that it is in the format defined by data_(—)manip_(—)stage1.cfg and then outputs files in the form of <element>.element. This manipulation of data has several steps:

-   Filters out records that contain metrics we do not use for     reporting, -   Filters out fields we do not use for reporting -   Reorders the fields we do want into the order <element>, <metric>,     <instance>, <date-time stamp>, <value> -   Converts raw metric names to standard metric names (according to a     table) -   Converts Date Time Stamps to Standard     calculate_(—)stats.pl

The calculate_(—)stats.pl script calculates the mean, maximum, minimum, sample size, and standard deviation for each metric in each *.element file. The output of the script is <element>.element.stage2 and <element>.element.stat for each .element file. The format of the *.stat files is <element>, <metric>, <instance>, <min>, =<max>, <mean>, <standard dev>, <sample size>.

key_(—)codes.pl

The key_(—)codespl script uses perf_(—)metric_(—)tb.ext and network_(—)element_(—)tb.ext to look up the codes associated with the node or element being monitored. It assigns the key code to the name of the file in place of the element name (i.e. <\vcode>.element.stage2 and <keycode>.element.stat). It also produces perf_(—)metric_(—)time_(—)tb.dat, which is a list of all of the unique date-time stamps appearing in the raw data and their corresponding epoch times (the number of seconds since Jan. 1, 1970)

sort_(—)elmnt_(—)files.pl

The sort_(—)elmnt_(—)files.pl sorts all of the <keycode>.element.stage2 and <Keycode>.element.stat files and renames them <keycode>.element.stage2.sorted and <keycode>.element.stat.sorted.

union_(—)all.pl

The union_(—)all.pl script takes the <keycode>.element.stage2.sorted files and concatenates them into perf_(—)fact_(—)tb.dat and the <keycode>.element.stat.sorted files and concatenates them into perf_(—)fact_(—)dly_(—)tb.dat.

move_(—)all.pl

The move_(—)all.pl script moves perf_(—)fact_(—)tb.dat, perf_(—)fact_(—)dly_(—)tb.dat and perf_(—)metric_(—)time_(—)tb.dat to /files6/ipsa/data_(—)loads/data iles.

Data Manipulator Sample Raw Data

Patroller Data

File 1: nsmmpe29_(—)1999_(—)902194516.dat

,,nsmmpe29,HISTORY_(—)Propagator,HISTORY_(—)Propagator,GetHistoryData, 1999- 08-03 19:35:04,0 ,,nsmmpe29,NT_(—)CPU,CPU_(—)0,CPUprcrProcessorTimePercent, 1999-08-03 19:42:51,1.83103 ,,nsmmpe29,NT_(—)CPU,CPU_(—)0,CPUprcrProcessorTimePercent, 1999-08-03 19:57:51,2.2381 ,,nsmmpe29,NT_(—)CPU,CPU_(—)0,CPUprcrProcessorTimePercent, 1999-08-03 20:12:52,3.98922 ,,nsmmpe29,NT_(—)CPU,CPU_(—)0,CPUprcrProcessorTimePercent, 1999-08-03 20:27:52,1.52942 ,,nsmmpe29,NT_(—)MEMORY,NT_(—)MEMORY,MEMmemAvailableBytes, 1999-08-03 19:34:41,4.14453 ,,nsmmpe29,NT_(—)MEMORY,NT_(—)MEMORY,MEMmemAvailableBytes, 1999-08-03 19:49:41,2.4375 ,,nsmmpe29,NT_(—)MEMORY,NT_(—)MEMORY,MEMmemAvailableBytes, 1999-08-03 20:04:41,1.85156 ,,nsmmpe29,NT_(—)MEMORY,NT_(—)MEMORY,MEMmemAvailableBytes, 1999-08-03 20:19:41,1.19531 ,,nsmmpe29,NT_(—)MEMORY,NT_(—)MEMORY,MEMmemAvailableBytes, 1999-08-03 20:34:41,1.14844 ,,nsmmpe29,NT_(—)NETWORK,2,NETniPcktsPerSec, 1999-08-03 19:46:55,10.9169 ,,nsmmpe29,NT_(—)NETWORK,2,NETniPcktsPerSec, 1999-08-03 20:01:55,11.5108 ,,nsmmpe29,NT_(—)NETWORK,2,NETniPcktsPerSec, 1999-08-03 20:16:55,11.514 ,,nsmmpe29,NT_(—)NETWORK,2,NETniPcktsPerSec, 1999-08-03 20:31:55,12.0128 File 2: nsmmws09_(—)1999_(—)901881775.dat

-   ,,nsmmws09,CPU,CPU,CPUCpuUtil,1999-07-31 04:46:42,4 -   ,,nsmmws09,CPU,CPU,CPUCpuUtil,1999-07-31 05:01:47,2 -   ,,nsmmws09,CPU,CPU,CPUCpuUtil,1999-07-31 05:16:52,3 -   ,,nsmmws09,CPU,CPU,CPUCpuUtil,1999-07-31 05:31:57,2 -   ,,nsmmws09,DISK,sd4,DSKPercentBusy,1999-07-31 04:42:14,0 -   ,,nsmmws09,DISK,sd4,DSKPercentBusy,1999-07-31 04:57:14,4 -   ,,nsmmws09,DISK,sd4,DSKPercentBusy,1999-07-31 05:12:15,0 -   ,,nsmmws09,DISK,sd4,DSKPercentBusy,1999-07-31 05:27:15,0 -   ,,nsmmws09,MEMORY,MEMORY,MEMFreeMem, 1999-07-31 04:46:42,37184 -   ,,nsmmws09,MEMORY,MEMORY,MEMFreeMem, 1999-07-31 05:01:47,37172 -   ,,nsmmws09,MEMORY,MEMORY,MEMFreeMem, 1999-07-31 05:16:52,37168 -   ,,nsmmws09,MEMORY,MEMORY,MEMFreeMem,1999-07-31 05:31:57,37168 -   ,,nsmmws09,NETWORK,1e0,NETPacketsln,1999-07-31 04:43:05,6660 -   ,,nsmmws09,NETWORK,1e0,NETPacketsIn,1999-07-31 04:58:06,6423 -   ,,nsmmws09,NETWORK,1e0,NETPacketsIn,1999-07-3 1 05:13:06,6822 -   ,,nsmmws09,NETWORK,1e0,NETPacketsIn,1999-07-31 05:28:07,6285 -   ,,nsmmws09,NETWORK,1e0,NETPacketsOut, 1999-07-31 04:43:05,168 -   ,,nsmmws09,NETWORK,1e0,NETPacketsOut, 1999-07-31 04:58:06,118 -   ,,nsmmws09,NETWORK,1e0,NETPacketsOut, 1999-07-31 05:13:06,199 -   ,,nsmmws09,NETWORK,1e0,NETPacketsOut,1999-07-31 05:28:07,118     File 3:twmmt02_(—)1999_(—)901997338.dat -   ,,twmmnt02,HISTORYPropagator,HISTORY_(—)Propagator,GetHistoryData, 1     999-08-01 12:48:56,0 -   ,,twmmnt02,NT_(—)CPU,CPU_(—)0,CPUprcrProcessorTimePercent,1999-08-01     13:02:42,0.835579 -   ,,twmmnt02,NT_(—)CPU,CPU_(—)0,CPUprcrProcessorTimePercent,     1999-08-01 13:17:42,0.776552 -   ,,twmmnt02,NT_(—)CPU,CPU_(—)0,CPUprcrProcessorTimePercent,     1999-08-01 13:32:42,0.795792 -   ,,twmmnt02,NT_(—)CPU,CPU_(—)0,CPUprcrProcessorTimePercent,1999-08-01     13:47:42,0.786594 -   ,,twmmnt02,NT_(—)MEMORY,NT_(—)MEMORY,MEMmemAvailableBytes,1999-08-01     13:02:49,21.4688 -   ,,twmmnt02,NT_(—)MEMORY,NT_(—)MEMORY,MEMmemAvailableBytes,1999-08-01     13:17:49,21.5703 -   ,,twmmntO2,NT_(—)MEMORY,NT_(—)MEMORY,MEMmemAvailableBytes,1999-08-01     13:32:49,16.7617 -   ,,twmmt02,NT_(—)MEMORY,NT_(—)MEMORY,MEMmemAvailableBytes,1999-08-01     13:47:49,16.8359 -   ,,twmmnt02,NT_(—)NETWORK,2,NETniPcktsPerSec,1999-08-01     13:02:40,14.9904 -   ,,twmmnt02,NT_(—)NETWORK,2,NETniPcktsPerSec,1999-08-01     13:17:40,15.0483 -   ,,twmmnt02,NT_(—)NETWORK,2,NETniPcktsPerSec,1999-08-01     13:32:40,14.8512 -   ,,twmmnt02,NT_(—)NETWORK,2,NETniPcktsPerSec,1999-08-01     13:47:40,15.0225 -   ,,twmmnt02,NT_(—)PHYSICAL_(—)DISKS,DISK_(—)0,PDpdDiskTimePercent,1999-08-01     13:02:40,0 -   ,,twmmnt02,NT_(—)PHYSICAL_(—)DISKS,DISK_(—)0,PDpdDiskTimePercent,     1999-08-01 13:17:40,0 -   ,,twmmnt02,NT_(—)PHYSICAL_(—)DISKS,DISK_(—)0,PDpdDiskTimePercent,     1999-08-01 13:32:40,0 -   ,,twmmnt02,NT_(—)PHYSICAL_(—)DISKS,DISK_(—)0,PDpdDiskTimePercent,1999-08-01     13:47:40,0     Event Correlation and Manager Data     File 1: ifdata.log -   Time=Aug. 11, 1999 09:39:27 Tue, LogId=22248, Severity-Normal,     PropertyGroup=SA_(—)Router_(—)Collection_(—)Group,     Node=nsmmrt04e2-1, Alarm=IfDataLogger, Ostate=Ground, Trigger=if     Data, Nstate=Ground, TrapTime=, GenericTrapNumber=, Enterprise=,     SpecificTrapNumber=,Instance=26, Object=if Entry, Attribute if     Speed=100000000 Attribute ifInOctets=464859949 Attribute if     OutOctets=312935185 -   Time=Aug. 11, 1999 09:39:27 Tue, LogId=22249, Severity-Normal,     PropertyGroup=SA_(—)Router_(—)Collection_(—)Group,     Node=nsmmrt04e2-1, Alarm=IfDataLogger, Ostate=Ground, Trigger=if     Data, Nstate=Ground, TrapTime=, GenericTrapNumber=, Enterprise=,     SpecificTrapNumber=,Instance=27, Object=if Entry, Attribute     ifspeed=100000000 Attribute ifInOctets=0 Attribute if OutOctets=0 -   Time=Aug. 11, 1999 09:39:27 Tue, LogId=22250, Severity-Normal,     PropertyGroup=SA_(—)Router_(—)Collection_(—)Group,     Node=nsmmrt04e2-1, Alarm=IfDataLogger, Ostate=Ground, Trigger=if     Data, Nstate=Ground, TrapTime=, GenericTrapNumber=, Enterprise=,     SpecificTrapNumber=,Instance=28, Object=ifEntry, Attribute if     Speed=100000000 Attribute ifInOctets=0 Attribute if OutOctets=0 -   Time=Aug. 11, 1999 09:39:27 Tue, LogId=22251, Severity-Normal,     PropertyGroup=SA_(—)Router_(—)Collection_(—)Group,     Node=nsmmrt04e2-1, Alarm=IfataLogger, Ostate=Ground, Trigger\-if     Data, Nstate=Ground, TrapTime=, GenericTrapNumber=, Enterprise=,     SpecificTrapNumber=,Instance=29, Object=ifEntry, Attribute if     Speed=3705032704 Attribute ifInOctets=0 Attribute ifoutOctets=0 -   Time=Aug. 11, 1999 09:39:27 Tue, LogId=22252, Severity-Normal,     PropertyGroup=SA_(—)Router_(—)Collection_(—)Group, Node=nsmmrt03,     Alarm=IfDataLogger, Ostate=Ground, Trigger=ifDfata, Nstate=Ground,     TrapTime=, GenericTrapNumber=, Enterprise=,     SpecificTrapNumber=,Instance=1, Object=ifEntry, Attribute if     Speed=10000000 Attribute ifInOctets=1522731264 Attribute if     OutOctets=2554292181 -   Time=Aug. 11, 1999 09:39:27 Tue, LogId=22253, Severity-Normal,     PropertyGroup=SA_(—)Router_(—)Collection_(—)Group, Node=nsmmrt03,     Alarm=IfDataLogger, Ostate=Ground, Trigger=ifData, Nstate=Ground,     TrapTime=, GenericTrapNumber=, Enterprise=,     SpecificTrapNumber=,Instance=2, Object=ifEntry, Attribute if     Speed=10000000 Attribute ifInOctets=0 Attribute ifoutOctets=0 -   Time=Aug. 11, 1999 09:39:27 Tue, LogId=22254, Severity-Normal,     PropertyGroup=SA_(—)Router_(—)Collection_(—)Group, Node=nsmmrt03,     Alarm=IfDataLogger, Ostate=Ground, Trigger=ifData, Nstate=Ground,     TrapTime=, GenericTrapNumber=, Enterprise=,     SpecificTrapNumber=,Instance=3, Object=ifEntry, Attribute if     Speed=10000000 Attribute ifInOctets=0 Attribute if OutOctets=0 -   Time=Aug. 11, 1999 09:39:27 Tue, LogId=22255, Severity=Normal,     PropertyGroup=SA_(—)Router_(—)Collection_(—)Group, Node=nsmmrt03,     Alarm=IfDataLogger, Ostate=Ground, Trigger=if Data, Nstate=Ground,     TrapTime=, GenericTrapNumber=, Enterprise=,     SpecificTrapNumber=,Instance=4, Object=ifEntry, Attribute if     Speed=10000000 Attribute if InOctets=0 Attribute if OutOctets=0 -   Time=Aug. 11, 1999 09:39:27 Tue, LogId=22256, Severity_(—)Normal,     PropertyGroup=SA_(—)Router_(—)Collection_(—)Group, Node=nsmmrt03,     Alarm=IfDataLogger, Ostate=Ground, Trigger=ifData, Nstate=Ground,     TrapTime=, GenericTrapNumber=, Enterprise=,     SpecificTrapNumber=,Instance=5, Object=if Entry, Attribute     ifSpeed=10000000 Attribute ifInOctets=958056 Attribute if     OutOctets=3610555     File 2: lsystemdata.log -   Time=Aug. 11, 1999 09:18:26 Tue, LogId=22153, Severity=Normal,     PropertyGroup=SA_(—)Router_(—)Collection_(—)Group,     Node=nsmmrt04e2-1, Alarm=lsystemDataLogger, Ostate=Ground,     Trigger=lsystemData, Nstate=Ground, TrapTime=, GenericTrapNumber=,     Enterprise=, SpecificTrapNumber=,Instance=0, Object=lsystem,     Attribute busyPer=4 -   Time=Aug. 11, 1999 09:18:28 Tue, LogId=22154, Severity=Normal,     PropertyGroup=SA\_(—)Router_(—)Collection_(—)Group, Node=nsmmrt03,     Alarm =lsystemDataLogger, Ostate=Ground, Trigger=lsystemData,     Nstate=Ground, TrapTime=, GenericTrapNumber=, Enterprise=,     SpecificTrapNumber=,Instance=0, Object=lsystem, Attribute busyPer=4 -   Time=Aug. 11, 1999 09:33:38 Tue, LogId=22219, Severity=Normal,     PropertyGroup=SA_(—)Router_(—)Collection_(—)Group,     Node=nsmmrt04e2-1, Alarm=lsystemDataLogger, Ostate=Ground,     Trigger=lsystemData, Nstate=Ground, TrapTime=, GenericTrapNumber=,     Enterprise=, SpecificTrapNumber=,Instance=0, Object=lsystem,     Attribute busyPer=2 -   Time=Aug. 11, 1999 09:33:40 Tue, LogId=22220, Severity=Normal,     PropertyGroup=SA_(—)Router_(—)Collection_(—)Group, Node”=nsmmrt03,     Alarm=lsystemDataLogger, Ostate=Ground, Trigger=lsystemData,     Nstate=Ground, TrapTime=, GenericTrapNumber=, Enterprise=,     SpecificTrapNumber=,Instance=0, Object=lsystem, Attribute busyPer=7 -   Time=Aug. 11, 1999 09:48:43 Tue, LogId=22283, Severity=Normal,     PropertyGroup=SA_(—)Router_(—)Collection_(—)Group,     Node=nsmmrt04e2-1, Alarm=lsystemDataLogger, Ostate=Ground,     Trigger=lsystemData, Nstate=Ground, TrapTime=, GenericTrapNumber=,     Enterprise=, SpecificTrapNumber=,Instance=0, Object=lsystem,     Attribute busyPer=2 -   Time=Aug. 11, 1999 09:48:45 Tue, LogId=22284, Severity=Normal,     PropertyGroup=SA_(—)Router_(—)Collection_(—)Group, Node=nsmmrt03,     Alarm=lsystemDataLogger, Ostate=Ground, Trigger=lsystemData,     Nstate=Ground, TrapTime=, GenericTrapNumber=, Enterprise=,     SpecificTrapNumber=,Instance=0, Object=lsystem, Attribute busyPer=10 -   Time=Aug. 11, 1999 10:03:49 Tue, LogId=22347, Severity=Normal,     PropertyGroup=SA_(—)Router_(—)Collection_(—)Group,     Node=nsmmrt04e2-1, Alarm=lsystemDataLogger, Ostate=Ground,     Trigger=lsystemData, Nstate=Ground, TrapTime=, GenericTrapNumber=,     Enterprise=, SpecificTrapNumber=,Instance=0, Object=lsystem,     Attribute busyPer=4 -   Time=Aug. 11, 1999 10:03:51 Tue, LogId=22348, Severity=Normal,     PropertyGroup =SA_(—)Router_(—)Collection_(—)Group, Node=nsmmrt03,     Alarm=lsystemDataLogger, Ostate=Ground, Trigger=lsystemData,     Nstate=Ground, TrapTime=, GenericTrapNumber=, Enterprise=,     SpecificTrapNumber=,Instance=0, Object=lsystem, Attribute busyPer=6 -   Time=Aug. 11, 1999 10:18:56 Tue, LogId=2241 7, Severity=Normal,     PropertyGroup=SA_(—)Router_(—)Collection_(—)Group,     Node=nsmmrt04e2-1, Alarm=lsystemDataLogger, Ostate=Ground,     Trigger=lsystemData, Nstate=Ground, TrapTime=, GenericTrapNumber=,     Enterprise=, SpecificTrapNumber=,Instance=0, Object=lsystem,     Attribute busyPer=3 -   Time=Aug. 11, 1999 10:18:58 Tue, LogId=22418, Severity=Normal,     PropertyGroup=SA_(—)Router_(—)Collection_(—)Group, Node=nsmmrt03,     Alarm=lsystemDataLogger, Ostate=Ground, Trigger=lsystemData,     Nstate=Ground, TrapTime=, GenericTrapNumber=, Enterprise=,     SpecificTrapNumber=,Instance=0, Object=lsystem, Attribute busyPer=3     Desired Metrics and their Standard or Derive Metrics

TABLE 1 Standard or Derived SNMP metrics Patroller metrics Metric busyPer n/a CpuBusy_(—)Percent ifInOctects, n/a InterfaceUtilization_(—)Percent ifOutOctets, ifSpeed ifInOctets, n/a InterfaceUtilization_(—)BPS ifOutOctets, ifSpeed n/a CPUCpuUtil CpuUtilization_(—)Percent n/a MEMFreeMem MemoryFree_(—)Bytes n/a NETPacketsIn, NetworkTraffic_(—)PPS NETPacketsOut n/a DSKPercentBusy DiskBusy_(—)Percent n/a CPUprcrProcessorTime CpuProcessorTime_(—)Percent Percent n/a MEMmemAvailable MemoryFree_(—)Bytes Bytes n/a NETniPcktsPerSec NetworkTraffic_(—)PPS n/a PDpdDiskTimePercent DiskTime_(—)Percent n/a ftpResponseTime FtpResponseTime_(—)Seconds n/a smtpResponseTime SmtpResponseTime_(—)Seconds n/a nntpResponseTime NntpResponseTime_(—)Seconds n/a httpResponseTime HttpResponseTime_(—)Seconds Data Loader

The purpose of the data loader in the SA toolkit is to perform recommended operations on the gathered event data before it is loaded into the database. Primarily, the raw data files need to be concatenated, reformatted, translated to key codes, and sorted. In addition, the data loader will also perform statistical calculations on the data for daily “roll-up” reports to be loaded into the database.

Body Section

Patroller Data

Performance data from Patroller collectors is in the following text log file format:

-   ,,<element name>,<object type>,<instance>,<metric name>,<date     time>,<metric value> -   a sample file (found in     nsmmws16:/opt/PATROLLER3.2/Solaris25-Sun4/remote/): -   ,,nsmmws09,CPU,CPU,CPUCpuUtil, 1999-07-30 14:58:13,25 -   ,,nsmmws09,CPU,CPU,CPUCpuUtil,1999-07-30 15:13:18,52 -   ,,nsmmws09,CPU,CPU,CPUCpuUtil,1999-07-30 15:28:24,32 -   ,,nsmmws09,DISK,fd0,DSKPercentBusy,1999-07-30 15:03:15,0 -   ,,nsmmws09,DISK,sd4,DSKPercentBusy,1999-07-30 15:03:15,0 -   ,,nsmmws09,DISK,sd4,DSKPercentBusy,1999-07-30 15:18:15,4 -   ,,nsmmws09,DISK,sd4,DSKPercentBusy,1999-07-30 15:33:15,0 -   ,,nsmmws09,MEMORY,MEMORY,MEMFreeMem,1999-07-30 14:58:13,24008 -   ,,nsmmws09,MEMORY,MEMORY,MEMFreeMem,1999-07-30 15:13:18,23548 -   ,,nsmmws09,MEMORY,MEMORY,MEMFreeMem,1999-07-30 15:28:24,23544

After parsing and reordering, the format is:

-   <element>, <metric name>, <instancename>, <date time>, <metric     value>

Finally, the element name and metric name must be translated to their corresponding key codes and the date time must be converted to the format consistent with the database:

-   16838, 236998718,6293,54

Event Correlator and Manager (ECM) Data

Performance data from ECM collectors is in the following text log file format: (note: fields in italics are do not have values for poll data):

-   Time=<datetime>, LogId=<LogID>, Severity=<Severity>,     PropertyGroup=<PropertyGroup>, Node=<Node>, Alarm=<Alarm>,     Ostate=<Ostate>, Trigger=<Trigger>, Nstate=<Nstate>,     TrapTime=<TrapTime>, GenericTrapNumber=<GenericTrapNumber>,     Enterprise=<Enterprise>, SpecificTrapNumber=<SpecificTrapNumber>,     Instance=<, [instance value]>, Object=<[base_(—)object_(—)name]>,     Attribue <[attributename]>=value . . . . -   a sample file (found in/opt/seasoft/userfiles/logs/ifdata.log) -   Time=Aug. 11, 1999 09:39:27 Tue, LogId=22248, Severity=Normal,     PropertyGroup=SA_(—)Router_(—)Collection_(—)Group,     Node=nsmmrt04e2-1, Alarm=IfDataLogger, Ostate=Ground,     Trigger=idData, Nstate=Ground, TrapTime=GenericTrapNumber=,     Enterprise=, SpecificTrapNumber=,Instance=26, Object=ifEntry,     Attribute if Speed=100000000 Attribute ifInOctets=464859949     Attribute if OutOctets=312935185 -   Time=Aug. 11, 1999 09:39:27 Tue, LogId=22249, Severity-Normal,     PropertyGroup=SA_(—)Router_(—)Collection_(—)Group,     Node=nsmmrt04e2-1, Alarm=IfDataLogger, Ostate=Ground,     Trigger=ifData, Nstate=Ground, TrapTime=, GenericTrapNumber=,     Enterprise=, SpecificTrapNumber=,Instance=27, Object=ifEntry,     Attribute if Speed=1000\900000 Attribute ifInOctets=0 Attribute if     OutOctets=0 -   Time=Aug. 11, 1999 09:39:27 Tue, LogId=22250, Severity_(—)Normal,     PropertyGroup=SA_(—)Router_(—)Collection_(—)Group,     Node=nsmmrt04e2-1, Alarm=IfDataLogger, Ostate=Ground, Trigger=if     Data, Nstate=Ground, TrapTime=, GenericTrapNumber=, Enterprise=,     SpecificTrapNumber=Instance=28, Object=ifEntry, Attribute if     Speed=100000000 Attribute if InOctets=0 Attribute if OutOctets=0 -   Time=Aug. 11, 1999 09:39:27 Tue, LogId=22251, Severity=Normal,     PropertyGroup=SA_(—)Router Collection_(—)Group, Node=nsmmrt04e2-1,     Alarm—IfDataLogger, Ostate=Ground, Trigger=ifData, Nstate—Ground,     TrapTime=, GenericTrapNumber=, Enterprise=,     SpecificTrapNumber=,Instance=29, Object=ifEntry, Attribute if     Speed=3705032704 Attribute ifInOctets=0 Attribute if OutOctets=0

After parsing and reordering, the format is:

-   <element>, <metric name>, <instance name>, <datetime>, <metric     value>

Finally, the element name and metric name must be translated to their corresponding key codes and the date time must be converted to the format consistent with the database:

-   16838, 236998718,6293,54     High Level Architecture Description

FIG. 9 illustrates an exemplary configuration of an architecture 900 of the present invention for manipulating data using a Patroller and an ECM.

Load Config File 902

-   Inputs: Configuration file. -   Description: This subroutine will open the configuration file, read     in the required values to three arrays and close the configuration     file. -   Outputs: Three arrays: @SectionNames,     @SectionMarker, @SectionValues. @SectionNames will contain all of     the section titles found in the Config file, (SECTION_(—)GENERAL,     SECTION_(—)CONCATENATE_(—)FILES, SECTION_(—)REORDER_(—)FIELDS . . .     ); @SectionValues will contain each line from the config file (that     isn't a section header, a blank line, or a comment) as a single     element; @SectionMarker will contain the index number of the last     line of each section. This way, you can pull out just the elements     of the @SectionValues array that you need for a given functional     block.     Concatenate All Files 904 -   Inputs: All log files in the directory sa/prd/dat/process/ECM and     sa/prd/dat/process/Patroller. ECM data will have a .nrc extension,     Patroller data will have a .pat extension. -   Description: This subroutine will concatenate all files from a given     source into one master file. For each file in the directory (/ECM     and/Patroller), it will read in each line, and:     -   Concatenate to master (actually done last) 906     -   Filter to only include desired metrics (delete line if it isn't         listed as a desired metric) 908     -   Reorder and drop fields (split on “,” and put in proper order:         <element>, <metric>, <time>, value). 910     -   Format non-standard fields into standard comma separated format.         For each element file with a nonstandard field format (such as         ECM's dual value fields with a metric=value format), this         subroutine will convert these nonstandard fields to standard         fields. 912     -   Outputs: The files master.nrc and master.pat.         Generate Element Files 914 -   Inputs: Master.nrc and master.pat. (Proper order, comma separated,     all text). -   Description: For each master file, this subroutine will read each     line, create an element file for each unique element, and write the     line to the appropriate file. -   Outputs: The files element1.elemnrc, element2.elemnrc, . . . (for     all elements found in master.nrc) and the files element1.elempat,     element3.elempat (for all elements found in master.pat).     Convert Date-Time Stamps to Standard 916 -   Inputs: Element files. (*.elemnrc, *.elempat, proper order, comma     separated, all text) -   Description:. Convert the current date time stamps to a standard     format (e.g. the 1999-07-30 15:42:13 format found in Patroller files     would be converted to . . . ) -   Outputs: Element files.     Convert to Standard Metric Names 918 -   Inputs: Element files. (*.elemnrc, *.elempat, proper order, comma     separated, all text). -   Description: For each element file, this function will lookup each     metric name in a hash or flatfile. If found, it will convert it to     standard. Else, it's already standard. -   Outputs: (Expanded) Element files.     Sort Element files by Metric Time 920 -   Inputs: Element files (*.elemnrc, *.elempat, proper order, comma     separated, all text). -   Description: This subroutine will perform and ordered sort on each     element file, sorting first by metric, then by time stamp. -   Outputs: Element files.     Calculate Derived Fields 922 -   Inputs: Element files. (*.elemnrc, *.elempat, proper order, comma     separated, all text, sorted by metric and timestamp). -   Description: For each element file, this subroutine will read each     line and search for all metrics (at a given time) required to     calculate derived metrics, calculate the given derived metric,     create a new line for this derived metric, and append this line to     the end of the file. -   Outputs: Element files.     Calculate Statistical Data and create Rollup Files 924 -   Inputs: Element files. (*.elemnrc, *.elempat, proper order, comma     separated, all text, sorted by metric and timestamp, derived metrics     at end of file). -   Description: For each element file, this subroutine will -   1) read each line for a given metric, -   2) store each value into a temp array, -   3) calculate min, max, mean, standard dev., and sample size, -   4) create a new line (<element>, <metric>, <time>, <min>, <max>,     <mean>, <stddev>, <n>), -   5) write this line to a newly created rollup file and -   6) repeat for the next metric. -   Outputs: Original element files (unchanged), rollup files     stats.elemdailypat, stats.elemdailynrc     Convert all Text Fields to Key Codes 926 -   Inputs: Element files (*.elemnrc, *.elempat, proper order, comma     separated, all text, sorted by metric and timestamp, derived metrics     at end of file), and rollup files. -   Description: For each file, this subroutine will read each line,     convert each text field to a key code (according to a lookup table     in a hash or file, except for the time field, which will be     calculated), and write the line to a temp file. When all lines have     been converted, the source file will be deleted, and the temp file     will be moved to the source file.

For each file and for each unique time stamp, create a new line with the new calculated time key cd (<perf time_(—)key_(—)cd>, <dt>, <day>, <mon>, <yr>, <hour>, <min>, <sec>, <dow>) and write to a file perf_(—)metric_(—)time_(—)tb.dat file. (This file then should be collapsed to remove duplicate time stamps from different elements). 928

-   Outputs: (Encoded) element files and rollup files.     Union All Files of Same Element 930 -   Inputs: Element files (*.elemnrc, *.elempat, proper order, comma     separated, all key codes, sorted by metric and timestamp, derived     metrics at end of file), and rollup files (all key codes) -   Description: This subroutine will concatenate all files of the same     element, regardless of collector source (*.pat, *.nrc, . . . ) into     a *.elemall files. -   Outputs: All-Element files: element1.elemall, element2.elemall,     Sort Each Element File 932 -   Inputs: All-Element files (see A. 10) -   Description: This subroutine will sort each file first by metric,     then by time stamp. -   Outputs: All-Element files     Union All Files 934 -   Inputs: All-Element files, Rollup files (see A.10) -   Description: This subroutine will concatenate all *elemall files     into perf_(—)fact_(—)tb.dat, and all rollup files into     perf_(—)fact_(—)daily_(—)tb.dat. -   Outputs: Database load files: perf_(—)fact_(—)tb.dat,     perf_(—)fact_(—)daily_(—)tb.dat     Move Files 936 -   Inputs: A files ready to be archived or moved to sql loader     (perf_(—)fact_(—)tb.dat, perf_(—)fact_(—)daily_(—)tb.dat,     perf_(—)metric_(—)time_(—)tb.dat) -   Description: This subroutine copies and/or moves files to any     arbitrary location on a local drive. -   Outputs: Copies and/or moves files to     /files6/ipsa/data_(—)loads/data_(—)files/ on twmmdb02.

Metric Names SNMP metrics Patroller metrics Standard or Derived Metric busyPer n/a CpuBusy_(—)Percent ifInOctects, n/a InterfaceUtilization_(—)Percent ifOutOctets, ifSpeed ifInOctets, n/a InterfaceUtilization_(—)BPS ifOutOctets, ifSpeed n/a CPUCpuUtil CpuUtilization_(—)Percent n/a MEMFreeMem MemoryFree_(—)Bytes n/a NETPacketsIn, NetworkTraffic_(—)PPS NETPacketsOut n/a DSKPercentBusy DiskBusy_(—)Percent n/a CPUprcrProcessorTime CpuProcessorTime_(—)Percent Percent n/a MEMmemAvailableBytes MemoryFree_(—)Bytes n/a NETniPcktsPerSec NetworkTraffic_(—)PPS n/a PDpdDiskTimePercent DiskTime_(—)Percent n/a ftpResponseTime FtpResponseTime_(—)Seconds n/a smtpResponseTime SmtpResponseTime_(—)Seconds n/a nntpResponseTime NntpResponseTime_(—)Seconds n/a httpResponseTime HttpResponseTime_(—)Seconds Configuration of Event Correlator and Manager

This section describes how to configure the Event Correlator and Manager (UNIX) to collect performance data. It covers the process of adding property groups, creating polls, and building alarms to collect basic performance statistics from CISCO routers. Although the examples are specific to CISCO routers, the concepts and processes introduced are transitive, and can be used to implement collection for other types of SNMP devices.

Accordingly, FIG. 10 depicts an embodiment of the present invention which generates an alarm to indicate a status of a network for service assurance purposes. Such purposes can include identifying errors and faults, monitoring system resources, anticipating problems, etc. Once a parameter of a network that is to be monitored is selected in operation 1000, a triggering level of the parameter is determined in operation 1002. In operation 1004, the parameter for an occurrence of the triggering level is monitored. If the triggering level is reached, an alarm is initiated in operation 1006.

In one aspect of the present invention, the alarm is named for identification purposes. Optionally, the parameter can be adapted to be monitored for a plurality of components of the network. In such an embodiment, a separate alarm notification may be initiated for each of the components upon the monitored occurrence of the triggering level thereon.

As an option, the alarm notification may be stored upon its initiation. Preferably, the alarm notification is stored until the occurrence of a user action.

Assumptions:

-   -   The ECM MIB definition for your network hardware has been added         to the MIB file.         Starting the Client     -   Start the ECM Client as ‘no’, if it is not already running.     -   Using the Server/Connect menu selection, connect to the network         management station as (i.e. nsmmwsl6) as ‘noc’.     -   Using the Server/Resync menu selection, resynchronize the ECM         database with the platform database containing managed nodes         (i.e. HP NNM).         Create a new ‘Property Group’

Property groups allow categorization of managed devices into groups. The groups can be based on device types, location, priority, supported MIBs, business function, or any other useful characteristic. Polls or alarms can be restricted to the members of one or more property groups.

-   -   Select the Admin/Property Group List menu option to open the         Property Group List.     -   Select the MIB to Group button to open the MIB to Property Group         window.     -   Select the MIB of interest from those listed in the MIB list.         For our example, select MIB-II.     -   Type a unique name in the Property Group Name field, and then         select OK. For this example, enter         “SA_(—)Router_(—)Collection_(—)Group”.         Adding a Property to a Property Group

Adding properties to an existing property group enables one to take advantage of the flexibility of property groups. Properties may need to be added if it is desired to:

-   -   Make a property group unique by adding a property that isn't in         any other group. By assigning the unique property group to         selected devices, you can manage those devices differently from         other devices.     -   Make polls and/or alarms apply to devices belonging to that         property group.     -   Monitor a base object on a group of devices when the base object         isn't listed as a property in the devices' property group.

For the purposes of this example, the “lsystem” base object property will be added, defined in the cscoe.asnl MIB definition; as well as a custom property to make the property group unique.

-   -   From within the Property Group List window, select         SA_(—)Router_(—)Collection_(—)Group from the list of groups     -   Click inside the New Property field, type the name of the new         property, and select Add. For our example, type         “SA_(—)Router_(—)Collection_(—)Property”.     -   Repeat the previous step to add the “lsystem” property.     -   Select Save     -   Close the Property Group List window         Assigning Property Groups

In the following example, SA_(—)Router_(—)Collection_(—)Group, the property groups created in the previous section, will be assigned to a single router.

-   -   Open the Node Definition window for the device.     -   Select the property group you would like associated with this         device from the pop-up list in the Group field.     -   Select Save, and close the Node Definition window.         Create a new ‘Poll’     -   Open the ‘Polls’ list from the Patroller console using the         Admin/Polls . . . menu selection.     -   Select ‘Add’ from the Polls window.     -   Configure the poll         -   Leave ‘Object Type’ as Poll         -   Change ‘Name’ to a new name         -   Set the desired poll rate.         -   Type a new name for the ‘Poll Trigger’. Use a name similar             to the name you gave to this poll.         -   Leave False Trigger blank         -   Leave Property as ‘NO_(—)PROP’         -   Select ‘Set Poll Condition’

-   (a) Select the ‘Base Object’ from which you want to collect data.     This base object directly correlates to the base object of the SNMP     MIB.

-   (b) Select the desired ‘Attributes’ from the base object and drag     them into the ‘Expression’ box using the middle mouse button. For     each Attribute selected, change the ‘Rel Op’ field to ‘present’ and     click the ‘Add’ button. When all attributes have been selected,     click the ‘Apply’ button.

EXAMPLE POLL

Poll lsystemDataPoll

-   -   Poll rate=15 min     -   True Trigger=lsystemDataTrigger     -   Property=SA_(—)Router_(—)Collection_(—)Property     -   Poll condition:     -   Base object=lsystem     -   lsystem.avgBusy1 present and     -   lsystem.avgBusy5 present and     -   lsystem.busyPer present         Create a new “Alarm”     -   Open the ‘Alarm Definitions’ list from the Patroller console         using ‘Admin->Alarm Definitions . . . ’ selection.     -   Select ‘Add’ from the Alarm window.     -   Configure the new Alarm.     -   Select a new name for the Logging alarm.     -   Select the property of the device group you want to collect data         from.     -   Select the ‘State Diagram’ button.     -   Using the ‘New State’ button, create 2 states called ‘Ground’         and ‘Logging’. The ‘Severity’ of both states should be set to         ‘normal’.     -   Using the ‘New Transition’ button, create a transition from         ‘Ground’ to ‘Logging’. The trigger for this transition should be         the name of the ‘Poll Trigger’ you defined in section 3.1.4.         Select ‘Apply’. Under ‘Action’ select ‘Log’ and type the name of         the log file where you want the data stored in the ‘Arguments’         field. Note: use the name of the trigger with a ‘.log’ extension         for the log name. Do not enter a path name as all data is stored         in the pre-defined ECM logging directory.     -   Create the same transition from ‘Logging’ to ‘Logging’.     -   In the ‘Alarm Configuration View’ select ‘On’ and ‘Apply’.         Note/Caution:

When designing a logging alarm based on two states (i.e. ground and logging), be aware that a new 5K instance of the alarm may be instantiated and remain in memory for each object within the defined scope. For example, a subobject scoped alarm with two states, ground and logging, created to collect interfaced data from a router would be instantiated once for each interface on all routers in the target property group. Because this alarm contains two states, ground and logging, the alarm remains in memory until manually stopped as it never returns to the ground state. One method of avoiding this unnecessary overhead is to create the logging alarm with only one state, ground, and a single transition from ground to ground.

EXAMPLE ALARM

Design is Ground to Ground, with a single transition based on the ‘lsystemDataTrigger’ defined in the example poll above.

Alarm=lsystemDataLogger

-   -   Property=SA_(—)Router_(—)Collection_(—)Property     -   Scope=node     -   State List:     -   Ground—Normal     -   Transition List:     -   Ground→Ground Trigger=if DataTrigger     -   Action=Log to file:     -   Ifdata.log     -   Verbose enabled         Update the Nerve Center Schema Files

The ECM schema file(s) (e.g. ecm_(—)schema.def) are used by the SA data management subsystem to define and upload data into SAS datasets.

-   -   Edit the file ‘/perf/CONFIGS/NERVEC_(—)schema.def’ Add to the         end of this file a section for the new data you are collecting.         The section should start with a single line to define the new         ‘TABLE’ name, multiple lines for the attributes being collected,         and a single line indicating the end of the table definition         with the label ‘ENDTABLE’.     -   Add the ‘TABLE’ line. This line has 5 fields separated by         commas.         Field 1—‘TABLE’ label         Field 2—Name of new SAS dataset. This field should be no longer         than 6 characters.         Field 3—Name of the ‘Poll Trigger’.         Field 4—Name of the Alarm.         Field 5—INDEXED or NONINDEXED. Type INDEXED if this is to be and         INDEXED dataset. An INDEXED dataset contains data with multiple         instances for a single device. For example, collecting router         interface data for each interface on a router would be INDEXED,         while collecting CPU data from a single CPU on a router would be         NONIDEXED.

EXAMPLE

TABLE,NCSWRMON,RMONData,NC_(—)RMONDataLogger,INDEXED

-   -   Add a line for each attributed collected. These lines have 5         fields separated by commas.         Field 1—Name of the SAS Dataset defined in the ‘TABLE’ line.         Field 2—New name of the attribute. This name must be 7         characters or less.         Field 3—Name of the ‘Poll Trigger’.         Field 4—Name of the Attribute being collected by ECM.         Field 5—Type of data. (STRING, C2RATE, GAUGE, INT)         STRING: Alphanumeric string.         C2RATE: If the data is a rising counter, the label will tell SAS         to convert it to a rate for the interval in which is was         collected.         GAUGE: If the data is already a rate or a percentage. SAS will         do no conversion.         INT: If the data is an integer (Ex: Interface number)

EXAMPLE

NCSWRMON,INBITS,RMONData,etherStatsDataSource,STRING

-   -   Add a line to signify the end of the configuration section. This         line has 3 fields separated by commas.         Field 1—‘ENDTABLE’ label         Field 2—Name of new SAS dataset.         Field 3—Name of the ECM Alarm.

EXAMPLE

ENDTABLE,NCSWRMON,NC_(—)RMONDataLogger

Database

One embodiment of the present invention, shown in FIG. 11, is used to develop a database. Data is extracted from a source system with an application program in operation 1100. The data is translated into a consistent model in operation 1102. The model contains information selected from one or more of performance metric information, time data, geographic location data, and event data. The modeled data is stored in a database in operation 1104. The data is analyzed in operation 1106 based on the information and the results of the analysis are output. It should be noted that the data may be analyzed before or after storing.

In one aspect of the present invention, the data is extracted using a plurality of application programs. Further, the information may include performance metric information, time data, geographic location data, and event data.

In yet another aspect of the present invention, the results may be outputted by way of reports and charts. Further, identifiers may be assigned to groups of the data. The data can also be stored in a plurality of databases including a first database for development purposes, a second database for testing purposes, and a third database for production purposes.

Refer to the following sections for more detailed information and additional embodiments.

Database Design

The database for the Service Assurance Toolkit can be designed as a data warehouse. This design offers greater performance and flexibility, which will enable the database to evolve in future releases of the Service Assurance Toolkit. The architecture for a successful data warehouse, by which we mean the end-to-end tools and processes, will vary from implementation to implementation. A typical data warehousing architecture should include, as a minimum:

-   -   Multiple extract programs from one or more operational systems,         to retrieve the source data for the warehouse.     -   A data repository (“Operational Data Store”) containing the         extracted data in an appropriate model.     -   A tool to analyze and display the data as reports and charts.

The design of the SA database should also be independent of any relational DBMS. By doing this the SA toolkit will be more portable across platforms and will allow us to better meet client needs. Also, the design of the database may contain all necessary information to meet the requirements laid out in the reporting requirement document. For the SA toolkit, the data model should contain information such as:

-   -   Network element information.     -   Performance Metric information.     -   Detailed time data     -   Network element geographic location data     -   Network element event data

The design of the database can utilize surrogate keys to uniquely identify records. This will be done to increase query performance as well as to add flexibility to the database design. However, this adds complexity to the data manipulation because look-ups on the surrogate keys will need to take place.

Physical Database

The SA toolkit may be built on the Oracle RDBMS platform. While this is a specific platform, the physical design of the database can be independent of Oracle and portable to the major players in the RDBMS world i.e. Sybase, Informix, DB2, Microsoft, etc.

Development Environment

The database environment will have one database for the entire development process. However, for larger networks, more databases can be installed. For example, three databases may be installed—one database each for the devel, test, and production environments.

The installation and file system structure for the database will follow an Optimal Flexible Architecture (OFA). OFA is a set of 13 guidelines or goals to follow in order to standardize the database environment.

Database Backup/Recovery

Backups of the SA database will meet the following requirements:

-   -   The backup script utility may be written in perl. Perl allows         scripts to be more portable across hardware platforms.     -   The backup utility can be executed by the UNIX cron utility. It         could also be executed by the Windows NT AT scheduler if running         on the NT platform.     -   Cold backups will be run at least once a week. This requires         database down time.     -   Exports of the database will take place every evening at the end         of the nightly batch schedule.         Database Objects

All database objects (DDL, scripts, code) will be placed under source control. This will be done to allow for versioning when databases for other environments are implemented. This also places these objects in a centralized location for easy access.

Data Management, Retention and Volume

Data Volume

The estimated volume of detailed data is 2,000,000 rows per day. The physical design of the database will be built to handle this volume while remaining flexible enough to handle a large increase in volume.

Data Manipulation

Due to the fact surrogate keys will be used to uniquely identify records, a look-up process needs to occur in the data manipulation process. A perl script will be written to extract surrogate key information from the database to flat files. The data manipulation process will use these files to generate flat files in a format that can be loaded into the database tables.

During the nightly batch window, all the detailed level data will be rolled up into daily summary data.

Data Loading

The detailed records will be loaded in via a perl script which utilizes an SQL*Loader utility. While all of the major RDBMS vendors have some sort of data loading utility, they are all different syntactically. Thus, this script may need to change depending on the type of database. For phase 2, the detailed data may be loaded once a day during the nightly batch run.

Daily rollup data will also be loaded via the load script at the same time the detail records are loaded. This is possible because all of the data manipulation is occurring outside of the RDBMS.

Data Retention

Phase 2 recommends detailed level data to be retained for 40 days and daily rollup data retained for 13 months. A perl script will be written to purge this data once is has expired. This process will run nightly, before the actual loading of the data occurs.

Database Developer

The purpose of this section is to outline the steps taken to install a Database Developer portion of the present invention on a server. The following examples will teach how to install the Database Developer on both a Windows NT Workstation and a HP 9000 Server. This section should also be applicable to install the Database Developer on different servers. “Dbse” throughout the description of the present invention denotes a database program.

Minimum System Requirements

The minimum system requirements should be determined before installation of the Database Developer. Exemplary minimum system requirements are:

Each Client Workstation

-   -   90 MHz processor     -   32 Mb RAM, 1 Gb hard disk     -   60–680 Mb available disk space (depending on the components you         choose to install     -   Windows NT 4.0/95     -   SQL*Net Client 2.3.4     -   TCP/IP Adapter     -   SQL*Plus 3.3.4     -   CD-ROM drive         On the Server (for each Repository Created).     -   125 Mb in the SYSTEM tablespace     -   20–330 Mb in other tables for the Repository data     -   16–28 Mb available RAM for the System Global Area         Pre-Installation Steps     -   Verify the system requirements are met at each client         workstation     -   Verify the Server is correctly installed and accessible on the         network     -   Verify the database instance you wish to use has been created         and functions correctly         Client Installation

-   1. Log on to the client workstation as a user with administrative     privileges but not as an administrator

-   2. Close all other applications

-   3. Insert the Database Developer media into a media reading device,     (e.g., insert a CD into the CD-ROM drive)

-   4. In the Installation Settings dialog box:     -   a) Type the name of the license owner for this product     -   b) Select DEFAULT_(—)HOME for Home Name     -   c) Select English for Home Language     -   d) Click OK

-   5. Select Yes in all Update message boxes to update out-of-date     products

-   6. Select No in all Up to Date message boxes to avoid reinstalling     products

-   7. Select OK in all General Information and System Support Files     message boxes to acknowledge message

-   8. Select OK to acknowledge the products that will be installed

-   9. Select OK to acknowledge that Installation is complete

-   10. Configure SQL*Net as follows:     -   a) Click Start→Programs→SQL for Windows NT→SQL Net Easy         Configuration     -   b) Choose Add Database Alias and click OK     -   c) In the Choose Database Alias box, type the database alias you         wish to use and click OK     -   d) Choose TCP/IP in the Choose Protocol dialog box and click OK     -   e) In the Choose Protocol/Server Name and Database Instance         dialog box:         -   i. Type the name of the server where the database is located         -   ii. In the Database Instance field, type the name of the             database         -   iii. Click OK, click Yes     -   f) Select Exit SQL*Net Easy Configuration, click OK         -   g) Click OK             Server Installation (Example)             Activities at the Database Server

-   1. Log on to the UNIX Server that holds the database

-   2. Start the database instance, if not already running

-   3. Verify that TNS Listener is running

-   4. Log onto SQL*Plus as system

-   5. In SQL*Plus, verify that the procedural option has been installed

-   a) Execute the following SQL statement:     SQL>create or replace procedure test as x varchar2(10)

-   2 begin

-   3 if x is null then null

-   4 end if

-   5 end

-   6/     Warning: Procedure created with compilation errors.     SQL>drop procedure test;     Procedure dropped.

-   b) If the SQL statement returns an error (as above), continue to     step c. Otherwise go to step 5.

-   c) Run the following SQL script to install the option where     dbse_(—)home is the location where dbse is installed (C:\DBSNT):     SQL>@dbse_(—)home/rdbms/73/admin/catproc.sql

-   6. Create two tablespaces, one for Repository Data and another for     Repository Index, of size 100 Mb each

-   7. Create one tablespace for small rollback segments (recommended     four rollback segments @(10 Mb each)

-   8. Create one large tablespace for the rollback statement used     during installation. The size of this rollback segment should be as     big as possible (recommended at least 100 Mb). In this tablespace,     create one rollback segment and put it online (this rollback segment     and tablespace can be removed after install)

-   9. Take all rollback segments offline except the SYSTEM rollback     segment and the one created in step 8

-   10. Check the size of the SYSTEM tablespace. You will need at least     125 Mb of free space for the installation.

-   11. Create the Repository owner and grant connection and resource     roles

-   12. Check the settings in the INITxxx.DBA (where xxx is the name of     the database) file and change if necessary.

-   13. If any changes were made to INITxxx.DBA in the previous step,     shut down and restart the database. Make sure to close anySQL*Plus     windows that are open. Once the database is restarted successfully,     exit Server Manager     Activities at the Client

-   1. Log on to the Client Workstation as a user with administrative     privileges but not as an administrator

-   2. Log on to the database using SQL*Plus

-   3. Create a role called OWNER

-   a) Execute the following SQL statement where home is the directory     where the Database Developer was installed:     SQL>home\repadm20\utl\ckrorole.sql

-   b) Issue all privileges that apply to the Repository owner

-   4. Grant the role created in step 3 to the Repository owner

-   5. Close any SQL*Plus windows that are open

-   6. Start the Repository Administration Utility

-   7. Connect as the Repository owner

-   8. Click the View Privileges button and verify the required system     privileges and roles are granted for the Repository owner. If     privileges and roles are correct, continue by clicking Cancel

-   9. Click the View Tablespace button to check whether the SYSTEM     tablespace is fragmented. If the SYSTEM tablespace is not     fragmented, continue by clicking Cancel

-   10. Click the View Parameters button to verify the parameters are     set correctly. If they are correct, continue by clicking Cancel

-   11. Click the Install button on the Repository Administration     Utility window

-   12. Choose Small, Medium, or Large in the Repository Size box     according to the expected initial size of the Repository and click     the Estimate button

-   13. Click the Pre-Check button to view a list of system privileges.     Insure all privileges have a check mark under the “Has Privilege?”     column. If so, continue by clicking OK

-   14. Click the Tablespace button to view all available tablespaces.     Insure there is sufficient space in each tablespace. If so, continue     by clicking Cancel

-   15. Assign tablespaces for indexes by using the dropdown lists under     Index Tablespaces and for tables using the dropdown lists under     Table Tablespaces using the tablespaces created in step 6

-   16. Start installation by clicking on the Start button. NOTE: expect     this step to take 2–3 hours

-   17. When you see the message box saying Operation Complete, click     OK, then Cancel

-   18. Examine the log files to ensure that there are no errors and     warnings. These files can be deleted if they contain no errors or     warnings and all post-installation is procedures run correctly

-   19. Delete temporary tablespace/rollback segment

-   20. Put all other rollback segments online     Automatic Startup and Shutdown of Database

This section will outline the steps to setup automatic database startup and shutdown procedures on a HP 9000 server. This process is operating system dependent, but a similar procedure should be applicable for other servers. Consult the correct installation guide for the exact process for the particular server you are working with.

Required Files

The following files are required for automatic startup and shutdown. Some of the files will be created in the process, some are already created, while others are symbolic links.

/sbin/init.d/dbse

This file contains the main script for the database startup and shutdown. It can be created from /sbin/init.d/template. This script will start the database with the command su-dbse-c dbstart and shut it down with the command su-dbse-c dbstop.

/etc/rc.config.d/dbse

This file contains assignment statements that will enable automatic startup and shutdown procedures. It will be created during configuration.

/etc/rc1.d/K100dbse->/sbin/init.d/dbse

This file is a link to the /sbin/init.d/dbse script. Depending on the three-digit number after the “K”, the script will be executed in ascending order at shutdown. The value after “K” should be as small as possible so the database is one if the first processes to be shutdown.

/etc/rc2.d/S990 dbse->/sbin/init.d/dbse

This file is a link to the /sbin/init.d/dbse script. Depending on the three-digit number after the “S”, the script will be executed in ascending order at startup. The value after “S” should be as large as possible so the database is one if the first processes to be shutdown.

/etc/dbstab

This file defines which databases are started automatically. The dbse installer creates this file. It simply needs to be modified. If the database is created manually, this file needs to be created.

Create /sbin/init.d/dbse script

Make a copy (but do not remove)/sbin/init.d/template and name it /sbin/init.d/dbse.

Create/etc/rc.config.d/dbse file

Create a file named dbse in the /etc/rc.config.d/directory. In this file, include the following assignment statements:

DBSE_(—)START=1

Export DBSE_(—)START

Edit the /etc/dbstab File

This file will already be created if the installer program is used to create the database. This file includes all database that are to be started automatically at system boot. An entry for each database instance will be listed in this file in the format where Y indicates automatic startup and shutdown is activated and N indicates it is not activated:

DBSE_(—)SID:DBSE_(—)HOME:{Y\N}

For each database in which you want to invoke automatic startup and shutdown, make changes as necessary to activate automatic startup and shutdown.

Create a Link from /sbin/rc1.d/Kxxxdbse to /sbin/init.d/dbse

The scripts in the directory /sbin/rc1.d are executed when the system is shut down. Scripts are executed in ascending order determined by the three-digit number after the “K” (where the number is xxx of the filename Kxxxdbse). This number defines ordering between all scripts located in the /sbin/rc1.d directory. Number the script as low as possible in order to ensure that dbse is shut down before any other processes.

Create a Link From /sbin/rc2.d/Sxxxdbse to /sbin/initd/dbse

The scripts in the directory /sbin/rc2.d are executed when the system is started. Scripts are executed in ascending order determined by the three-digit number after the “S” (where the number is xxx of the filename Sxxxdbse). This number defines ordering between all scripts located in the /sbin/rc2.d directory. Number the script as high as possible in order to ensure that dbse is shut down before any other processes.

/sbin/init.d/dbse #!/sbin/sh # PATH=/sbin:/usr/sbin:/usr/bin export PATH rval=0 set_(—)return () { x=$? if [ $x -ne 0 ] then echo “EXIT CODE: $x” rval=1 fi } case $1 in start_(—)msg) echo “Start Dbse” ;; stop_(—)msg) echo “Stop Dbse” ;; ‘start) if [ -f/etc/rc.config.d/dbse ] then ./etc/rc.config.d/dbse else echo “ERROR: /etc/rc.config.d/dbse MISSING” exit 2 fi if [ ${DBSE_(—)START} -eq 1 ] then echo “Starting Dbse” su - dbse -c dbstart set_(—)return else rval=2 fi ;; ‘stop’) if [ -f/etc/rc.config.d/dbse ] then ./etc/rc.config.d/dbse else echo “ERROR: /etc/rc.config.d/dbse MISSING” exit 2 fi if[ ${DBSE_(—)START} -eq 1 ] then echo “Stopping Dbse” su - dbse -c dbshut set_(—)return else rval=2 fi ;; *) echo “Usage: $0 {start|stop}” ;; esac exit $rval Manual Startup and Shutdown of Database

This section will outline the processes to start and stop a database on a HP 9000 server. It will also outline the process to start and stop a Listener Service. This process should be applicable for different versions of UNIX and databases on various other types of servers.

Database Startup Procedure

The following steps can be used when starting a database in UNIX version HP UX 10.2. To verify that the database has been started properly, see the section below entitled “Verifying the database is started/stopped.”

-   1. Log on to UNIX as system user -   2. Enter system user's password -   3. Check environment table to be sure that the DBSE_(—)SID is set to     the database instance that you wish to start→env -   4. Start Server Manager→svrmgrl -   5. Connect to the system user→connect/as sysdba -   6. Start the database→startup -   7. Exit Server Manager→exit     Database Shutdown Procedure

The following steps can be used when stopping a database in UNIX. To verify that the database has been stopped properly, see section five below.

-   1. Log on to UNIX as system user -   2. Enter system user's password -   3. Check environment table to be sure that the DBSE_(—)SID is set to     the database instance that you wish to start→env -   4. Start Server Manager→svrmgrl -   5. Connect to the system user→connect/as sysdba -   6. Start the database→shutdown -   7. Exit Server Manager→exit     Verifying the Database is Started/Stopped

It is possible to check if the database is started or stopped after completing the steps above. To do so, follow these steps.

-   1. At the command line type→ps-ef|grep system_(—)user (where     system_(—)user is the system user's name that you are logged on as) -   2. Look for an entry such as the following→ora_(—)pmon_(—)SD (where     SID is the database instance name)

If you find an entry such as the one above, the database is running. If not, the database is shutdown. If you do not get the expected results, redo the database startup or shutdown procedure set forth above.

Listener

The Listener is a utility that handles database connection requests. It may have a service for all databases. If a database is started while the Listener is already running, it may be necessary to restart the Listener.

a. Check If Listener is Started for the Database Instance

At the UNIX prompt, enter the command lsnrctl status. Under the heading “Services Summary . . . ”, check that there is an entry reading “SID has 1 service handler(s).” (where SID is the desired database instance). If there is an entry for the desired SID, then the Listener is started. Otherwise the listener is not started.

b. Start the Listener

To start the listener, type lsnrctl start at the UNIX prompt. After this has completed, verify the listener is started by following the steps above in section 6.1.

c. Stop the Listener

It is recommended to stop the listener when the server is shutdown. To do this type lsnrctl stop at the UNIX prompt.

Database Configuration

FIG. 12 illustrates an exemplary database configuration chart. Table 3 provides a key to FIG. 12.

TABLE 3 Key: O/S Operating system at current location. Values include HP-UX, NT. Tablespace: Name of database tablespace Default Indication of whether tablespace should be on- status: line/off-line during normal environment operation. Physical Indication of such things as requirements to have requirements: data vs. index tablespaces on separate system disks. Related List of other tablespaces and their relationships to tablespaces/ the current tablespace. For example, the related relationships: tablespace might be an index counterpart to the current tablespace, or it might be a data partitioning counterpart, etc. Datafile: Name of a database datafile which is part of the current tablespace. Datafile Size, in MB of the current database datafile. size:

TABLE 4 File Descriptors Default Status File name(s) File size

TABLE 5 Key: File Descriptors Description of the file or file groups which will reside outside of the database Default status Condition of file at time of database startup- available, off-line File name(s) Name(s) of files to be created File size Size of files to be created Environment: Development Location: Development database Server

TABLE 6 Group Permitted Tablespace Access Type of Access IPSADAT01 SPSS_(—)DEVEL Unlimited ALL Read-Only IPSAIDX SPSS_(—)DEVEL Unlimited ALL Read-Only USERS ALL Unlimited SYSTEM DBA Unlimited TEMP01 ALL Unlimited @

TABLE 7 Key: Tablespace Name of database tablespace Group Permitted Name of security group (see security docu- Access ment) permitted access to current tablespace. Type of Access Type of access allowed to tablespace, such as unlimited, quota per user, etc.

init.dbs Configuration db_(—)name = IPSA01 db_(—)block_(—)size = 8192 sort_(—)area_(—)size = 102400 db_(—)file_(—)multiblock_(—)read_(—)count =32 # LARGE db_(—)block_(—)buffers = 10000 # LARGE shared_(—)pool_(—)size = 70000000 # X LARGE log_(—)checkpoint_(—)interval = 10000 processes = 100 # MEDIUM nls_(—)date_(—)format = “DD-Mon-YYYY HH24:MI:SS” dml_(—)locks = 200 # MEDIUM log_(—)buffer = 65536 # des 2k open_(—)cursors = 400 # des 2k sequence_(—)cache_(—)entries = 10 # SMALL sequence_(—)cache_(—)hash_(—)buckets = 10 # SMALL max_(—)dump_(—)file_(—)size 10240 # limit trace file size to 5 Meg each # If using private rollback segments, place lines of the following # form in each of your instance-specific init.ora files: # rollback_(—)segments = (name1, name2) rollback_(—)segments = (r01,r02,r03,r04) # Global Naming -- enforce that a dblink has same name as the db it connects to global_(—)names = TRUE # adversely affect performance. On some non-VMS ports the db_(—)block_(—)cache_(—)* # debugging modes have a severe effect on performance. _(—)db_(—)block_(—)cache_(—)protect = true # memory protect buffers compatible = 7.3.4 # By default, this is false. lock_(—)shared_(—)memory = true # reads entire SGA into memory on startup. Will take longer to startup database # define two control files by default control_(—)files = (/files0/ipsa/vendor/dbse/links/IPSA01/IPSA01ctrl01.ctl, /files0/ipsa/vendor/dbse/links/IPSA01/IPSA01ctrl02.ctl, /files0/ipsa/vendor/dbse/links/IPSA01/IPSA01ctrl03.ctl, /files0/ipsa/vendor/dbs/links/IPSA01/IPSA01ctrl04.ctl) background_(—)dump_(—)dest = /files0/ipsa/vendor/dbse/admin/IPSA01/bdump user_(—)dump_(—)dest = /files0/ipsa/vendor/dbse/admin/IPSA01/udump core_(—)dump_(—)dest = /files0/ipsa/vendor/dbse/admin/IPSA01/cdump Database Cold Backup

This section will describe the required files needed to run cold_(—)backups. It will outline the recommended steps to configure cold_(—)backups (written in Perl) to run on a database. Finally, this section will discuss how to execute the script. The location of the cold_(—)backups script can be anywhere in the database's directory system.

Required Files/Directories

The following list of files and directories need to be created before cold_(—)backups will run. These files are described bellow and common naming conventions are given. Also, an OFA directory structure location is specified.

System Identification (SID) File

This file should contain a list of one or more system ids, dbse home, and dbse base. Every system id will be shutdown, backed up, and restarted. The values of this file are also used to set the correct environment of the SID. The format of this file must be of the form: SID,DBSE_(—)HOME,DBSE_(—)BASE. There are no spaces between fields. Also, it is important that there are no blank lines in this file. A common naming convention for this file is cold_(—)sids. The file is best housed with other files related to the backup.

SQL*Plus Script File

This script will generate a complete list of files that need to be backed up. A common naming convention is unix_(—)script.sql. This file will be located in the directory specified for sql scripts.

Password Script

The contents of this file can be found in Appendix B or in O:\Performance\QoSM\Product Development\Database\Doc\getpass. This script allows the user's password to be used within the script without hard-coding the password into it. A common naming convention is getpass. This file should be housed in the unix directory. NOTE: the password is not encrypted so it is important that an unauthorized user does not execute this script at the command line. Also, if the password scripts is used within another script it is important the password is not echoed to the screen.

Backup Directory

The backup directory will store the backup files. The naming convention for this directory is {SID}_(—)cold where SID is the system id. The file is best housed in the current directory (described below in “Current Directory”).

Configuration of Variables

Directory paths and file names are hard coded in the cold_(—)backups script. Therefore it is recommended to configure these variables to suit the file structure of the particular database the backup is to be performed on. The following are variables that need to be specified for the system in which the script is run on. These variables are grouped together at the beginning of the script. Look for the commented section entitled “Variable List” to locate the variables within the script.

Current Directory ($Current Dir)

This variable is set to the directory location in which the backup directory (described above in “Backup Directory”), log file (described below in “Log”), system id file (described above in System Identification (SID) File), and temporary directory (created during execution of the backup and deleted after its completion) are kept. This directory can be placed anywhere.

SID File ($SID File)

This file, described above in System Identification (SID) File, is located in the current directory. This file contains a list of system ids and environment variables for all databases that need to be backed up. The files has a strict format that must be followed for the script to run in the cron.

Script File ($Script_(—)File)

This file is described above in “SQL*Plus Script File.”

Log($Log)

This file contains messages and errors generated from cold_(—)backup. A common naming convention is cold.log. The log file is created in the current directory (see section 4.2 above) by cold_(—)backups. The log file will be kept in an archived form, also in the current directory, for one previous backup and it will be named *.old where * represents the filename you designate as the log file.

User ($User)

This variable designates which user has export privileges.

Mail Program ($Mailer)

This variable is set to a command line mail program. The mail program is used to notify the Database Administrator of problems occurred during execution of the backup or to inform the Administrator of a successful backup.

File Mount Point ($Mount_(—)point)

This variable is set to the directory structure mount point.

DBA ($DBA)

This variable is set to the Database Administrator that is responsible for getting email messages.

How to Execute

Manually

The cold_(—)backups script can be run manually by having a user execute the script. Since the backup requires that the database be shutdown, inform all database users of the downtime. Expect up to fifteen minutes for the backup. In order to run the script manually go to the directory where the script is located. Check the permissions, and set if necessary. At the command line, type cold_(—)backups. The script will run without user interaction. The script is complete when the prompt returns.

Crontab

It is possible to schedule the backup using the UNIX crontab. To create a new crontab or to edit an existing one, type crontab-e at the UNIX command line. To list the entries in the crontab, type crontab-l at the command line. Entries in the crontab file are lines of six fields separated by spaces or tabs. An asterisk (*) in fields one through five indicates all legal values. Values can be separated by commas (for a list of values) or hyphens (for inclusive range). The fields are as follows:

TABLE 8 Field Acceptable Data 1-minute 0–59 2-hour 0–23 3-month 1–31 day 4-month 1–12 5-weekday 0–6 (Sunday is 0) 6-command Complete path of executable

By using the crontab, it is possible to schedule daily, weekly, or monthly backups during non-peak hours. Since the backup requires that the database be shutdown, inform all database users of the expected downtime. Expect up to fifteen minutes for the backup. Check the permissions of cold_(—)backups before the first backup and set if necessary.

SQL*Plus Script File set echo off set heading off set embedded on set pagesize 1000 set termout off spool & 1 select name from v$datafile; select member from v$logfile; select name from v$controlfile; spool off set termout on set heading on set feedback on set embedded off exit Password Script #!/bin/sh #------------------------------------------------------------# # Script_(—)name: getpass # # Description: This script will be used to retrieve the # #    appropriate password from the password # #    file. It can be used from the command # #    line to retrieve a password or from a # #    shell script to eliminate hard coding of # #    passwords. The .password file is located # #    in $DBSE_(—)HOME, with the executable # #    located in $DBSE_(—)HOME/bin.    # # # # Dependencies: getpass requires one file, password # # # # SID_(—)FILE: Contains a list passwords for # #    system, sys, and dbse.    # # # # Command syntax: getpass USERNAME # #----------------------------------------------------------------------# # what shell do we use? SHELL=/usr/bin/sh # where is our home? DBSE_(—)HOME=/files2/ipsa/vendor/dbse/product/7.3.4; export DBSE_(—)HOME # what path do we look for? PATH=/usr/bin:/bin:${DBSE_(—)HOME}/bin; export PATH # who are we retrieving the password for if[ $1 ] then USER=$1 else echo “ ” echo “USAGE: getpass ‘username’” echo “ ” exit 1 fi # make sure the .password file exist if [ ! -s $DBSE_(—)HOME/.password ] then echo “ ” echo “ERROR: this machine does not appear to have a password file” echo “ ” exit 1 fi # get the appropriate password PASSWORD=‘cat $DBSE_(—)HOME/.password|grep -i “${USER} ”|awk ‘{print $2}’‘ BAD_(—)SIDS=‘cat $DBSE_(—)HOME/.password|grep -i “${USER} “|awk ‘{print $3}’‘ OLD_(—)PASS=‘cat $DBSE_(—)HOME/.password|grep -i “${USER} “|awk ’{print $4}’‘ # if a password was found, print it to the screen if [ $PASSWORD ] then echo “$ {PASSWORD}” # print a message if passwords appear to not be synced between databases if [ $BAD_(—)SIDS ] then BAD_(—)SIDS=‘echo ${BAD_(—)SIDS}|cut -c2-100‘ echo “” echo “WARNING:\tThe password for ${USER} may not be synchronized ” echo “\t\tbetween all databases. The database(s) ${BAD_(—)SIDS} appear(s) ” echo “\t\tto use the old password ‘${OLD_(—)PASS}’” echo “” fi else echo “ ” echo “ERROR: ${USER} is not a supported username” echo “ ” exit 1 fi

CRONTAB EXAMPLES

The following is an entry of a crontab. The cold_(—)backups script will be backed up at 2:30 am daily.

-   /files2/db/dev/backup1/cold_(—)backups>crontab-l 30 2* * *     /files2/db/vendor/dbse/admin/general/unix/cold_(—)backups/cold_(—)backups

If both fields are specified in an entry, they are cumulative. For example:

-   0 0 1,15 *     1/files2/db/vendor/dbse/admin/general/unix/cold_(—)backups/cold_(—)backups

This crontab entry runs at midnight on the first and fifteenth of each month, as well as every Monday. To specify days in only one field, set the other field to asterisk (*). For example:

-   0 0* *     1/files2/db/vendor/dbse/admin/general/unix/cold_(—)backups/cold_(—)backups

This crontab entry runs only on Mondays.

Database Export Backup

This section will describe the files needed to run export_(—)backups. It will outline the recommended steps to configure export_(—)backups (written in Perl) to run on a database. Finally, this section will discuss how to execute the script. The location of the export_(—)backups script should be in admin/general/unix (following OFA standards).

The export_(—)backups script performs a full database export on a database by using an export utility. This script is meant to run daily and the backup files are stored in a cycle that can be configured to suit the needs of the client. For an explanation of the backup cycle and naming convention, see the sections below entitled “Configuration of Backup Cycle” and “How to Execute.”

Required Files/Directories

The following list of files and directories need to be created before export_(—)backups will run. These files are described bellow and common naming conventions are given. Also an OFA directory structure suggestion is given.

System Identification (SID) File

This file should contain a list of one or more system ids and the corresponding values of dbse home and dbse base. Every system id listed in this file will be backed up using the export utility. The values in this file are also used to correctly set the environment variables. The format of this file will be: SID,DBSE_(—)HOME,DBSE_(—)BASE. There are no spaces, only commas, separating the fields. Also, it is important that there are no blank lines in this file. A common naming convention for this file is export_(—)sids. The file is best housed in the current directory (described below in “Current Directory”).

Day File

This file will contain the current day number of the backup cycle. The backup cycle is commonly four weeks in length but it can be set at any interval (see section five below on configuration of cycle variables). The day file will contain an integer between one and the maximum day number of the cycle (29 for a four-week cycle). It is important that there are no blank lines in this file. The user will need to create this file before the initial execution of the backup and after that the file will update itself. It is a good idea to have the day number correspond to the current weekday. For example, a one in the day file will correspond with Sunday and a four will correspond with Wednesday. A common naming convention is day_(—)file.dat. This file is best housed in the current directory (described\-below in “Current Directory”).

Password Script

This script needs to be configured for the system. This script allows the user's password to be used within the script without hard-coding the password into it. A common naming convention is getpass. This file should be located in /admin/general/unix. NOTE: the password is not encrypted so it is important that an unauthorized user does not execute this script at the command line. Also, if the password scripts is used within another script it is important the password is not echoed to the screen.

Backup Directory

The backup directory will store the backup files. The naming convention for this directory is {SID}_(—)exp where SID is the system id. The file is best housed in the current directory (described below in “Current Directory”).

Configuration of Variables

Directory paths and file names are hard coded in the export_(—)backups script. Therefore it is recommended to configure these variables to suit the file structure of the particular database the backup is to be performed on. The following are variables that need to be specified for the system in which the script is run on. These variables are grouped together at the beginning of the script. Look for the commented section entitled “Variable List” to locate the variables within the script.

Current Directory ($Current Dir)

This variable is set to the directory location in which the backup directory (described above in “Backup Directory”), log file (described below in “Log”), SID file (described above in “System Identification (SID) File”), and day file (described above in “Day File”) are kept. This directory can be placed anywhere.

Day File ($Day_(—)File)

This file is described above in “Day File”.

SID File ($SID_(—)File)

This file is described above in “System Identification (SID) File.”

Log ($Export_(—)Log)

This file contains messages and errors generated from export_(—)backup. A common naming convention is export.log. During execution, the log file is opened and the entries will be appended to the existing file. If the file does not exist, the script will create a new log file with the name you designate here. Old log files will be kept in an archived form, also in the current directory, and will contain the logged entries for an entire backup cycle. The archived file will be named *.yyyymmmdd (as in 2001Dec.31) where * represents the filename you designate as the log file. The archive will occur if the day file contains the last day of the cycle.

User ($Exp_(—)User)

This variable designates which user has export privileges.

Mail Program ($Mailer)

This variable is set to a command line mail program. The mail program is used to notify the Database Administrator of problems occurred during execution of the backup or to inform the Administrator of a successful backup.

DBA ($DBA)

This variable is set to the Database Administrator that is responsible for getting email messages.

Configuration of Backup Cycle

The backup cycle can be changed to suit the particular requirements for the database. There are six cycle variables in the script that need to be configured if the cycle is changed. They are located in the top portion of the script in a section entitled “Cycle Variables” immediately following the “Variable List” described above in section four. The values of these variables are used to name the backup file and to determine the schedule for when the backup files rollover.

Maximum Day Files ($maxday)

This variable should be set to the maximum number of daily backup files that are kept minus one. For example, if seven daily backups are kept, this value should be set to six. The naming scheme for the daily backup files is such that day00 is the current day's backup and day06 is six days ago.

Week Ending Day ($week start)

This variable is a string and should be set to the three letter abbreviation of the week day name in which you want the weekly backup files to rollover. For example, if you want the week backup files to roll over on Sundays you would set this variable to “Sun”.

Maximum Week Files ($maxweek)

This variable should be set to the maximum number of weekly backup files that are kept minus one. On the week ending date, the weekly backup files will be rolled back and day07 will become week01. For example, if you want to keep four weekly backup files, this variable should be set to three.

Maximnum Cycle Days ($maxcycledays)

This variable should be set to the total number of days in the backup cycle plus one. The value of this variable will be the largest possible value that is in the day file (see section 3.2 above). For a four-week cycle, the maximum cycle days variable should be set to twenty-nine (4 weeks * 7 days per week+1 day=29 cycle days). A value of fifty-seven would represent an eight week cycle (8*7+1=57). When the value in the day file is the same as the maximum cycle days variable the cycle backup will occur.

Cycle Increment ($inc_(—)value)

Weekly backups will be kept in longer cycle increments for long term storage. The value of this variable should be set to the increment value. This variable comes into effect when rolling back the week files (described in section 5.3). For example, if you want to keep backups in four-week intervals (starting at the last weekly backup) you would set this variable to four.

Maximum Cycle Files ($maxcycle)

This variable should be set to the maximum number of backup files that are kept minus the cycle increment value. For example, if you want to keep backup files for fifty-two weeks (one year) and your increment value is four, the value of this variable should be forty-eight. If the day in the day file is equal to the maximum cycle days, the weekly backup files will be rolled back in increments designated by the increment cycle variable. For example, week04 would become week12 if the increment value were eight.

How to Execute

Manually

The export_(—)backups script can be run manually by having a user execute the script. Since the backup requires that the database be shutdown, inform all database users of the downtime. Expect up to fifteen minutes for the backup. In order to run the script manually go to the directory where the script is located. Check the permissions, and set if necessary. At the command line, type export_(—)backups. The script will run without user interaction. The script is complete when the prompt returns.

Crontab

It is possible to schedule the backup using the UNIX crontab. To create a new crontab or to edit an existing one, type crontab-e at the UNIX command line. To list the entries in the crontab, type crontab-l at the command line. Entries in the crontab file are lines of six fields separated by spaces or tabs. An asterisk (*) in fields one through five indicates all legal values. Values can be separated by commas (for a list of values) or hyphens (for inclusive range). The fields are as follows:

TABLE 9 Field Acceptable Data 1-minute 0–59 2-hour 0–23 3-month 1–31 day 4-month 1–12 5-weekday 0–6 (Sunday is 0) 6-command Complete path of executable

By using the crontab, it is possible to schedule daily, weekly, or monthly backups during non-peak hours. Since the backup requires that the database be shutdown, inform all database users of the expected downtime. Expect up to fifteen minutes for the backup. Check the permissions of export_(—)backups before the first backup and set if necessary.

Password Script #!/bin/sh #------------------------------------------------------------# # Script_(—)name: getpass # # Description: This script will be used to retrieve the # #    appropriate password from the .password # #    file. It can be used from the command # #    line to retrieve a password or from a # #    shell script to eliminate hard coding of # #    passwords. The .password file is located # #    in $DBSE_(—)HOME, with the executable # #    located in $DBSE_(—)HOME/bin.   # # # # Dependencies: getpass requires one file, .password   # # # # SID_(—)FILE: Contains a list passwords for  # #    system, sys, and dbse.    # # # # Command syntax: getpass USERNAME # #------------------------------------------------------------# # what shell do we use? SHELL=/usr/bin/sh # where is our home? DBSE_(—)HOME=/files2/ipsa/vendor/dbs/product/7.3.4 export DBSE_(—)HOME # what path do we look for? PATH=/usr/bin:/bin:${DBSE_(—)HOME}/bin; export PATH # who are we retrieving the password for if[ $1 ] then USER=$1 else echo “ ” echo “USAGE: getpass ‘usemame’” echo “ ” exit 1 fi # make sure the .password file exist if [ ! -s $DBSE_(—)HOME/.password ] then echo “ ” echo “ERROR: this machine does not appear to have a password file” echo “ ” exit 1 fi # get the appropriate password PASSWORD=‘cat $DBSE_(—)HOME/.password|grep -i “${USER} ”|awk ‘{print $2}’‘ BAD_(—)SIDS=‘cat $DBSE_(—)HOME/.password|grep -i “S{USER} ”|awk ‘{print $3}’‘ OLD_(—)PASS=‘cat $DBSE_(—)HOME/.password|grep -i “S{USER} ”|awk ‘{print $4}’‘ # if a password was found, print it to the screen if [ $PASSWORD ] then echo “${PASSWORD}” # print a message if passwords appear to not be synced between databases if [ $BAD_(—)SIDS ] then BAD_(—)SIDS=‘echo ${BAD_(—)SIDS}|cut -c2-100‘ echo “” echo “WARNTNG:\tThe password for ${USER} may not be synchronized ” echo “\t\tbetween all databases. The database(s) ${BAD_(—)SIDS} appear(s) ” echo “\t\tto use the old password ‘${OLD_(—)PASS}’” echo “” fi else echo “ ” echo “ERROR: ${USER} is not a supported username” echo “ ” exit 1 fi Data Loading Script

The script data_(—)loader is used to load comma delimited data from a text file into a Database by using SQL*Loader. The script can create a control file for this process if one is needed. This script can be run from the cron to load data into many tables, or it can be run from the command line on a single table. It is also possible to do a data re-load using data_(—)loader. The script performs error checking and reports via email to a specified administrator of success or failure. The script may be written in Perl.

Configuration

Environment Variables

Environment variables relevant to the Database need to be set. Specifically, the following environment variables need to be set: DBSE_(—)SID, DBSE_(—)HOME, DBSE_(—)BASE, HOME, and PATH (to include the location of the dbse bin directory and the directory that holds the scripts used by this procedure). To configure these variables, look for the section in the code entitled setting environment variables. Set the values of $SID, $Home, and $Base. Verify that the path is correct when setting the PATH environment variable.

Directory Structure

A directory structure should be set up to house the different types of files required and produced by data_(—)loader. The six types of files required include data files (*.dat), control files (*.ctl), log files (*.log), bad files (*.bad), data definition files (*.ddl), and archived files (files from the previous five categories).

File Names

The files used/created by the data_(—)loader script should have a standardized format. The log files (.log) and bad files (.bad) are named with a date_(—)stamp to make the files unique for archiving purposes. The current format of the date_(—)stamp is ddMonYYYY. The value of $Date_(—)stamp should be changed to suit the frequency of the data loading. The naming convention should be table_(—)name.date_(—)stamp.extension or in the case of the log file generated by the data_(—)loader script data_(—)loader.date_(—)stamp.log. The data files (.dat) should be named table_(—)name.dat. However, after loading is complete all data files are copied to the archive directory and renamed with a date_(—)stamp as in the manner described above. The control files (.ctl) will be named table_(—)name.ctl and will never have a date stamp because they are not archived. The ddl files should be named index_(—)name.ddl.

SQL Scripts and Stored Procedures

This script uses a variety of SQL scripts and stored procedures. The scripts should be located in their own directory (following the OFA directory structure). Set $SQL_(—)dir to this directory location. In order for these scripts to function properly, the table owner must have the ability to select from any table (grant select any table table owner). The SQL scripts and stored procedures used by data_(—)loader are as follows:

TABLE 10 Script Name Type Input Output Functionality get_(—)index script table table_(—)name.idx Spool the index name names of the given table to the output file. (section 0) drop_(—)index_(—)p procedure index none Drops the name given index (section 0) create_(—)ctl script table table_(—)name.ctl Calls the stored name procedure create_(—)ctl_(—)p and spools the control_(—)tb table entries to the output file. (section 0) create_(—)ctl_(—)p procedure table control_(—)tb Inserts rows name into control_(—)tb to create con- trol file (section 0) p_(—)exec procedure string none Executes the SQL command passed as a parameter (section 0) sp_(—)kill_(—)users_(—)p procedure none none Kills SPSS user processes (section 0) get_(—)direct_(—)load script table table_(—)name.dir Spools the in- name load dex names that are in direct load state of the given table to the output file (section 0) Input and Output Files Required Files

-   -   table_(—)list (file containing a list of tables to load—used if         no table is indicated at run time)     -   table_(—)name.dat (comma delimitated file containing data to         load into table_(—)name)     -   index_(—)name.ddl (used to create indexes that were dropped)     -   table_(—)name.date_(—)stamp.dat (copy of table_(—)name.dat after         load for archiving purposes)         Files Generated     -   data_(—)loader.date_(—)stamp.log (log file generated by         data_(—)loader)     -   table_(—)name.idx (generated by the SQL script get_(—)index, it         is deleted at the end of the script—see section 0)     -   table_(—)name.ctl (file is generated by SQL script create_(—)ctl         if a ‘-c’ is indicated at run time—see section 0)     -   table_(—)name.date_(—)stamp.log (log file generated by         SQL*Loader—see section 0 for an explanation of the date stamp)     -   table_(—)name.date_(—)stamp.bad (bad file generated by         SQL*Loader—see section 0 for an explanation of the date stamp)     -   table_(—)name.dirload (file generated by SQL script         get_(—)direct_(—)load, it is deleted if the files has zero         size—see section 0 for an explanation)         Messaging

The data_(—)loader script will send email to an administrator to report success or failure of the data loading process. Set $Mailer to the text string that will execute the mailer in command line mode. Set $DBA to the email address of the administrator.

Users

The data_(—)loader script will need to log on to SQL*Plus and SQL*Loader a number of times for a variety of purposes. A variable name should be set for each schema name that will be utilized. Do not hard-code the schema password in the script. Instead use getpass.

Options with SQL*Loader

The following options are used with SQL*Loader:

-   -   control=$Control_(—)file (see section 0)     -   log=$Log_(—)file (see section 0)     -   bad=$Bad_(—)file (see section 0)     -   skip=$Skip_(—)number (default is zero, only changes if doing         reload, see section 0)     -   errors=100     -   direct=TRUE     -   silent=ALL         Options Executing data_(—)loader         data_(—)loader     -   Get tables to be loaded from file (table_(—)list)     -   Do not create a control files     -   Skip zero records while loading         data_(—)loader-c schema_(—)name     -   Get tables to be loaded from file (table_(—)list)     -   Create control files for all tables     -   schema_(—)name is the owner of the tables     -   Skip zero records while loading         data_(—)loader-t table_(—)name     -   Table to be loaded is table_(—)name     -   Do not create control file     -   Skip zero records while loading         data_(—)loader-r table_(—)name skip_(—)number     -   Table to be loaded is table_(—)name     -   Do not create control file     -   Skip skip_(—)number records while loading         Procedure

The following is the procedure the data_(—)loader script follows to load data into a database.

TABLE 11 Step Activity/Action 1 Read in and set parameters Set database environment Set directory structure variables Set SQL Script directory Set Mailer program and Administrator Set Failure Flag to false (0) 2 For each user, set user name and get password using getpass 3 Archive old log files and bad files 4 Set the date stamp for load Create data_(—)loader.date_(—)stamp.log 5 Push the table name to be loaded into an array. Get this information either from a file (table_(—)list) or from a parameter 6 Find the current indexes on the tables to be loaded Drop the indexes that are not on the primary key(s) 7 If necessary, create control files for each table that is to be loaded Check that the control file was created successfully 8 Alter the database to allow only users with RESTRICTED PRIVLEDGES to log on Kill user processes that are do not have RESTRICTED PRIVLEDGES 9 Set the files names of the data file, control file, log file, and bad file Check to insure the input files exist, abort loading if they do not 10 Start SQL*Loader 11 Check load results by scanning the log file for errors Check if there is a bad file generated by SQL*Loader 12 Repeat steps 9–11 for all tables to be loaded 13 Alter database to allow ALL USERS to log on 14 Recreate indexes that were dropped in step 6 15 Check to see if there are any indexes on the loaded table that were left in direct load state If there are, send a message to the Administrator If not, delete the generated file Delete the file generated by the get_(—)index SQL script 16 Check the value of the failure flag (it will be set to true if any errors occurred at any time during the process above) Email the Administrator to report success or failure 17 Archive the data files (if the load is not a re-load) by copying the data file to the archive directory and renaming it to include a date stamp Scripts

The following is the scripts reference above are used by data_(—)loader. The bolded lines should be configured to the particular system being used.

getpass (Born Shell) #!/bin/sh #---------------------------------------------------------# # Script_(—)name: get_(—)pass # # # # Description: This script will be used to retrieve the # # appropriate password from the .password # # file. It can be used from the command # # line to retrieve a password or from a # # shell script to eliminate hard coding of # # passwords. The .password file is located # # in $DBSE_(—)HOME, with the executable # # located in $DBSE_(—)HOME/bin. # # # # Dependencies: getpass requires one file,.password # # # # SID_(—)FILE: Contains a list passwords for  # # system, sys, and dbse. # # # # Command syntax: getpass USERNAME # #---------------------------------------------------------# # what shell do we use? SHELL=/usr/bin/sh # where is our home? DBSE_(—)HOME=/files0/ipsa/vendor/dbse/product/7.3.4; export DBSE_(—)HOME # what path do we look for? PATH=/usr/bin:/bin:${DBSE_(—)HOME}/bin; export PATH # who are we retrieving the password for if[ $1 ] then  USER=$1 else  echo “ ”  echo “USAGE: getpass ‘username’”  echo “ ”  exit 1 fi # make sure the .password file exist if [ ! -s $DBSE_(—)HOME/.password ] then  echo “ ”  echo “ERROR: this machine does not appear to have a password file”  echo “ ”  exit 1 fi # get the appropriate password PASSWORD=‘cat $DBSE_(—)HOME/.password|grep -i “${USER} ”|awk ‘{print $2}’’ BAD_(—)SIDS=‘cat $DBSE_(—)HOME/.password|grep -i “${USER} ”|awk ‘{print $3}’’ OLD_(—)PASS=‘cat $DBSE_(—)HOME/.password|grep -i “${USER} ”|awk ‘{print $4}’’ # if a password was found, print it to the screen if[ $PASSWORD ] then  echo “$ {PASSWORD}”  # print a message if passwords appear to not be synced between databases if [ $BAD_(—)SIDS ] then  BAD_(—)SIDS=‘echo ${BAD_(—)SIDS}|cut -c2-100’  echo “ ”  echo “WARNING:\tThe password for ${USER} may not be synchronized”  echo “\t\tbetween all databases. The database(s) ${BAD SIDS} appear(s)”  echo “\t\tto use the old password ‘${OLDPASS}’”  echo “”  fi else  echo “ ”  echo “ERROR: ${USER} is not a supported username”  echo “ ”  exit 1 fi get_(—)index (PL/SQL Script) SET ECHO OFF REM Procedure Name: get_(—)index REM REM Description: Procedure creates a file with a list of current indexes VARIABLE T_(—)Name varchar2(30) SET SERVEROUTPUT OFF SET VERIFY OFF SET FEEDBACK OFF SET FLUSH OFF SET TRIMSPOOL ON SET TERMOUT OFF ACCEPT T_(—)Name char SET PAGES 0 SET HEADING OFF SPOOL /files6/ipsa/data_(—)loads/&T_(—)Name..idx select index_(—)name from dba_(—)indexes where table_(—)name = UPPER(‘&T_(—)Name’); SPOOL OFF SET TERMOUT ON SET SERVEROUTPUT OFF SET VERIFY ON SET FEEDBACK ON SET ECHO ON drop_(—)index_(—)p (PL/SQL Stored Procedure) CREATE OR REPLACE PROCEDURE drop_(—)index_(—)p (IN_(—)IndexName IN VARCHAR2) AS  ws_(—)stmt   varchar2(100);  ws_(—)owner   varchar2(30); CURSOR c_(—)index_(—)owner (IN_(—)IndexName VARCHAR2) IS SELECT table_(—)owner FROM dba_(—)indexes WHERE index_(—)name = UPPER(IN_(—)IndexName); BEGIN  OPEN c_(—)index_(—)owner(IN_(—)IndexName);  FETCH c_(—)index_(—)owner INTO ws_(—)owner;  ws_(—)stmt := ‘DROP INDEX’∥ws_(—)owner∥‘.’∥IN_(—)IndexName;  p_(—)exec (ws_(—)stmt);  CLOSE c_(—)index_(—)owner; END drop_(—)index_(—)p; / show errors; create_(—)ctl (PL/SQL Script) SET ECHO OFF REM Procedure Name: create_(—)ctl REM Description: Procedure created control file required by SQL*Loader REM   Uses create_(—)ctl_(—)p.sql to generate control file REM Tables Accessed: All_(—)Tab_(—)Columns (Data Dictionary Table) VARIABLE T_(—)Name varchar2(30) SET SERVEROUTPUT OFF SET VERIFY OFF SET FEEDBACK OFF SET TRIMSPOOL ON SET TERMOUT OFF SET FLUSH OFF ACCEPT T_(—)Name char delete control_(—)tb; commit; EXECUTE CREATE_(—)CTL_(—)P(‘&T_(—)NAME’); SET PAGES 0 SET HEADING OFF SPOOL /files6/ipsa/data_(—)loads/control_(—)files/&T_(—)Name..ctl select line_(—)text from control_(—)tb order by line_(—)nbr SPOOL OFF SET TERMOUT ON SET SERVEROUTPUT OFF SET VERIFY ON SET FEEDBACK ON SET ECHO ON create_(—)ctl_(—)p (PL/SQL Stored Procedure) **Note-there should be a table used specifically for this procedure (control_(—)tb) with the columns  LINE_(—)NBR number(3) and LINE_(—)TEXT varchar2(100). CREATE OR REPLACE PROCEDURE create_(—)ctl_(—)p  (IN_(—)TableName  IN  user_(—)tab_(—)columns.table_(—)name%TYPE) AS  WS_(—)RecNo  number(2) := 0;  WS_(—)line_(—)ctr  number(3) := 0;  WS_(—)index_(—)name varchar2(30); CURSOR c_(—)index_(—)name(IN_(—)TableName IN user_(—)tab_(—)columns.table_(—)name%TYPE) is  SELECT index_(—)name  FROM sys.dba_(—)indexes  WHERE sys.dba_(—)indexes.table_(—)name = UPPER(IN_(—)TableName)  AND sys.dba_(—)indexes.index_(—)name like ‘PK%’; CURSOR c_(—)user_(—)tab_(—)columns(IN_(—)TableName user_(—)tab_(—)columns.table_(—)name%type) is  SELECT column_(—)name,   data_(—)type,   data_(—)length  FROM user_(—)tab_(—)columns  WHERE user_(—)tab_(—)columns.table_(—)name = UPPER(IN_(—)TableName); BEGIN  OPEN c_(—)index_(—)name(IN_(—)TableName);  FETCH c_(—)index_(—)name INTO WS_(—)index_(—)name  insert into control_(—)tb values (WS_(—)line_(—)ctr,‘UNRECOVERABLE’);  WS_(—)line_(—)ctr := WS_(—)line_(—)ctr + 1;  insert into control_(—)tb values (WS_(—)line_(—)ctr,‘LOAD DATA’);  WS_(—)line_(—)ctr := WS_(—)line_(—)ctr + 1;  insert into control_(—)tb values (WS_(—)line_(—)ctr,‘INFILE   “/files6/ipsa/data_(—)loads/data_(—)files/‘∥IN_(—)TableName∥’.dat’”);  WS_(—)line_(—)ctr := WS_(—)line_(—)ctr + 1;  insert into control_(—)tb values (WS_(—)line_(—)ctr,‘APPEND’);  WS_(—)line_(—)ctr := WS_(—)line_(—)ctr + 1;  insert into control_(—)tb values (WS_(—)line_(—)ctr,‘INTO TABLE’∥IN_(—)TableName);  WS_(—)line_(—)ctr := WS_(—)line_(—)ctr + 1;  insert into control_(—)tb values (WS_(—)line_(—)ctr,‘SORTED INDEXES (‘∥WS_(—)index_(—)name∥’)’);  WS_(—)line_(—)ctr := WS_(—)line_(—)ctr + 1;  insert into control_(—)tb values (WS_(—)line_(—)ctr,‘FIELDS TERMINATED BY’∥‘“,’”);  WS_(—)line_(—)ctr := WS_(—)line_(—)ctr + 1;  insert into control_(—)tb values (WS_(—)line_(—)ctr,‘(’);  WS_(—)line_(—)ctr := WS_(—)line_(—)ctr + 1;  FOR c_(—)rec in c_(—)user_(—)tab_(—)columns(IN_(—)TableName) LOOP  IF WS_(—)RecNo = 0 then   IF c_(—)rec.data_(—)type = ‘DATE’ THEN    insert into control_(—)tb values (WS_(—)line_(—)ctr,c_(—)rec.column_(—)name∥ “DATE “MM/DD/YYYY HH24:MI:SS””);   ELSE    insert into control_(—)tb values (WS_(—)line_(—)ctr,c_(—)rec.column_(—)name);   END IF;  WS_(—)RecNo := 1;  ELSE    IF c_rec.data_type = ‘DATE’ THEN     insert into control_(—)tb values (WS_(—)line_(—)ctr,‘,’∥c_(—)rec.column_(—)name∥ ‘DATE “MM/DD/YYYY HH24:MI:SS”’);   ELSE     insert into control_(—)tb values (WS_(—)line_(—)ctr,‘,’∥c_(—)rec.column_(—)name);    END IF;   END IF;   WS_(—)line_(—)ctr := WS_(—)line_(—)ctr + 1;  END LOOP;  insert into control_(—)tb values (WS_(—)line_(—)ctr,‘)’); EXCEPTION  WHEN NO_(—)DATA_(—)FOUND THEN   DBMS_(—)OUTPUT.PUT_(—)LINE(‘The table does not exist:’); END; / show errors p_(—)exec (PL/SQL Stored Procedure) CREATE OR REPLACE PROCEDURE p_(—)exec (IN_(—)String IN varchar2) AS  c_(—)cursor INTEGER;  WS_(—)ret INTEGER; BEGIN  c_(—)cursor := DBMS_(—)SQL.OPEN_(—)CURSOR;  DBMS_(—)SQL.PARSE(c_(—)cursor, IN_(—)String, DBMS_(—)SQL.V7);  WS ret := DBMS_(—)SQL.EXECUTE(c_(—)cursor);  DBMS_(—)SQL.CLOSE_(—)CURSOR(c_(—)cursor); END; / sp_(—)kill_(—)users_(—)p (PL/SQL Stored Procedure) CREATE OR REPLACE PROCEDURE sp_(—)kill_(—)users_(—)01 AS  ws_(—)sid number(22);  ws_(—)serial# number(22);  ws_(—)stmt varchar2(100);  ora_(—)err_(—)code BINARY_(—)INTEGER; CURSOR c_(—)current_(—)sessions IS  SELECT sid   ,serial#  FROM sys.v$session  WHERE username = ‘SPSSUSER’   AND status <> ‘KILLED’; BEGIN  ora_(—)err_(—)code := 0;  IF NOT c_(—)current_(—)sessions%ISOPEN THEN   OPEN c_(—)current_(—)sessions;  END IF;  LOOP   FETCH c_(—)current_(—)sessions INTO ws_(—)sid ,ws_(—)serial#;   IF c_(—)current_(—)sessions%NOTFOUND THEN    IF (c_(—)current_(—)sessions%ROWCOUNT = 0) THEN     RAISE NO_(—)DATA_(—)FOUND;    END IF;    CLOSE c_(—)current_(—)sessions;    EXIT;   END IF;   ws_(—)stmt := ‘ALTER SYSTEM KILL SESSION ’“∥ws_(—)sid∥‘,’∥ws_(—)serial#∥’”;   p_(—)exec (ws_(—)stmt);  END LOOP;  CLOSE c_(—)current_(—)sessions; EXCEPTION  WHEN OTHERS THEN   ora_(—)err_(—)code := SQLCODE;   /* CLOSE c_(—)current_(—)sessions; causes invalid cursor error*/ END sp_(—)kill_(—)users_(—)01; / show errors get_(—)direct_(—)load (PL/SQL) SET ECHO OFF REM Procedure Name: get_(—)direct_(—)load REM Description: Procedure creates a list of files with direct load status VARIABLE T_(—)Name varchar2(30) SET SERVEROUTPUT OFF SET VERIFY OFF SET FEEDBACK OFF SET TRIMSPOOL ON SET TERMOUT OFF SET FLUSH OFF ACCEPT T_(—)Name char SET PAGES 0 SET HEADING OFF SPOOL/files6/ipsa/data_(—)loads/&T_(—)Name..dirload select index_(—)name from dba_(—)indexes where table_(—)name = UPPER(‘&T_(—)Name’)     AND status = ‘DIRECT LOAD’; SPOOL OFF SET TERMOUT ON SET SERVEROUTPUT OFF SET VERIFY ON SET FEEDBACK ON SET ECHO ON Data Loading Parameter Reporting

FIG. 13 illustrates an exemplary report indicating required table space allotments in a database. FIG. 14 depicts an exemplary report which lists statistics relating to the data in the database. FIG. 15 is an exemplary report indicating times to load various amounts of data. See the section entitled “REPORTING” below for more information about creating and using such reports.

Data Loading Archive Cleaner

The script clean_(—)archives is used to delete files from the archive directory used by the data loading script data_(—)loader. The script can use the Perl Module DataManip to compute the date stamp of the files that are to be deleted. This module can be obtained from the Perl web site (http://www.perl.com/pace/pub). The files put in the archive directory by the data loading script data_(—)loader will have a date stamp in the file name. This script will compute a date x days ago. It will then delete all the files in the archive directory that match that date. Depending on the frequency of data loading, the date stamp may include a time stamp as well. It may be more feasible to delete the archived files that match the day and not the time.

Configuration

Variables

-   -   $Archive_(—)dir (this variable will represent the location where         the archive files are located)     -   $Days (this variable will represent the number of days ago to         compute, default is seven)         Executing clean_(—)archives         clean_(—)archives [days]     -   If a number days is a parameter, it will computer days number of         days ago and delete those files     -   If no date is passed, the default of seven days is used         Procedure

The following is the procedure the clean_(—)archives script follows to remove files from the archive directory:

TABLE 12 Step Activity/Action 1 Read in and set days parameter, if necessary OR set days to the default 2 Computer the date to be deleted 3 Open the archive directory and read in the file names 4 For each files name, check to see if the date stamp on that file matches the date computed in step 2 If it matches, delete the file Purge Records Script

The script purge_(—)records is used to delete records from a Database. The script runs a PL/SQL script that deletes records from tables after a certain length of time. This script can be run from the cron or from the command line. The script performs error checking and reports via email to a specified administrator of success or failure. This script may be written in Perl.

Configuration

Environment Variables

Environment variables relevant to the Database need to be set. Specifically, the following environment variables need to be set: DBSE_(—)SID, DBSE_(—)HOME DBSE_(—)BASE, HOME, and PATH (to include the location of the dbse bin directory and the directory that holds the scripts used by this procedure). To configure these variables, look for the section in the code entitled setting environment variables. Set the values of $SID, $Home, and $Base. Verify that the path is correct when setting the PATH environment variable.

Directory Structure

A directory structure should be set up to house the files generated by purge_(—)records. See section 0 for a list and description of these files.

File Names

The files used/created by the purge_(—)records script should have a standardized naming format. The log file generated by the purge_(—)records script will be named purge.log. This file will hold a months worth of log entries. At the first day of the month, it will be renamed purge.logdate_(—)stamp. The current format of the $Date_(—)stamp is MonYYYY, however $Date_(—)stamp can be changed if more frequent archiving of the log file is necessary.

The file generated by the SQL Script is called purge.sql.log. This file is the spooled output of the SQL Script. It will be checked for errors/exceptions. If none are found, it is deleted. If there are errors found, it is renamed purge.sql.log.date_(—)stamp with the date stamp format as described above.

SQL Script

This script uses a SQL script called purge_(—)records. The scripts should be located in its own directory (following the OFA directory structure). Set $SQL_(—)dir to this directory location. The SQL script used bypurge_(—)records is as follows:

TABLE 13 Script Name Type Input Output Functionality purge_(—) script none purge.sql.log Deletes rows records of tables that are past the specified date (section 0) Output Files Files Generated

-   -   purge.sql.log (log file generated by SQL scriptpurge_(—)records)     -   purge.log (log files generated by this script)         Messaging

The purge_(—)records script will send email to an administrator to report success or failure of the purging process. Set $Mailer to the text string that will execute the mailer in command line mode. Set $DBA to the email address of the administrator.

Users

The purge_(—)records script will need to log on to SQL*Plus to execute the SQL script purge_(—)records. A variable name should be set to the schema that owns the tables that are going to be purged. Do not hard-code the schema password in the script. Instead use getpass.

Executing Purge_(—)records

The purge_(—)records script does not accept any parameters. It can be run from the command line or from the cron. To execute the script, type purge_(—)records.

Procedure

The following is the procedure the purge_(—)records script follows to load data into a database.

TABLE 14 Step Activity/Action 1 Set database environment Set directory structure variables Set SQL Script directory Set log file name variables 2 Create a new log file purge.log if one does not exist, or open an existing purge.log for appending 3 Set the mailer program and administrator's email address 4 Set the date stamp for load For the schema owner, set the user name and get password using getpass Set the fail flag to false (0) 5 Log onto SQL*Plus Execute the SQL script purge_records 6 Check to see if a the SQL script generated a log file If so, scan the log file for errors. If errors are found set the fail flag to true. Print to the log file the number of rows that were deleted If the log file does not exist, the script did not run correctly. Set the fail flag to true. 7 Check the value of the failure flag (it will be set to true if any errors occurred at any time during the process above) If the flag is false the purge was successful. Delete the log file generated by the SQL script and send an email report to the administrator If the flag is true the purge was unsuccessful. Rename the file generated by the SQL script to include the date stamp and send an email report to the administrator 8 If it is the first day of the month, rename purge.log to include the date stamp. Otherwise print the date/time to the log and close it Scripts

The following is the scripts reference above are used by purge_(—)records. The bolded lines should be configured to the particular system you are using.

getpass (Born Shell) #!/bin/sh #---------------------------------------------------------# # Script_(—)name: get_(—)pass # # # # Description: This script will be used to retrieve the # # appropriate password from the .password # # file. It can be used from the command # # line to retrieve a password or from a # # shell script to eliminate hard coding of # # passwords. The .password file is located # # in $DBSE_(—)HOME, with the executable # # located in $DBSE_(—)HOME/bin. # # # # Dependencies: getpass requires one file,.password # # # # SID_(—)FILE: Contains a list passwords for  # # system, sys, and dbse. # # # # Command syntax: getpass USERNAME # #---------------------------------------------------------# # what shell do we use? SHELL=/usr/bin/sh # where is our home? DBSE_(—)HOME=/files0/ipsa/vendor/dbse/product/7.3.4; export DBSE_(—)HOME # what path do we look for? PATH=/usr/bin:/bin:${DBSE_(—)HOME}/bin; export PATH # who are we retrieving the password for if[ $1 ] then  USER=$1 else  echo “ ”  echo “USAGE: getpass ‘username’”  echo “ ”  exit 1 fi # make sure the .password file exist if [ ! -s $DBSE_(—)HOME/.password ] then  echo “ ”  echo “ERROR: this machine does not appear to have a password file”  echo “ ”  exit 1 fi # get the appropriate password PASSWORD=‘cat $DBSE_(—)HOME/.password|grep -i “${USER} ”|awk ‘{print $2}’’ BAD_(—)SIDS=‘cat $DBSE_(—)HOME/.password|grep -i “${USER} ”|awk ‘{print $3}’’ OLD_(—)PASS=‘cat $DBSE_(—)HOME/.password|grep -i “${USER} ”|awk ‘{print $4}’’ # if a password was found, print it to the screen if[ $PASSWORD ] then  echo “$ {PASSWORD}”  # print a message if passwords appear to not be synced between databases if [ $BAD_(—)SIDS ] then  BAD_(—)SIDS=‘echo ${BAD_(—)SIDS}|cut -c2-100’  echo “ ”  echo “WARNING:\tThe password for ${USER} may not be synchronized”  echo “\t\tbetween all databases. The database(s) ${BAD SIDS} appear(s)”  echo “\t\tto use the old password ‘${OLDPASS}’”  echo “ ”  fi else  echo “ ”  echo “ERROR: ${USER} is not a supported username”  echo “ ”  exit 1 fi purge_(—)records (SQL Script) SET ECHO ON SET FEEDBACK ON SET FLUSH OFF SET HEADING OFF SET SERVEROUTPUT ON SET TERMOUT OFF SET VERIFY OFF SPOOL/files6/ipsa/purge/purge.sql.log REM *Purge records in PERF_(—)FACT_(—)TB table delete from PERF_(—)FACT_(—)TB where PERF_(—)FACT_(—)TB.PERF_(—)TIME_(—)KEY_(—)CD in (select PERF_(—)METRIC_(—)TIME_(—)TB.PERF_(—)TIME_(—)KEY_(—)CD from PERF_(—)METRIC_(—)TIME_(—)TB where to_(—)char(PERF_(—)METRIC_(—)TIME_(—)TB.PERF_(—)DT, ‘MM/DD/YYYY’) <=(select to_(—)char(sysdate - 40, ‘MM/DD/YYYY’) from dual)); REM *Purge records in EVENTS_(—)FACT_(—)TB table delete from EVENTS_(—)FACT_(—)TB where EVENTS_(—)FACT_(—)TB.PERF_(—)TIME_(—)KEY_(—)CD in (select PERF_(—)METRIC_(—)TIME_(—)TB.PERF_(—)TIME_(—)KEY_(—)CD from PERF_(—)METRIC_(—)TIME_(—)TB where to_(—)char(PERF_(—)METRIC_(—)TIME_(—)TB.PERF_(—)DT ‘MM/DD/YYYY’) <=(select to_(—)char(sysdate - 40, ‘MM/DD/YYYY’) from dual)); REM *Purge records in PERF_(—)FACT_(—)DLY_(—)TB table delete from PERF_(—)FACT_(—)DLY_(—)TB where PERF_(—)FACT_(—)DLY_(—)TB.PERF_(—)TIME_(—)KEY_(—)CD in (select PERF_(—)METRIC_(—)TIME_(—)TB.PERF_(—)TIME_(—)KEY_(—)CD from PERF_(—)METRIC_(—)TIME_(—)TB where to_(—)char(PERF_(—)METRIC_(—)TIME_(—)TB.PERF_(—)DT, ‘MM/DD/YYYY’) <=(select to char(sysdate - 397, ‘MM/DD/YYYY’) from dual)); SPOOL OFF Database Table Data Extractor

The script table_(—)extract is used to extract data from a Database table and write it to a flat file in a comma delimitated format. The purpose of this script is to extract the data from non-fact tables. Therefore, there not all tables can be extracted. The script can be configured to extract data from as many tables as required. The script may be written in Perl.

Configuration

Environment Variables

Environment variables relevant to the Dbse Database need to be set. Specifically, the following environment variables need to be set: DBSE_(—)SID, DBSE_(—)HOME, DBSE_(—)BASE, HOME, and PATH (to include the location of the dbse bin directory and the directory that holds the scripts used by this procedure). To configure these variables, look for the section in the code entitled setting environment variables. Set the values of $SID, $Home, and $DBase. Verify that the path is correct when setting the PATH environment variable.

Users

The table_(—)extract script will need to log on to SQL*Plus to execute the SQL script table_(—)extract. A variable name should be set to the schema that owns the tables that are going to be extracted. Do not hard-code the schema password in the script. Instead use getpass (see below).

PL/SQL

For every table that is to be extracted, a corresponding PL/SQL select statement is required. Determine which columns should be extracted and what, if any, filters are applicable.

-   d. utput Files     Files Generated     -   table_(—)name.dat (contains data returned from the select         statement for table_(—)name in a comm a delimitated format)         Executing table_(—)extract         table_(—)extract table_(—)name output_(—)directory     -   Extract data from table_(—)name     -   Put file table_(—)name.dat into output_(—)directory         Procedure

The following is the procedure the table_(—)extract script follows to extract data from a database into a text file.

TABLE 15 Step Activity/Action 1 Read in and set parameters (table_(—)name and output_(—)directory) Set database environment 2 For each user, set user name and get password using getpass 3 Log onto SQL*Plus Set SQL system variables Set Spool to be output_(—)directory/table_(—)name.dat 4 Execute the correct select statement for table_(—)name, if non exist print out an error 5 Log off SQL*Plus 6 The output file table_(—)name.dat will now be in a format that has extra spaces between fields. Open the file and remove all extra white space Rewrite the file in the correct format Scripts

The following is the script reference above this is used by purge_(—)records. The bolded lines should be configured to the particular system you are using.

getpass (Born Shell) #!/bin/sh #---------------------------------------------------------# # Script_(—)name: get_(—)pass # # # # Description: This script will be used to retrieve the # # appropriate password from the .password # # file. It can be used from the command # # line to retrieve a password or from a # # shell script to eliminate hard coding of # # passwords. The .password file is located # # in $DBSE_(—)HOME, with the executable # # located in $DBSE_(—)HOME/bin. # # # # Dependencies: getpass requires one file,.password # # # # SID_(—)FILE: Contains a list passwords for  # # system, sys, and dbse. # # # # Command syntax: getpass USERNAME # #---------------------------------------------------------# # what shell do we use? SHELL=/usr/bin/sh # where is our home? DBSE_(—)HOME=/files0/ipsa/vendor/dbse/product/7.3.4; export DBSE_(—)HOME # what path do we look for? PATH=/usr/bin:/bin:${DBSE_(—)HOME}/bin; export PATH # who are we retrieving the password for if[ $1 ] then  USER=$1 else  echo “ ”  echo “USAGE: getpass ‘username’”  echo “ ”  exit 1 fi # make sure the .password file exist if [ ! -s $DBSE_(—)HOME/.password ] then  echo “ ”  echo “ERROR: this machine does not appear to have a password file”  echo “ ”  exit 1 fi # get the appropriate password PASSWORD=‘cat $DBSE_(—)HOME/.password|grep -i “${USER} ”|awk ‘{print $2}’’ BAD_(—)SIDS=‘cat $DBSE_(—)HOME/.password|grep -i “${USER} ”|awk ‘{print $3}’’ OLD_(—)PASS=‘cat $DBSE_(—)HOME/.password|grep -i “${USER} ”|awk ‘{print $4}’’ # if a password was found, print it to the screen if[ $PASSWORD ] then  echo “$ {PASSWORD}”  # print a message if passwords appear to not be synced between databases if [ $BAD_(—)SIDS ] then  BAD_(—)SIDS=‘echo ${BAD_(—)SIDS}|cut -c2-100’  echo “ ”  echo “WARNING:\tThe password for ${USER} may not be synchronized”  echo “\t\tbetween all databases. The database(s) ${BAD SIDS} appear(s)”  echo “\t\tto use the old password ‘${OLDPASS}’”  echo “ ”  fi else  echo “ ”  echo “ERROR: ${USER} is not a supported username”  echo “ ”  exit 1 fi

Reporting

FIG. 16 depicts an embodiment of the present invention which graphically conveys availability in a network with service assurance capabilities. In operation 1600, report parameters are selected relating to availability of monitored elements, services, and processes of a network. A database is polled in operation 1602 for data that matches the report parameters. A graph is generated in operation 1604 from the data that matches the report parameters. In operation 1606, the generated graph is displayed to graphically represent the monitored elements, services, and processes of the network.

In one aspect of the present invention, the step of selecting the report parameters further includes the steps of selecting at least one metric class parameter relating to the activity of the network, selecting a graph type parameter, and selecting at least one report criteria parameter relating to the activity of the network. The generated graph may be of the selected graph type parameter.

In another aspect of the present invention, a selectable list of metrics parameters, a selectable list of graph type parameters, and a selectable list of report criteria may be displayed. Further, the graph type parameter may be dependant upon the selected metric class parameter. The report criteria parameter may also be dependant upon the selected graph type parameter.

In one embodiment, the graph type parameter may be a line graph, a bar graph, a boxplot graph, and/or a spectrum graph. In addition, the graph may displayed via a browser.

More details follow.

IPSA Batch and Ad hoc Reporting

This section provides an overview of the IPSA reporting process. It sequencially covers the procedures for implementing both batch reporting and web-based ad hoc reporting. The following files and directories are used:

-   IPSA_(—)StartSPSS.cmd Located anywhere, it is used to start the     reporting process (see Configuration). Instantiates two SPSS     processes (spssw.exe, spsswin.exe) and IPSA_(—)SPPS.exe -   <SABATCH>Batch queue file location, as specified in the     IPSA_(—)StartSPSS.cmd file (see Configuration). -   IPSA_(—)BatchQueue.txt Queue file that, if present, is passed to     SPSS and contains batch report specifications. This file is deleted     after being read by IPSA_(—)SPSS.exe. See Adhoc.doc and graphs.doc     for content explanations. -   <SAADHOC>Adhoc queue file location, as specified in -   <SARPHME>\InputQueue\IPSA_(—)Reporting_(—)Config.txt (see     Configuration). -   IPSA_(—)AdhocQueue.txt Queue file passed to SPSS that contains ad     hoc report parameters. This file is created by the web interface     (<WW ROOT>\cgi-bin\adhoc.pl) and deleted after use by     IPSA_(—)SPSS.exe. See Adhoc.doc and graphs.doc for content     explanations.     -   IPSA_(—)AdHocQueue Working <instance>.txt

Adhoc working file with a unique IPSA_(—)SPSS.exe instance number, <instance>, that is defined in IPSA_(—)StartSPSS.cmd (see Configuration).

-   IPSA_(—)ProcessTheBatchQueue.txt The presence of this file notifies     IPSA_(—)SPSS.exe to read <SABATCH>\IPSA_(—)BatchQueue.txt and pass     it to SPSS. This file is polled for every five seconds. -   <SARPHME> The reporting home directory, as specified in the     IPSA_(—)StartSPSS.cmd file (see Configuration). All files needed to     generate reports are located within this directory. -   \InputQueue IPSA_(—)SPSS.exe configuration and control files.     -   IPSA\_(—)Reporting_(—)Config.txt -   IPSA_(—)SPSS.exe configuration file. Includes database location and     login information, output directories and image format specification     for the generated graphs (see Configuration). -   IPSA_(—)ControlQueue.txt Contains commands to be issued to     IPSA_(—)SPSS.exe during execution. Used for terminating the process. -   \Logs Log files generated from IPSA_(—)SPSS.exe execution     -   IPSA_(—)VB_(—)SPSS.log Error messages from program execution. -   \SPSS All SPSS related files. -   \Macros SPSS macros -   !incdef.SPS     -   !bargrph.SPS bar graph -   !bxgrph.SPS boxplot     -   !spect.SPS spectrum graph -   !xygrph.SPS xy line graph -   \Templates SPSS chart looks -   avail.clo availabilty graph     -   bar.clo bar graph -   box.clo boxplot -   exception.clo exception graph -   line.clo xy line graph -   \Working Data Files SPSS macros use this directory for temporary     files. -   \Web\HtmlTemplates HTML fragments for use to dynamically produce     HTML     -   todays_(—)urls_(—)head_(—)template.txt batch TOC header     -   todays_(—)urls_(—)detail_(—)template.txt batch TOC report title     -   todays_(—)urls_(—)tail_(—)template.txt batch TOC footer     -   detail_(—)urls_(—)head_(—)template.txt batch/adhoc         list-of-reports header     -   detail_(—)urlsdetail_(—)template.txt batch/adhoc list-of-reports         details _(—)detail_(—)urls_(—)tail_(—)template.txt batch/adhoc         list-of-reports footer -   <SAWEB> The report output home directory, as specified in     <SARPHME>\InputQueue\IPSA_(—)Reporting_(—)Config.txt (see     Configuration). -   \Adhoc\<date>_(—)INFO Adhoc reports issued on the date <date> where     <date> is of the form YYYYMMDD. This directory is created by the     report generation script.     -   <adhoc_(—)report title><date><unique id>.html the generated         adhoc report -   \Batch\Daily Daily batch reports home directory -   <date>_(—)INFO Generated batch reports. <date> is of the form     YYYYMMDD, but is the date prior to the date when the report request     was issued. This directory is created by the report generation     script. -   \Images Images for the HTML pages     -   Graph1.gif list bullet     -   SA1.gif Service Assurance logo -   WEB ROOT> Root directory of the web server where the reports will be     housed. -   bground.gif background image for the adhoc web pages -   \cgi-bin Adhoc files location. This directory must be accessible     from a web browser via HTTP and have “execute” permission assigned     to it. -   adhoc.pl Perl script used to generate ad hoc reports. This file is     accessed via HTTP from a web browser to start the ad hoc report data     gathering process. -   adhoc.setup.txt Setup and configuration file for the adhoc.pl     script. Contains report types and descriptions.     Batch Request     Overview

To enable report generation, execute IPSA_(—)StartSPSS.cmd. Both SPSS and a VB file-polling application are invoked in the form of IPSA_(—)SPSS.exe, sppssw.exe, and spsswin.exe. These are processes that can be monitored using Window NT Task Manager. With report criteria specified in <SABATCH>IPSA_(—)BatchQueue.txt, create the file <SAADHOC>IPSA_(—)ProcessTheBatchQueue.txt. The contents of this file are unimportant, as only its presence is polled for. IPSA_(—)SPSS.exe reads the contents of IPSA_(—)BatchQueue.txt and passes it to SPSS. Graphs are generated in <SAWEB>\Batch\Daily\as well as an HTML file that points to the images.

Multiple graphs will be generated if, for example, 100 elements are reported on and the maximum number of elements per axis has been set to 10. In this case, 10 graphs would be generated and the HTML file would link to each of them. To terminate the application, alter <SARPHME>\InputQueue\IPSA_(—)ControlQueue.txt as stated in the “Controlling IPSA_(—)SPSS during execution” section of this document.

Installation

Run SetupVisualBasicRuntime\Setup.exe to install needed Visual Basic runtime components to your system. The installation directory that you choose must be specified in IPSA_(—)StartSPSS.cmd if you plan to use the command file.

Configuration

IPSA_(—)StartSPSS.cmd is often used to start the reporting process. This command file changes to the IPSA installation directory and executes IPSA_(—)SPSS.exe, passing three modifyable parameters:

-   -   SARPHME: <SARPHME>, reporting home directory     -   SABATCH: <SABATCH>, location of batch input queue     -   INSTNCE: <instance>, the unique instance of this         IPSA_(—)SPSS.exe process

-   <SARPHME>\InputQueue\IPSA_(—)Reporting_(—)Config.txt contains     reporting and environment configuration for both the VB and SPSS     applications: @{

-   SADSN=ipsa01 SAUID=spssuser

-   SAPWD=spssuser SASRVER=IPSA01

-   SAWEB=“C:\Inetpub\WWWroot”

-   SAWEBRL=“/web_(—)reports”

-   SAADHOC=“c:\Data\Reporting\InputQueue”

-   DBESCPE=\MAXAXIS=10 GRPHOUT=“JPEG File”

-   }@

-   SADSN: DSN for the database

-   SAUID: database user id

-   SAPWD: database password

-   SASRVER: database server

-   DBESCPE: escape character

-   SAWEB: the root directory of the web server (e.g.     c:\InetPub\WWWroot).

-   SAWEBRL: report output directory, relative to <WEB ROOT> (e.g. if     the reports will be in c:\InetPub\WWWroot\web_(—)reports, use     SAWEBRL=“/web_(—)reports”).

-   SAADHOC: directory location of the IPSA_(—)AdhocQueue.txt file

-   MAXAXIS: maximum number of objects that can exist on any single     axis.

-   GRPHOUT: type of graph image to be produced (valid values are “JPEG     File” or “Windows Bitmap”)     Set-Up Request

Update <SABATCH>IPSA_(—)BatchQueue.txt with your report criteria. See adhoc.doc for content specification. This file is read by IPSA_(—)SPSS.exe and the contents sent to SPSS to designate what data is pulled from the database and reported upon. If allfour of the following fields are not specified, defaults are used for allfour.

-   STRTYR, STRTMON, STRTDAY: default is all day yesterday -   NUMDAYS: default is 1 day

In addition, the wildcards “*” and “?” may be used when specifying element names and locations:

-   ELMNM “*” for multi-char -   ELMLOC=“?” for one-char     Start SPSS

Run IPSA_(—)Start_(—)SPSS.cmd to start IPSA_(—)SPSS.exe and instantiate SPSS. Run Windows Task Manager (taskmgr.exe) from Start/Run . . . to verify that the following Processes are running: IPSA_(—)SPSS.exe, spssw.exe, and spsswin.exe.

note: An enhancement would be to have IPSA_(—)SPSS.exe run as a Windows NT Service.

Propagate the Action

The presence of <SAADHOC>\IPSA_(—)ProcessTheBatchQueue.txt will notify the IPSA_(—)SPSS.exe to read <SABATCH>\IPSA_(—)BatchQueue.txt and pass the report parameters to SPSS (see the next section, “IPSA_(—)SPSS Operation”). The content of this file does not matter, as only its presence is checked for. This file is deleted when IPSA_(—)SPSS.exe has processed it.

note: This is problematic when multiple instances of IPSA_(—)SPSS.exe exist and all are expected to wait for this file to be created. A possible solution is to have multiple copies of IPSA_(—)ProcessTheBatchQueue.txt located in separate directories, each being accessed by a single IPSA\-SPSS.exe process.

IPSA_(—)SPPS Operation

This process polls for the existence of

-   <SAADHOC>\IPSA_(—)ProcessTheBatchQueue.txt. Once found,     <SABATCH>\IPSA_(—)BatchQueue.txt is read and its values passed to     SPSS for processing.

The batch queue could be separate for each instance of this process.

Two places that all instances must access are (1) Ad-hoc queue and (2), web documents dir.

Controlling IPSA_(—)SPSS during execution

Commands may be issued to IPSA_(—)SPSS.exe by creating <SARPHME>\InputQueue\IPSA_(—)ControlQueue.txt and entering commands into it. IPSA_(—)SPSS.exe reads this file (if it exists) and executes the commands contained within.

For example, the following file contents will terminate the SPSS and IPSA_(—)SPSS.exe processes:

-   @{ -   SAQUIT=yes -   }@

If this method is not used, the processes must be killed using Windows Task Manager (see 3.4). IPSA_(—)ControlQueue.txt is deleted after use.

note: Currently the only command that IPSA_(—)SPSS recognizes is “SAQUIT yes” (see above).

note: This file currently resides in <SARPHME>\InputQueue\but can be reconfigured to exist in the queue directory for multiple instances of IPSA_(—)SPSS.exe.

Output

A table of contents for the generated graphs is created in <SAWEB>\Batch\Daily<date>_(—)INFO, as well as the graph image files. This table of contents is viewable in a web browser.

-   <SARPHME>\Logs\will contain a log file named IPSA_(—)VB_(—)SPSS.log     if any errors are encountered.     Updating the Setup program

From the Visual Basic IDE, open the IPSA_(—)SPSS.VBP project file. Make any needed code changes, then create IPSA_(—)SPSS.EXE from the File menu. Close the IDE. From the Visual Basic program group, start the Application Setup Wizard. Open the IPSA_(—)VB_(—)SPSS.SWT template file and follow the prompts to create the setup program, answering “no” to all questions related to “remote automation components”. When prompted, choose a destination output directory and create the setup files.

Once the setup program has been created, edit the SETUP.LST file in the destination output directory that you chose. Towards the end of the text, change all solitary occurrences of “SPSS” to “IPSA” (see below). Save and close the file when completed.

-   File9=1,,IPSA_(—)SPSS.ex_(—),IPSA_(—)SPSS.exe,$(AppPath),,,Sep. 29,     1999 16:14:09,153088,1.0.0.0,“     ”,“IPSA”,“$(AppPath)\IPSA_(—)SPSS.exe”     [Setup] -   Title=IPSA -   DefProgramGroup=IPSA -   DefaultDir=$(ProgramFiles)\IPSA -   Setup=setup1.exe -   AppExe=IPSA_(—)SPSS.exe -   AppToUninstall=IPSA_(—)SPSS.exe -   AppPath=     Ad hoc Request     Overview

The ad hoc reporting works in a manner practically identical to the batch reporting. A queue file is created with report parameters contained within it and IPSA_(—)SPSS.exe polls for its presence. Once found, the report parameters are passed to SPSS, where the graphs are created. The only real difference is that the queue file is not created by hand, it is generated from a web-based interface. The presence of the IPSA_(—)AdhocQueue.txt file is the trigger for the report generation. This is analogous to the IPSA_(—)ProcessTheBatchFile.txt file from batch reporting.

Requirements

-   -   HTML 3.2 compliant web browser (e.g. Netscape Navigator 3.0 or         higher, MS Internet Explorer 4.0 or higher).     -   adhoc.pl file located in the cgi-bin directory of a web server     -   adhoc.setup.txt file located in the same directory as adhoc.pl         (above)         Navigation From the main Ad hoc screen 1700 located at         http://<web_(—)server>/cgi-bin/adhoc.pl, choose a metric class         from the selection list and click Next 1702 (see FIG. 17A). If         multiple graph types 1710 are available for the chosen metric,         they are displayed next (see FIG. 17). After choosing a graph         type, enter report criteria into the form (see FIG. 18).         Exemplary fields include Title 1800, Element 1802, Location,         etc. Specify multiple elements 1804 or locations 1806 by either         typing their name in the entry field or selecting them from the         drop-down list and clicking “Add”. Acceptable wildcards are “*”         for “all” and “?” for “zero or one”. Choose multiple metrics by         holding the CTRL key down while selecting each desired metric.

Click on Submit to create or update <SAADHOC>\IPSA_(—)AdhocQueue.txt. IPSA_(—)SPSS.exe reads its contents and pass the parameters to SPSS. The generated graphs are created in <SAWEB>\Adhoc<date>_(—)INFO and returned to the user via the browser. Upon graph generation, IPSA\-AdhocQueue.txt is deleted.

Reporting Requirements Phase 2

The tables shown in FIGS. 19–22 detail the Batch Reports recommended, the eight generic report types, and the Adhoc requirements. The remainder of this section references these matrices several times. In particular, FIG. 19 illustrates exemplary batch reporting requirements. FIG. 20 lists some of the generic report types. FIG. 21 shows exemplary ad hoc reporting requirements. FIG. 22 illustrates sample metric information.

FIGS. 19–22 provide historical record of collected performance data and network events. Exception reporting is limited to views of events that occurred in real-time and does not include finding exceptions in the historical data by analyzing past data.

Batch Reporting

General Information (Example)

-   -   Daily batch report processing will be scheduled to occur at 1:00         am using Windows NT WinAT to execute SPSS reporting scripts.     -   Daily batch processing will include both performance and event         reporting operations.     -   Examples of the eight generic report types referenced in this         document and in FIGS. 19–22 can be found in FIGS. 23–30.

Daily performance reporting processing tasks

-   -   Import all ECM and Patroller comma-separated-value files into         DBSE using. SQL Loader. The data files will be moved to the data         repository (i.e. data_(—)feeds directory) by either the         Patroller History Propagator or the Solaris cron facility (for         ECM files).     -   Generate and publish (save) the 34 html-based report files         listed in the matrix shown in FIGS. 19–22. The reports will be         published to the documents directory of the web server.     -   Calculate daily roll-up statistics for each different metric         collected and store the rolled-up statistics.     -   Delete expired daily detail data (metric records older than 40         days months).     -   Delete expired rolled-up data (rolled-up records older than 13         months).

Daily event reporting processing tasks

-   -   Analyze all availability-type events. These events include any         event specified as an event signifying an outage. An event will         be received when an object goes down and comes back up. These         event pairs must be located, and an outage duration calculated.     -   Using the result of the above analysis, record an event for each         day of the outage with an accurate daily outage duration.     -   Generate and publish the 4 exception reports listed in FIGS.         19–22.     -   Generate and publish the Network Availability, Process         Availability and Service Availability reports listed in FIGS.         19–22.     -   Delete expired events data (event records older than 13 months).     -   Build and publish a daily web page with links to the 6 htrnl         event reports.

Other daily processing tasks (applies to both event and performance data)

-   -   Build and publish a daily web page with links to the 34         performance reports, the 4 exception reports, and the 2         availability reports. This page, and all batch reports must be         available by 6 am the next day.     -   Delete expired html report files (older than 7 days)         Ad-Hoc Reporting

A web-based ad-hoc capability is required to produce reports of the same eight generic report types as the batch reports.

The adhoc utility should present a menu hierarchy as shown in the Adhoc Reports table of FIG. 21. In this table, the expressions <element name>, <element location> and <instance> can be input by the user in the following forms:

-   -   A single name, location, or instance (i.e. “nsmmrt03”)     -   A list of names, locations, or instances (i.e.         “nsmmrt03,nsmmrt04”)     -   A variation of either a single name or list of names using * as         a multi-character wildcard.     -   A variation of either a single name or list of names using? as a         single-character wildcard.

Once the online menu/form is completed by the user, a “Submit” button should execute a database query with the selected choices. The “Submit” button should also validate any data that is entered if applicable, for proper format (not for valid content, however).

The query should be able access detail and rolled-up data as recent as midnight the previous day. The previous day's detail and rolled-up data should be available for adhoc queries after 6 am the next day.

Report Type Examples

FIGS. 23–30 show simple examples of each of the eight recommended report types.

Graph Explanations and Requirements

This section is an overview of what the graphs, such as those found in FIGS. 23–30, are and what they do. There will be some tips as to how to change certain properties if needed, how to run the graphs from the script, and other useful information.

Graphs

Running graphs from the script

To run the graph from the script the script (macro) open and the script that passes in the parameters. The pairs that go together are:

-   -   !xygrph.sps & callxy.sps: xy-line graphs for daily details     -   !bargrph.sps & callbar.sps: bar graphs for daily availability

-   !bxgrph.sps & callbx.sps: boxplots for daily comparisons and monthly     trends

-   !spect.sps & callsp.sps: spectrum graphs for event exceptions and     daily availability (high level and detail)

To run these scripts (macros), first you need to have the macro window open (the file with the !name) and go under the menu bar Run> All. This will run a define on the macro. After the processor is done running the define, switch over to the call file (i.e. callxy.sps) and select only the area that has the parameters. (There are little headers in this file that describe what each parameter set will accomplish when sent to the macro) Then under the menu bar Run> Selection. This will then pass the parameters to the macro and produce the graph in an output window.

Exporting graphs manually from the output window

To export a graph using what is in the output window, first click on the graph to select the graph area. Go under the menu File>Export which will bring up a dialog box. Select in the drop down box if you wish to export charts only, the document as a whole, or the document (no charts). If you are just exporting a JPEG, charts only would be a good selection. If you wish to export a Windows Bitrnap (BMP) then select the document as a whole. This will export the HTML file and the BMP. (It is easier to view a BMP in a HTML file because the BMP file will launch a paint program just to view it) Then after deciding on what you are going to export, click on the options button next to the drop down box and here you can make selections as to size, resolution, etc. Those optimal settings will be detailed later for each graph. Click OK to get back to the main dialog box. Next set the path for the exported chart by clicking on Browse. The path to the web server is O:\ipsa\product development\reporting\Web\WWWRoot.

Select your path, click OK, and then export the document. It should then be able to be viewed on twmmnt02.

Chart Properties

To change the chart properties (on IGRAPHs) and set it to a CHARTLOOK, double click on the graph in the output viewer. This will activate it into interactive mode. Go up to Format>Chart Properties in the menu bar and make necessary changes in the tabbed dialog box. Some changes include: Text size (the title and subtitle text size seems not to take in the CHARTLOOK option when set here-FYI), Font, Symbol attributes (shape, color, fill, etc), Axis attributes (line width, tick marks), colors (for legends, shapes, etc), and other features that need to be changed. After changing what you want, click Apply to view changes and OK to exit the dialog box. Then go to the menu bar Format>Chartlook and click on Save As with the “as displayed” feature highlighted in the box to the left. Save the chartlook to a location that can be called from the macro. This chartlook should then set the settings for the next graphs run with the /CHARTLOOK=‘file’ subcommand in the IGRAPH syntax.

XY-Line Graph (See FIGS. 23–24)

What it shows

The xy-line graph reports the daily details for CPU Utilization (for routers, Unix, and NT),Interface Utilization and Response Time for routers, Memory Utilization (for Unix and NT), Network I/O (for Unix and NT), Memory Utilization (Unix and NT), and eventually Reponse time for FTP, SMTP, NNTP, and HTTP.

Parameters

In the parameter call:

-   SET MPRINT ON. -   !XYGRPH ELMNM=nsmnmrt03 ELMTY=NT ELMLOC=Minneapolis -   METRCNM=CpuBusy_(—)yercent STRTYR=1999 STRTMON=06 -   STRTDAY=30 NUMDAYS=1 SARPHME=“o:\IPSA\Product Development\Reporting” -   SADSN=“ipsa01” SAUID=“spssuser” SAPWD=“spssuser” -   SASRVER=“ipsa01”.

The possible variables to pass in are as follows:

-   ELMNM (the element name) any elmnt_(—)nm located in the     Network_(—)Elmnt_(—)Tb. With our test data we have these elements     available: nsmmrt03, gfmmnt03, nsmmws16, nsmmrt04, nsmmrt05,     nsmmrt06, and nsmmrt07. -   ELMTY (the element type) any elmnt_(—)type_(—)cd located in the     Network_(—)Elmnt_(—)Tb. With our test data we have these types     available: RT (router), UX (Unix) and NT (NT). -   ELMLOC (the element location) any elmnt_(—)city_(—)nm located in the     Elnnt_(—)Loc_(—)Tb. -   METRCNM (the metric name) any metric_(—)nm located in the Perf     Metric_(—)Tb. With our test data we have these metrics available:     CpuBusy_(—)Percent, InterfaceUtilization_(—)Percent,     InterfaceUtilization_(—)BPS, CpuUtilization_(—)Percent,     MemoryFree\_(—)Pages, NetworkTraffic_(—)PPS, DiskBusy_(—)Percent,     CpuProcessorTime_(—)Percent, MemoryFree_(—)Mbytes, and     DiskTime_(—)Percent. Other metric names include     FtpResponseTime_(—)Seconds, SmtpResponseTime_(—)Seconds,     NntpResponseTime_(—)Seconds, and HttpResponseTime\-Seconds. -   STRTYR (the year) any perf_(—)yr located in the     Perf_(—)Metric_(—)Time_(—)Tb. -   STRTMON (the month) any perf_(—)mon located in the     Perf_(—)Metric_(—)Time_(—)Tb. With our test data we usually use 06     for the month of June. NOTE: Begin each one digit month with a zero! -   STRTDAY (the day) any perf_(—)day located in the     Perf_(—)Metric_(—)Time_(—)Tb. With our test data we usually use 30     for the day. NOTE: Begin each one digit day with a zero! -   NUMDAYS (the number of days the data will include) any number valid     (note that most graphs will be cluttered if too many days are     spanned with the exception of a monthly detail graph set up     specifically to handle that number of cases). For this DAILY graph,     use the number 1. -   SARPHME (path) This sets up the path to where certain files (if     needed) can be saved or referenced from. -   SADSN (DSN name) This specifies the DSN name used in the GET. -   SAUID (User ID name) This specifies the User ID name used in the     GET. -   SAPWD (Password) This specifies the password used in the GET. -   SASRVER (Server Name) This specifies the server used in the GET.     Manual Settings

For optimal output for the xy-line graph these settings should be made: (in the chart options in Export dialog box)

-   Resolution: 200×200 -   Size: 6×6 (or between 4×4 to 6×6) -   Format: YCC Color -   Quality: 100% -   Color Translation: Normal -   Operation: Progressive     Chartlook

This graph calls the chartlook line.clo found in the O:\ipsa\product development\reporting\spss\templates directory.

Bar Graph (See FIG. 27.)

What it shows

The bar graph reports the daily availability for Network, Services, and Processes.

It calculates the percentage of the availability for all of the elements, representing them as bars with the percentage displayed within the bars.

Parameters

In the parameter call:

-   SET MPRINT ON. -   !BARGRPH EVENT=“DNS Service Failed” ELMLOC=Minneapolis -   STRTYR=1999 STRTMON=06 STRTDAY=30 NUMDAYS=1 -   SARPHME=“o:\IPSA\Product Development\Reporting” -   SADSN=“ipsa01” SAUID=“spssuser” SAPWD=“spssuser” -   SASRVER=“ipsa01”.

The possible variables to pass in are the same as the xy-line graph except for:

-   EVENT (the event) any valid event_(—)string_(—)txt that is located     in the Events_(—)Fact_(—)Tb.     Manual Settings

For optimal output for the bar graph these settings should be made: (in the chart options in Export dialog box)

-   Resolution: 200×200 -   Size: 3×3 -   Format: YCC Color -   Quality: 100% -   Color Translation: Normal -   Operation: Progressive     Chartlook

This graph calls the chartlook bar.clo found in the O:\ipsa\product development\reporting\spss\templates directory.

Boxplot Graph (See FIGS. 25–26.)

What it shows

The boxplot graph reports daily comparisons and monthly trends.

Parameters

In the parameter call:

*************************************

DAILY COMPARISON BOXPLOT

***********************************

-   SET MPRINT ON. -   !BXGRPH ELMNM=(nsmmrt03 nsmmrt04 nsmmrt05) ELMTY=RT     -   ELMLOC=Minneapolis METRCNM=CpuBusy_(—)Percent     -   STRTYR=1999 STRTMON=06 STRTDAY=30 NUMDAYS=1 CODE=1     -   SARPHME=“o:\IPSA\Product Development\Reporting”     -   SADSN “ipsa01” SAUID=“spssuser” SAPWD=“spssuser”     -   SASRVER=“ipsa01”.

*******************************

MONTHLY TREND BOXPLOT

******************************

-   SET MPRINT ON. -   !BXGRPH ELMNM=(nsmmrt05) ELMLOC=Minneapolis     METRCNM=CpuBusy_(—)Percent     -   STRTYR=1999 STRTMON=06 STRTDAY=01 NUMDAYS=30 CODE=2     -   SARPHME=“o:\IPSA\Product Development\Reporting”     -   SADSN=“ipsa01” SAUID=“spssuser” SAPWD=“spssuser”     -   SASRVER=“ipsa01”.

The possible variables to pass in are the same as the xy-line graph except for:

-   ELMNM (element name) any valid elmnt_(—)nm from the     Network_(—)Elmmt_(—)Tb. It is given one or more names in the daily     comparison and only one name for the monthly trend.     Manual Settings

For optimal output for the bar graph these settings should be made: (in the chart options in Export dialog box)

-   Resolution: 200×200 -   Size: 3×3 -   Format: YCC Color -   Quality: 100% -   Color Translation: Normal -   Operation: Progressive

***NOTE: The monthly boxplot can be exported with these settings, but will NOT turn out very well. This type of graph will not have readable fonts until (hopefully) the next version of SPSS.

Chartlook

This graph calls the chartlook box.clo found in the O:\ipsa\product development\reporting\spss\templates directory.

Exception Text Report (See FIG. 30)

Spectrum Graph (See FIGS. 28–29.)

What it shows

This can make three chart types: Daily exception spectrums (for routers, Unix, and NT), Daily Availability Spectrums (High Level overview) for ALL Network, Service, and Process events, and Daily Availability Spectrums (Low Level overview) for EACH event under Network, Service, and Process detailing the elements that the event occurred upon.

Parameters

In the parameter call:

********************************************

DAILY EVENT EXCEPTION GRAPH:

for elements: RT, LX, NT, etc.

**********************************

-   SET MPRINT ON. -   !EXCEPT ELMNM=(nsmmrt03 nsmmrt04 nsmnmrt05) ELMT_(—)TY=RT     ELMLOC=Minneapolis     -   CODE=1 STRTYR=1999 STRTMON=06 STRTDAY=30 NUMDAYS=1     -   SARPHME=“o:\IPSA\Product Development\Reporting”     -   SADSN=“ipsa01” SAPWD=“spssuser” SAPWD=“spssuser” -   SASRVER=“ipsa01”.

**************************************************************

DAILY EVENT AVAILABILITY GRAPH:

for Network, Service, and Process AS A WHOLE

*******************************************************

-   SET MPRINT ON. -   !EXCEPT AVAIL=Service ELMLOC=Minneapolis CODE=2     -   STRTYR=1999 STRTMON=06 STRTDAY=30 NUMDAYS=1     -   SARPHME=“o:\IPSA\Product Development\Reporting”     -   SADSN=“ipsa01” SAUID=“spssuser” SAPWD=“spssuser”     -   SASRVER=“ipsa01”.

*******************************************

DAILY EVENT AVAILABILITY GRAPH:

for EACH Network, Service, and Process

*********************************************

-   SET MPRINT ON. -   !EXCEPT EVENT=“DNS Service Failed” ELMLOC=Minneapolis CODE=3     -   STRTYR=1999 STRTMON=06 STRTDAY=30 NUMDAYS=1     -   SARPHME=“o:\IPSA\Product Development\Reporting”     -   SADSN=“ipsa01” SAUID=“spssuser” SAPWD=“spssuser”     -   SASRVER=“ipsa01”.

The possible variables to pass in are the same as in the graphs detailed earlier, except for:

-   AVAIL (availability type) valid parameters include ‘Network’,     ‘Service’, or ‘Process’. This selects ALL events under these     specifications, not just a single event type.     Manual Settings

For optimal output for the spectrum graph these settings should be made: (in the chart options in Export dialog box)

-   Resolution: 200×200 -   Size: 4.5×4.5 -   Format: YCC Color -   Quality: 100% -   Color Translation: Normal -   Operation: Progressive     Chartlook

The exception graph calls the chartlook exception.clo and the availability graphs call the chartlook avail.clo found in the O:\ipsa\product development\reporting\spss\templates directory.

Adhoc Web Demo

The Ad hoc web demo demonstrates an HTML-based front end to the SA reporting tool. It allows the user to submit ad hoc reporting criteria from a user-friendly interface. This data is picked up by SPSS and the generated graph is displayed in the browser.

Requirements:

-   -   HTML 3.2 compliant web browser (e.g. Netscape Navigator 3.0 or         higher, MS Internet Explorer 4.0 or higher).     -   adhoc.pl file located in the cgi-bin directory of a web server     -   adhoc.setup.txt file located in the same directory as adhoc.pl         (above)     -   *<wwwroot>/BatchTest/directory containing SPSS graphs         Overview:

From the main Ad hoc screen, a metric class is chosen and the Next button is clicked. If multiple graph types are available for the chosen metric, they are displayed to the user. After a graph type is chosen, the report criteria can be entered into the form that is displayed. Submitting the data will display a graph for the specified data.

Note: in this demo, only a minimal number of graphs exist, so only strict attention to detail will grant a valid report being displayed. If a report is requested that does not exist, the user will be told that no data points exist for the given criteria. Either use the “back” button to edit your criteria, or follow the hyperlink to create a new report query.

Bar Graph

Choose the Service Availability metric class

-   Title: <anything or nothing> -   Element(s): gfmmnt03 nsmmrt03 nsmmrt04 nsmmrt05 nsmmrt06 nsmmrt07 -   Location: Minneapolis (default example) -   Event: DNS Service Failed (default) -   Press Submit -   Box Plots -   Daily Comparison Box Plot -   Choose the Network Element Performance metric class -   Choose Daily Comparison Boxplot -   Title: <anything or nothing> -   Elements: nsmmrt03 nsmmrt04 nsmmrt05 -   Metric(s): CPU Busy (%) -   Location: Minneapolis (default) -   Element Type: Router (default) -   Press Submit -   Monthly Trend Box Plot -   Choose the Network Element Performance metric class -   Choose Monthly Trend Boxplot -   Title: <anything or nothing> -   Elements:* -   Metric(s): CPU Busy (%) -   Location: Minneapolis (default) -   Element Type: Router (default) -   Press Submit -   Exception Graphs -   Daily Event Exceptions -   Choose the Events metric class -   Choose Daily event exceptions from the Occurrence and Availability     menu -   Title: <anything or nothing> -   Location: Minneapolis (default)

Choose from any of the following three combinations:

-   Element(s): gfmmnt03 -   Element Type: NT -   Element(s): nsmmrt03 nsmmrt04 nsmmrt05 -   Element Type: Router -   Element(s): nsmmws16 -   Element Type: Unix

High Level Daily Event Exceptions

Choose the Events metric class

Choose High Level Daily event exceptions from the Occurrence and Availability menu

-   Title: <anything or nothing> -   Location: Minneapolis (default) -   Event Type: Network or Service

TABLE 16 Low Level Daily Event Exceptions REQUIRED FILES FOR REPORTING IPSA_(—)StartSPSS.cmd Located anywhere, it is used to start the reporting process (see Configuration). Instantiates two SPSS processes (spssw.exe, spsswm.exe) and IPSA_(—)SPPS.exe <SABATCH> Batch queue file location, as specified in the IPSA_(—)StartSPSS.cmd file (see Configuration). IPSA_(—)BatchQueue.txt Queue file that, if present, is passed to SPSS and contains batch report specifications. This file is deleted after being read by IPSA_(—)SPSS.exe. See Adhoc.doc and graphs.doc for content explanations. <SAADHOC> Adhoc queue file location, as specified in <SARPHME>\InputQueue\IPSA_(—)Reporting_(—) Config.txt(see Configuration). IPSA_(—)AdhocQueue.txt Queue file passed to SPSS that contains ad hoc report parameters. This file is created by the web interface (<WWW ROOT>\cgi-bin\adhoc.pl) and deleted after use by IPSA_(—)SPSS.exe. See Adhoc.doc and graphs.doc for content explanations. IPSA_(—)AdHocQueue_(—)Working_(—) Adhoc working file with a unique IPSA_(—)SPSS.exe instance>.txt instance number, <instance>, that is defined in IPSA_(—)StartSPSS.cmd (see Configuration). IPSA_(—)ProcessTheBatchQueue.txt The presence of this file notifies IPSA_(—)SPSS.exe to read <SABATCH>\IPSA_(—)BatchQueue.txt and pass it to SPSS. This file is polled for every five seconds. <SARPHME> The reporting home directory, as specified in the IPSA_(—)StartSPSS.cmd file (see Configuration). All files needed to generate reports are located within this directory. \InputQueue IPSA_(—)SPSS.exe configuration and control files. IPSA_(—)Reporting_(—)Config.txt IPSA_(—)SPSS.exe configuration file. Includes database location and login information, output directories and image format specification for the generated graphs (see Configuration). IPSA_(—)ControlQueue.txt Contains commands to be issued to IPSA_(—)SPSS.exe during execution. Used for terminating the process. \Logs Log files generated from IPSA_(—)SPSS.exe execution IPSA_(—)VB_(—)SPSS.log Error messages from program execution. \SPSS All SPSS related files. \Macros SPSS macros !incdef.SPS !bargrph.SPS bar graph !bxgrph.SPS boxplot !spect.SPS spectrum graph !xygrph.SPS xy line graph \Templates SPSS chart looks avail.clo availability graph bar.clo bar graph box.clo boxplot exception.clo exception graph line.clo xy line graph \Working Data Files SPSS macros use this directory for temporary files. \Web\HtmlTemplates HTML fragments for use to dynamically produce HTML batch TOC header todays_(—)urls_(—)head_(—)template.txt batch TOC report title todays_(—)urls_(—)detail_(—)template.txt batch TOC footer todays_(—)urls_(—)tail_(—)template.txt batch/adhoc list-of-reports header detail_(—)urls_(—)head_(—)template.txt batch/adhoc list-of-reports details detail_(—)urls_(—)detail_(—)template.txt detail_(—)urls_(—)tail_(—)template.txt batch/adhoc list-of-reports footer <SAWEB> The report output home directory, as specified in <SARPHME>\InputQueue\IPSA_(—)Reporting_(—) Config.txt(see Configuration). \Adhoc\<date>_(—)INFO Adhoc reports issued on the date <date> where <date> is of the form YYYYMMDD. The directory is created by the report generation script. the generated adhoc report <adhoc_(—)report_(—)title><date> <unique id>.html \Batch\Daily Daily batch reports home directory \<date>_(—)INFO Generated batch reports. <date> is of the form YYYYMMDD, but is the date prior to the date when the report request was issued. This directory is created by the report generation script. \Images Images for the HTML pages Graph1.gif list bullet SA1.gif Service Assurance logo <WEB ROOT> Root directory of the web server where the reports will be housed. bground.gif background image for the adhoc web pages \cgi-bin Adhoc files location. This directory must be accessible from a web browser via HTTP and have “execute” permission assigned to it. adhoc.pl Perl script used to generate ad hoc reports. This file is accessed via HTTP from a web browser to start the ad hoc report data gathering process. adhoc.setup.txt Setup and configuration file for the adhoc.pl script. Contains report types and descriptions.

Choose the Events metric class

Choose Low Level Daily event exceptions from the Occurrence and Availability menu

-   Title: <anything or nothing> -   Location: Minneapolis (default) -   Event: DNS Service Failed or SMTP Service Failed -   XY Line Graph

Choose the Network Element Performance metric class

Choose the Detail XY Line Graph report type

-   Title: <anything or nothing> -   Element(s): nsmmrt03 -   Location: Minneapolis (default) -   Metric(s): CPU Busy (%) -   Element Type: Router (default) -   Press Submit -   IPSA_(—)StartSPSS.cmd

Located anywhere, it is used to start the reporting process (see Configuration). Instantiates two SPSS processes (spssw.exe, spsswin.exe) and IPSA_(—)SPPS.exe

<SABATCH>

Batch queue file location, as specified in the IPSA_(—)StartSPSS.cmd file (see Configuration).

-   IPSA_(—)BatchQueue.txt

Queue file that, if present, is passed to SPSS and contains batch report specifications. This file is deleted after being read by IPSA_(—)SPSS.exe. See Adhoc.doc and graphs.doc for content explanations.

<SAADHOC>

Adhoc queue file location, as specified in <SARPHME>\InputQueue\IPSA_(—)Reporting_(—)Config.txt (see Configuration).

-   IPSA_(—)AdhocQueue.txt

Queue file passed to SPSS that contains ad hoc report parameters. This file is created by the web interface (<WWW ROOT>\cgi-bin\adhoc.pl) and deleted after use by IPSA_(—)SPSS.exe. See Adhoc.doc and graphs.doc for content explanations.

-   IPSA_(—)AdHocQueue_(—)Working_(—)<instance>.txt

Adhoc working file with a unique IPSA_(—)SPSS.exe instance number, <instance>, that is defined in IPSA_(—)StartSPSS.cmd (see Configuration).

-   IPSA_(—)ProcessTheBatchQueue.txt

The presence of this file notifies IPSA_(—)SPSS.exe to read <SABATCH>\IPSA_(—)BatchQueue.txt and pass it to SPSS. This file is polled for every five seconds.

<SARPHME>

The reporting home directory, as specified in the IPSA_(—)StartSPSS.cmd file (see Configuration). All files needed to generate reports are located within this directory.

-   \InputQueue -   IPSA_(—)SPSS.exe configuration and control files. -   IPSA_(—)Reporting_(—)Config.txt IPSA_(—)SPSS.exe configuration file.     Includes database location and login information, output directories     and image format specification for the generated graphs (see     Configuration). -   IPSA_(—)ControlQueue.txt

Contains commands to be issued to IPSA_(—)SPSS.exe during execution. Used for terminating the process.

-   \Logs -   Log files generated from IPSA_(—)SPSS.exe execution -   IPSA_(—)VB_(—)SPSS.log Error messages from program execution. -   \SPSS

All SPSS related files.

-   \Macros SPSS macros -   !incdef.SPS -   !bargrph.SPS bar graph -   !bxgrph.SPS boxplot -   !spect.SPS spectrum graph -   !xygrph.SPS xy line graph -   \Templates SPSS chart looks -   avail.clo availabilty graph -   bar.clo bar graph -   box.cloboxplot -   exception.clo exception graph -   line.clo xy line graph -   \Working Data Files SPSS macros use this directory for temporary     files. -   \Web\HtmlTemplates HTML fragments for use to dynamically produce     HTML -   todays_(—)urls_(—)head_(—)template.txt batch TOC header -   todays_(—)urls_(—)detail_(—)template.txt batch TOC report title -   todays_(—)urls_(—)tail_(—)template.txt batch TOC footer     detail_(—)urls_(—)head_(—)template.txt batch/adhoc list-of-reports     header -   detail_(—)urls_(—)detail_(—)template.txt batch/adhoc list-of-reports     details -   detail_(—)urls_(—)tail_(—)template.txt batch/adhoc list-of-reports     footer     <SAWEB>

The report output home directory, as specified in <SARPHME>\InputQueue\IPSA_(—)Reporting_(—)Config.txt (see Configuration).

\Adhoc<date>_(—)INFO

Adhoc reports issued on the date <date>where <date> is of the form YYYYMMDD. This directory is created by the report generation script.

-   <adhoc_(—)report_(—)title><date><unique id>.html -   the generated adhoc report -   \Batch\Daily Daily batch reports home directory -   <date>_(—)INFO Generated batch reports. <date> is of the form     YYYYMMDD, but is the date prior to the date when the report request     was issued. This directory is created by the report generation     script. -   \Images Images for the HTML pages -   Graph1.gif list bullet -   SA1.gif Service Assurance logo -   <WEB ROOT> Root directory of the web server where the reports will     be housed. -   bground.gif background image for the adhoc web pages -   \cgi-bin Adhoc files location. This directory must be accessible     from a web browser via HTTP and have “execute” permission assigned     to it. -   adhoc.pl Perl script used to generate ad hoc reports. This file is     accessed via HTTP from a web browser to start the ad hoc report data     gathering process. -   adhoc.setup.txt Setup and configuration file for the adhoc.pl     script. Contains report types and descriptions.     adhoc.pl

Adhoc.pl is a CGI utility that builds HTML forms used for gathering ad hoc reporting information. This information is stored in a directory relative to $output_(—)dir_(—)root of the form YYYYMMDD_(—)INFO in a text file defined by $output_(—)file. This text file is opened, locked, and updated then closed and unlocked. A Visual Basic application feeds this queue file to SPSS to generate a report and creates an HTML file with links to the graph(s). The name of this HTML file is determined by appending the unique id generated from &unique_(—)id onto the end of the report title and storing this in the text file. A link to this file is provided at process completion. Adhoc.pl may be written in Perl.

The report data that is created from this script includes

-   -   bar graph     -   trend box plot     -   comparison box plot     -   detail xy line graph     -   daily event exceptions     -   daily event exceptions (high level)     -   daily event exceptions (low level)         Configuration

-   $output_(—)dir_(—)root—absolute path (including trailing slash) to     the directory that the script should publish the data in. Note that     backslashes (\) must be escaped

-   (e.g. $output_(—)dir_(—)root=“c:\\InetPub\\wwwroot\\”;).

-   $output_(—)dir_(—)from_(—)web_(—)root-relative path (including     trailing slash) from web root of the directory where the reports     will be published. Used for creating the link to the user when     report data entry is completed (e.g.     $output_(—)dir_(—)from_(—)web_(—)root=“/Adhoc/”;).

-   $output_(—)file—the name of the file to be generated from the script     that contains all of the SPSS report information.     Adding a New Report Type

In it's current state the script would require a modification to each of its primary subroutines to accommodate a new graph type. The changes are as follows:

The section of the main routine commented as “write data to file” would need to have a new elsif block that validated the form values and called a subroutine to print the values to the text file in a format similar to the others.

Add another elsif block to choose_(—)metric that checks the metric_(—)class form value and calls a subroutine to either generate the appropriate HTML form or display a report type selection page—both of which would need to be written.

Add another elsif block to choose_(—)report that calls the subroutine to create the HTML form.

Modify print_(—)metric_(—)options if a new metric class is needed.

As noted above, create a subroutine to generate the HTML form to gather report data from the user.

Adhoc

Lists, enclosed by parentheses and space delimited, are supported for the ELMNM, ELMLOC, and the METRCNM parameters.

Additionally

Wild cards, the “%” character for matching zero to many characters, and the “_(—)” character for matching a single character, are supported for the ELMNM and the ELMLOC parameters

TABLE 17 Parameter descriptions RPTITLE Any string you want to use to describe your query ELMNM Any elmnt_(—)nm column in the network_(—)elmnt_(—)tb table AVAIL Logical grouping of related event types; can be set to Network, Service, or Process EVENT Any event_(—)string_(—)txt column in the events_(—)fact_(—)tb table ELMTY Any elmnt_(—)type_(—)cd column in the network_(—)elmnt_(—) tb table ELMLOC Any elmnt_(—)city_(—)nm column in the elmnt_(—)loc_(—)tb table METRCNM Any metric_(—)nm column in the perf_(—)metric_(—)tb table CODE Identifies a code path through an SPSS macro. Only valid for the !EXCEPT and the !BXGRPH macros. For the !EXCEPT macro, use a value of one (1) for daily event exceptions, a value of two (2) for high level daily event availability, and a value of three (3) for low level daily event availability. For the !BXGRPH macro, use a value of one (1) for daily comparisons, and a value of two (2) for monthly trends STRTYR Four digit year spec STRTMON Two digit month spec STRTDAY Two digit day of the month spec NUMDAYS Two digit number used to specify a range of days

EXAMPLE

“adhoc” input queue file

#This is a comment; each request begins with a line that contains only the “@{” characters

#and each request ends with a line that only contains the “}@” characters

# any line beginning with the “#” character is considered a comment line

@{ !BARGRPH RPTITLE = “Daily Availability Bar Chart”  ELMNM = (gfmmnt03 nsmmrt03 nsmmrt04)  EVENT = “DNS Service Failed” ELMLOC = Minneapolis  STRTYR = 1999 STRTMON = 06 STRTDAY = 30 NUMDAYS = 1 }@ @{ !BXGRPH RPTITLE = “CPU Utilization Comparison”  ELMNM = (nsmmrt03 nsmmrt04 nsmmrt05) ELMTY = RT  ELMLOC = Minneapolis METRCNM = CpuBusy_(—)Percent  STRTYR = 1999 STRTMON = 06 STRTDAY = 30 NUMDAYS = 1 CODE = 1 }@ @{ !BXGRPH RPTITLE = “CPU Utilization Trend”  ELMNM = (nsmmrt05) ELMTY = RT  ELMLOC = Minneapolis METRCNM = CpuBusy_(—)Percent  STRTYR = 1999 STRTMON = 06 STRTDAY = 01 NUMDAYS = 30 CODE = 2 }@ @{ !EXCEPT RPTITLE = “Daily Event Exception”  ELMNM = (nsmmrt03 nsmmrt04 nsmmrt05)  ELMTY = RT ELMLOC = Minneapolis  CODE = 1 STRTYR = 1999 STRTMON = 06 STRTDAY = 30 NUMDAYS = 1 }@ @{ !EXCEPT RPTITLE = “Daily Event Availability (High level)”  AVAIL = Service ELMLOC = Minneapolis CODE = 2  STRTYR = 1999 STRTMON = 06 STRTDAY = 30 NUMDAYS = 1 }@ @{ !EXCEPT RPTITLE = “Daily Event Availability (Low level)”  EVENT = “DNS Service Failed” ELMLOC = Minneapolis CODE = 3  STRTYR = 1999 STRTMON = 06 STRTDAY = 30 NUMDAYS = 1 }@ @{ !XYGRPH RPTITLE = Daily Detail XY-Line”  ELMNM = nsmmrt03 ELMTY = RT ELMLOC = Minneapolis  METRCNM = CpuBusy_(—)Percent STRTYR = 1999 STRTMON = 06  STRTDAY = 30 NUMDAYS = 1 }@ ECM Internal Reporting

This section outlines the procedure for generating internal alarm and poll reports from the Event Correlator and Manager.

Assumptions:

-   -   ECM is installed on NT.     -   User has Administrator rights on server in question.     -   Procedure only works on NT versions of ECM         Basic Procedure

-   a. Turn on ECM client and log in to ECM server in question.

-   b. Once interface is enabled and client has fully logged into     server, click on Admin and then Report List.

-   c. The Report List dialog will open.

-   d. Click on NCAlarm Definition Report and then click Run.

-   e. Once the report is generated click the print icon and the report     will be generated at your default printer.

-   f. Close the NC Alarm Definition Report.

-   g. Go back to the ECM client and click on the NC Poll Report.

-   h. Next click Run.

-   i. Print this report and exit the system.     Analysis

This process generates line item reports of the user [re]defined alarms/polls in ECM. These are generated through a proprietary format of Seagate's Crystal Reports, and are possible due to the existence of the database that sits behind the ECM installation on NT systems. These reports can be modified externally through a copy of Crystal Reports, and can be added to through the ECM interface.

IIS (Internet Information Server) 3.0

Start Services

-   -   Open the control panel (Start>Settings>Control Panel)     -   Click on Services     -   Select “IIS Admin Service” and “World Wide Web Publishing         Services” and click on the start button.         Set Root Directory     -   Create a folder to be your home directory. (i.e. We set one up         called ‘WWWRoot’ in the path C:\Data\WWWRoot)     -   Open Microsoft Management Console (Start>Programs>Windows NT 4.0         Option Pack>Microsoft Internet Information Server>Internet         Service Manager)     -   Open the Internet Information Server folder and then twmmnt02     -   Right click on Default Web Site and drag down to Properties     -   Go into the ‘Home Directory’ tab and change the ‘local path’ to         the name of the root directory that you created         Settings     -   Open the Microsoft Management Console again     -   Right click on Default Web Site again and under Properties         change these settings:         Web Site Tab

-   Change description name as desired (Service Assurance Web Site).     -   Change IP address to your own (149.122.57.21—it also happens to         be in the drop down box)

-   Check ‘enable logging’ and under properties change the log file     directory (C:\data\iislogs)     Home Directory Tab

-   Change local path if you didn't already when setting up the root     directory (C:\data\wwwroot)

-   Check ‘directory browsing allowed’ (if your default document isn't     directly in the root directory)     Documents Tab

-   Check ‘enable default document’ and change it to ‘index.html’     -   Right click on Default FTP Web Site and under Properties change         these settings:         Home Directory Tab

-   Change local path to desired location (C:\data\ftproot)     FTP Site Tab

-   Check ‘enable logging’ and under properties change the log file     directory (C:\data\iislogs)

-   Change description name as desired (Service Assurance FTP Site).     -   Right click on Administration Web Site and under Properties         change these settings:         Web Site Tab

-   Check ‘enable logging’ and under properties change the log file     directory (C:\data\iislogs)

-   Change description name as desired (Service Assurance Administration     Web Site).     -   Add a ‘cgi-bin’ folder into the directory where your http pages         are located

Go into the Microsoft Management Console and right click on the cgi-bin folder and go into Properties.

Under the Directory Tab change the permissions to ‘execute’.

SPSS Documentation

Set Up Instructions

Installing SPSS 8.0

-   -   Follow the setup instructions until you can decide what type of         installation you would like. Choose Custom and select all         options.     -   When you encounter the Personal Installation choice . . . choose         it.     -   When prompted to install Adobe Acrobat 3.0, choose yes and         follow the installation instructions. This will be helpful to         view the online tutorials.         Installing ODBC 3.5 SDK     -   Go to the http://www.microsofl.com/data/odbc/download.htm         website to download the ODBC 3.5 Software Development Kit (SDK)         for Intel. Select ‘Download the ODBC 3.5 SDK for Intel now’         button. Save it to disk when prompted and follow instructions to         download the application.     -   Go into Windows NT Explorer to find the file (ODBC35IN.exe) that         you just saved to disk. Execute it. After done generating your         files, find the setup.exe icon. Click on setup.exe to finish the         installation process. Choose all options for custom installation         choices.         Downloading SPSS 8.0.1 Update Patch     -   Open http://www.spss.com/tech/patches/SP-061198.htm.     -   Select 801us.exe (US version).     -   Save it to disk.     -   Find the downloaded files on your disk and open 801us.exe, click         Yes, and then click on Upgrade SPSS 8.0.     -   Follow the upgrade instructions.         Associating a DSN Name With an ODBC Source     -   Open the 32-bit ODBC Administrator.     -   Programs>Odbc>32-bit ODBC Administrator     -   Add a new user data source under the user DSN tab by clicking         Add.     -   Select a driver for which you want to set up a data source for.     -   (In this case—Microsoft ODBC for Dbse)     -   Click Finish.     -   Enter the Data Source Name. (make up any name)     -   Enter the Description. (can be same as Data Source Name)     -   Enter your User name.     -   Enter the Server. (In this case—IPSA01)     -   Once this information is entered you will be brought back to the         ODBC Data Source Administrator. Click OK.         Adding a Database Alias     -   Open the SQL Net Easy Configuration.     -   Programs>Dbse for Windows NT>SQL Net Easy Configuration     -   Click on Add Database Alias and then OK.     -   Enter the alias name (In this example: IPSA01)     -   Choose the network protocol to be used when you connect to a         remote database     -   (In this case it is TCP/IP) then click OK.     -   Enter the TCP/IP host name (ucmmdb02) and the database instance         of the particular database you want to access. (In this example:         IPSA01)     -   Confirm that you want to add this Database Alias by Clicking         Yes.     -   This will bring you back to the SQL Net Easy Configuration where         you can just click Cancel to exit.         Checking The Alias Setup     -   Find your dbse home (Dbsnt) and open tnsnames.ora through this         path: C:/Dbsnt/Network/Admin/tnsnames.ora. This is a SQL Net         Configuration file which will have the names of the aliases that         are set up. The one you just added will most likely be found at         the end of the file.         Getting Started in SPSS         SPSS Database Capture Wizard     -   In SPSS Data Editor go to Edit>Database Capture>New Query to         open the ODBC Wizard.     -   Choose data source to retrieve data and click Next.     -   Drag table onto right box to see fields and click Next. (Can         also select a subset of fields here)     -   Limit Retrieved Cases page, click Next. (Can select a subset of         cases based on conditional expressions in this dialog box)     -   Define Variables page, click Next. (Can specify more user         friendly variable names here)     -   Results page. Change column names into SPSS Syntax to desired         names. The names to use are located by opening SQL+ and on the         command line typing the table name. i.e.>describe spss_(—)test

EXAMPLE

-   GET CAPTURE ODBC/CONNECT=‘DSN=MSDN: -   dbse;UID=solomoj;PWD=solomoj;SERVER=IPSA01;’/SELECT -   “T0”.“MON_(—)DT” AS “MON_(—)DT”, “T0”.“SYSTEM_(—)NM” AS     “SYSTEM_(—)N”, -   “T0”.“FILE_(—)READ_(—)OPS_(—)AMT” AS “FILE_(—)REA”, -   “T0”.“FILE_(—)WRITE_(—)OPS_(—)AMT” AS “FILE_(—)WRI”, -   “T0”.“FILE_(—)CONTROL_(—)OPS_(—)AMT” AS “FILE_(—)CON”, -   “T0”.“FILE_(—)READ_(—)BYTES_(—)AMT” AS “FILE_(—)REA”, -   “T0”.“FILE_(—)WRITE_(—)BYTES_(—)AMT” AS “FILE_(—)WRI”, -   “T0”.“FILE_(—)CNTRL_(—)BYTES_(—)AMT” AS “FILE_(—)CNT” -   FROM “SPSS_(—)TEST” “T0”.

“T0”.“FILE_(—)READ_(—)OPS_(—)AMT” AS “FILE_(—)REA” //This displays the long column name and associates it with the short column name (8 chars). There is a comma and TWO spaces between items in the list. The ‘0’ in “T0” is a zero, not the letter O.

Click on “paste it into syntax editor” button.

Save query to file with a .spq extension and click Finish.

This should bring you to the syntax editor which should look something like this:

-   GET CAPTURE ODBC/CONNECT=‘DSN=MSDN:’+ -   ‘dbse;UID=solomoj;PWD=solomoj;SERVER=IPSA01;’/ -   SELECT “T0”.“MON_(—)DT” AS “MON_(—)DT”, -   “T0”.“SYSTEM_(—)NM” AS “SYSTEM_(—)N”,     “T0”.“FILE_(—)READ\_(—)OPS_(—)AMT” -   AS “FILE_(—)REA”, “T0”.“FILE_(—)WRITE_(—)OPS_(—)AMT” AS     “FILE_(—)WRI”, -   “T0”.“FILE_(—)CONTROL OPS_(—)AMT” AS “FILE_(—)CON”, -   “T0”.“FILE_(—)READ_(—)BYTES_(—)AMT” -   AS “FILE_(—)RBY”, “T0”.“FILE_(—)WRITE_(—)BYTES_(—)AMT” AS     “FILE_(—)WBY” -   “T0”.“FILE_(—)CNTRL_(—)BYTES_(—)AMT” AS “FILE_(—)CNT” -   FROM “SPSS_(—)TEST” “T0”.     Execute. -   VARIABLE LABELS MON_(—)DT “MON_(—)DT” SYSTEM_(—)N “SYSTEM_(—)NM” -   FILE_(—)WRI “FILE_(—)WRITE_(—)OPS_(—)AMT” FILE_(—)CON     “FILE_(—)CONTROL_(—)OPS_(—)AMT” -   FILE_(—)RBY “FILE_(—)READ_(—)BYTES_(—)AMT” FILE_(—)WBY     “FILE_(—)WRITE_(—)BYTES_(—)AMT” -   FILE\-CNT “FILE_(—)CNTRL_(—)BYTES_(—)AMT”.

(Some syntax tips: In the select area, there is a comma and two spaces separating names. The ‘0’ in “T0” is a zero, not the letter ‘O’. In the variable labels, the short name (8 chars) is listed first with the long name in quotation marks, all separated by one space. The final name ends with one space and a period.)

Save the syntax file. It will have a .SPS extension.

Go to Run>All to execute the script. All warnings and errors will pop up in an output window for you to view. Otherwise the table will be shown in the SPSS Data Editor window with the correct column names and data.

Features of SPSS

Data Editor:

-   -   Displays contents of the working data file     -   Each row is a single case or observation     -   Each column is a single variable     -   Can enter and edit data in this editor     -   Unable to perform calculations or enter formulas here         Viewer Window:     -   Displays tables, statistics and charts     -   Opens automatically when you run a command that produces output     -   The left pane contains the outline view     -   The right pane contains statistical tables, charts and text         outputs     -   Click on any item in the outline to go directly to the         corresponding table or chart     -   The open book icon indicates the item is currently visible in         the right pane. Double click on the icon to hide the information         (closed book icon will appear)     -   Change chart positions by highlighting the information and         dragging it to desired location in the outline         Tool Bars:     -   Both toolbars on the data editor and viewer window can be used     -   Can be moved by clicking on the tool bar (not on a button) and         dragging it         Dialog Boxes:     -   Used to display information on variables     -   Click left mouse button on variable name, click right mouse         button anywhere on the list and select ‘Variable Information’         from the pop-up menu     -   Icons next to variable names describe the variable type: Numeric         variables (# icon), Short string variables—8 characters or less         (‘A’ icon with a (<) less than symbol), and Long string         variables—greater than 8 characters (‘A’ icon with a (>) greater         than symbol)         Interactive Chart Dialog Boxes:     -   Three variable types:

-   1. Categorical (red, blue, and yellow icon)

-   2. Scale (yellow ruler icon)

-   3. Built-in (white ruler with a yellow circle)

Entering and Manipulating Data

Numeric:

-   -   Select cell and enter numeric number. It will then appear in the         cell editor.     -   Press Enter to record the data.     -   If the variable hasn't been named, a unique variable name will         be assigned to it.         Non-numeric:     -   Define the variable by double-clicking on the variable name or         top of the column. This can also be done by selecting         Data>Define Variable in the menu bar.     -   Click on Type in the dialog box.     -   Select the data type, click Continue, and then click OK.         Defining Data:

You can define descriptive values for data values to be used in statistical reports and charts, i.e. one can associate the number 1 with ‘male’ and number 2 with ‘female’.

-   -   Open Data>Define Variable and click on Labels in the dialog box.     -   Enter the data value and label.     -   Click Add and then click Continue.         Showing Value Labels:     -   Open View>Value Labels or Ctrl-click on the cell you want to         enter data into.     -   Double click on the value you would like to add.     -   The value will be entered and the value label displayed in the         cell.         Reading ASCII Text Data Files:     -   Open File>Read Ascii Data>(Fixed Columns or Freefield)         -   1. Fixed format—each variable is in the same column location             for each case.         -   2. Freefield—only the order of the variables is important.     -   Click Browse to select data file.     -   Enter a name for each variable     -   Enter a starting and ending column location for the variable.         (data values can appear anywhere within the column range)     -   If there is more than one line of data for each case, enter the         record number for each variable. (this indicates the line number         within the case)     -   Select a data type and click Add.         Transforming Data Files:     -   Open Transform>Compute.     -   Enter name of the target variable.     -   Enter numeric expression         -   1. You can paste variables from the source list         -   2. Numbers and operators are on the calculator pad         -   3. Functions are located in the function list     -   The new variable will be added to the end of the data file.         Making Reports in SPSS (Charts)         Creating a Chart:     -   Select Graphs>(type of chart).     -   Choose an icon for specified type of chart you want and indicate         how your data are organized.     -   Click Define.     -   Follow the define dialog box and click OK.         Editing Charts:     -   Double click on the chart in the viewer. This will display the         chart in a chart window.     -   You can edit by using the menu, toolbar, or double-clicking on         the object you want to edit.         -   1. In the menu select Chart>(choose selection) and edit in             the resulting dialog box.         -   2. Click on chart element, click on a tool in the toolbar,             and follow the dialog box that appears.         -   3. Double click on an object to edit in the chart window and             an appropriate dialog box will appear.             Changing scale axis     -   Double click on the axis.     -   In the dialog box, change the range or values on the axis         accordingly.         Changing color     -   Click on the chart element you want to change.     -   Click on color tool in the tool bar (crayon shape).     -   Select a color and then click Apply.         Swapping Chart Axes     -   Click on swap axes tool in the toolbar.         Change Chart Types     -   Open Gallery>(new chart type) in the chart editor.     -   Select type of chart in the dialog box that appears and click         Replace.     -   Select variables for the new chart and click OK.         Interactive Graphs:     -   In the SPSS data editor open Graphs>Interactive>(Choose method)         to create a report on the data entered in your table.     -   Drag variable names into the axes boxes to compare them and         click OK.     -   The SPSS Viewer will appear with the graph. Double click on the         graph to activate it so you able to interact with the data.     -   Several options will appear as buttons around the graph.         Activate them by clicking on the appropriate button.     -   Assign graph variables to axes and legends with the first button         in the corner depicted with a ruler and other items. This can         assign variables to various roles in a chart. Variables can be         assigned to axes, color, style, and size. You can also change         the graph into a 2D or 3D coordinate system in this window. If a         3D coordinate system is chosen a rotation device window will         appear to rotate the graph to show the information better.     -   The next button to the right is a pull down menu that will         change the graph type.     -   The Display Chart Manager is the next one over. It gives easy         access to all of the separate components that make up the chart.         You can select the item and then edit, delete, or hide them.     -   There are two buttons that changes the axes orientation to         horizontal or vertical.     -   On the vertical button row you are able to change colors, lines,         and fills, as well as symbol style, symbol size, line style,         line weight, and connector style.         Making Reports in SPSS (Tables)     -   To run a procedure, open from the SPSS data editor         Statistics>(Select a Category)>(Select a Procedure). i.e.         Statistics>Summarize>Frequencies.     -   Select variables from source list and use the arrow button to         move variables to target lists. Click OK.     -   The results will be displayed in the Viewer.         Pivot Tables:     -   Double click on the table in the viewer.     -   Select pivoting trays from pivot menu. Pivot>Pivoting Trays.     -   Click and drag pivot icon from one dimension (column, row,         layer) to another to alter table.     -   You can also change order of elements in the table by moving the         pivot icons around and swapping them.         Editing Pivot Tables:         Changing Font or Alignment     -   Double click on the table.     -   Click on table cell or label to modify.     -   Use the formatting toolbar to change desired attributes.         Modifying Text     -   Double click on the text to modify.     -   Edit as you would in a text editor or word processing program.     -   (if you change numeric values. . . the row and column totals         will not be recalculated)         Hiding Rows and Columns     -   Double click on the table.     -   Ctrl-Alt-Click on the label of the row or column to hide.     -   Click the right mouse button and select Hide Category from the         pop-up window.     -   View>Show All will bring the information back into view.         Changing Data Display Formats     -   Select the column by doing a Ctrl-Alt-Click on the column label.     -   Click the right mouse button on the label of the column and         select Cell Properties from the pop-up menu.     -   Change desired display format. i.e. Change decimals to 0.     -   Click OK.         Customizing Tables     -   Double click on table.     -   Open Format>TableLooks.     -   Select a table style.     -   To create a new table style, choose a table format close to what         you want.     -   Click Edit Look button.     -   Edit the attributes you wish from the dialog box and click OK.     -   Click Save As in TableLooks dialog box to save the new table         style.         Pasting Results as Metafiles     -   Select the item either in the output or contents pane.     -   Select Edit>Copy.     -   In the other application you are pasting into select Edit>Paste         Special.     -   Select Picture from the dialog box.         Pasting Results as Unformatted Text     -   Select the item either in the output or contents pane.     -   Select Edit>Copy.     -   In the other application you are pasting into select Edit>Paste         Special.     -   Select Unformatted text from the dialog box.         Layering a Table:     -   To collapse a large 2D table into 3D layers double click on the         table.     -   Select pivoting trays from pivot menu. Pivot>Pivoting Trays.     -   Drag any pivot icon from the row or column tray into the layer         tray.     -   To view the different layers on the table you can either click         the arrows on the layer pivot icon in the pivot tray or select a         category from the drop down list on the table.         Export Format and Chart Templates     -   Export format controls the export format for output documents.         Charts should be exported in a suitable format for inclusion in         HTML documents. (i.e. JPEG)     -   Pivot tables can be exported as HTML tables, as tab separated         text, or as space separated text.     -   Text output can be exported as preformatted HTML or space         separated text.     -   Exported chart names are based on the production job filename, a         sequential number, and extension of the selected format. (i.e.         PROBJOBI.WMF)

Use File>Export to change text and chart export options.

When in the Export Output dialog box, click on the Options button. Then in the JPG Output Filter Setup dialog box, click on the Chart Options button. Some settings to make that will enhance the HTNL output are:

-   -   1. Resloution=200×200 pels/in.     -   2. Size=3×3 in.     -   3. Quality=100%     -   4. Operation=Progressive     -   5. Format=ycc color     -   To change production options from production facility menu         select Edit>Options after double-clicking on the chart to         activate it. Under the Chart tab, change the Aspect Ratio to         1.25 and under the Viewer tab change the Text Output Font to 12         pt. Other options are also available to change in this dialog         box.         Viewer Options:

Viewer output display options affect only new output produced after you change the settings. Output already displayed in the Viewer is not affected by changes in these settings.

Initial Output State controls which items are automatically displayed or hidden each time you run a procedure and how items are initially aligned. You can control the display of the following items: log, warnings, notes, titles, pivot tables, charts, and text output (output not displayed in pivot tables). You can also turn the display of commands in the log on or off. You can copy command syntax from the log and save it in a syntax file for use with the automated production facility.

To change the viewer output display options:

-   -   Open Edit>Options.     -   Select the Viewer tab.     -   In the initial output state box, make sure that the log,         warnings, and notes are all bulleted as ‘contents initially         hidden’.     -   Click Apply.     -   In the Draft Viewer tab of that same dialog box, make sure that         in the ‘display output items’ box, log, commands in log,         warnings, and notes are not selected (checked).     -   Click Apply.

All output items are displayed left-aligned in the Viewer. Only the alignment of printed output is affected by the justification settings. Centered and right-aligned items are identified by a small symbol above and to the left of the item.

All of these viewer options that you change will appear in the output window. If you export the object into HTML using the production facility, everything will be displayed regardless of what you changed in the viewer options.

Chart Templates:

You can apply many of the attributes and text elements from one chart to another. This allows you to modify one chart, save that chart, and then use it as a template to create a number of other similar charts. For example, if the old chart is a clustered bar chart with bar colors modified to yellow and green and the new chart is a multiple line chart, the lines will be yellow and green.

To create a new template:

-   -   Create a chart as detailed earlier.     -   Edit the chart to contain the attributes you want to save in a         template (text format, color/fills, titles, subtitles, etc.) by         selecting it and using the chart window.     -   Open File>Save Chart Template from the chart window menu.         (double-click on the chart to display the chart window)         To apply a template to a chart already in a chart window:     -   Select the chart by double-clicking on it to bring up the chart         window.     -   Open Format>Apply Chart Template.     -   Select a file to use as a template in the dialog box that         appears.         To apply a template using command syntax:

By applying a chart template using command syntax, you can modify your chart to the set attributes in the template very quickly and easily. This would be helpful when running syntax files to produce customized output in the production facility as well.

-   -   Create or locate a chart template.     -   You will need to preserve the default option settings that the         template will be modifying. To do so, add the PRESERVE command         before applying the template.     -   To set the template, use the command SET CTEMPLATE=“filename”.         Where file name is the absolute path of the chart template you         want to apply.     -   Next, add syntax for the chart(s) you wish to include.     -   Use the RESTORE command to reset the option settings to what was         saved when you issued the PRESERVE command earlier.

EXAMPLE SYNTAX USING CTEMPLATE

GET CAPTURE ODBC /CONNECT=‘DSN=MSDN:’+ ‘dbse;UID=solomoj;PWD=solomoj;SERVER=IPSA01;’ /SELECT “T0”.“MON_(—)DT” AS “MON DT”, “T0”.“SYSTEM_(—)NM” AS “SYSTEM_(—)N”, “T0”. “FILE_(—)READ_(—)OPS_(—)AMT” AS “FILE_(—)REA”, “T0”. “FILE_(—)WRITE_(—)OPS_(—)AMT” AS “FILE_(—)WRI”, “T0”.“FILE_(—)CONTROL_(—)OPS_(—)AMT” AS “FILE_(—)CON”, “T0”.“FILE_(—)READ_(—)BYTES_(—)AMT” AS “FILE_(—)RBY”, “T0”.“FILE_(—)WRITE_(—)BYTES_(—)AMT” AS “FILE_(—)WBY”, “T0”.“FILE_(—)CNTRL_(—)BYTES_(—)AMT” AS “FILE_(—)CNT” FROM “SPSS_(—)TEST” “T0”. Execute. VARIABLE LABELS MON_(—)DT “MON_(—)DT” SYSTEM_(—)N “SYSTEM_(—)NM” FILE_(—)WRI “FILE_(—)WRITE_(—)OPS_(—)AMT” FILE_(—)CON “FILE_(—)CONTROL_(—)OPS_(—)AMT” FILE_(—)RBY “FILE_(—)READ_(—)BYTES_(—)AMT” FILE_(—)WBY “FILE_(—)WRITE_(—)BYTES_(—)AMT” FILE_(—)CNT “FILE_(—)CNTRL_(—)BYTES_(—)AMT. PRESERVE. SET CTEMPLATE = “c:\spss\test2.sct”. *Sequence Charts. TSPLOT VARIABLES= file_(—)rby /ID= mon_(—)dt /NOLOG /FORMAT NOFILL NOREFERENCE. RESTORE. Command Syntax

A syntax file is a text file that contains commands. You can just type in the commands, but the software can help you build your syntax file by:

-   -   Pasting command syntax from dialog boxes     -   Copying syntax from the output log     -   Copying syntax from the journal file

Rules When Editing and Writing Command Syntax

Keep in mind the following simple rules when editing and writing command syntax:

-   -   Each command must begin on a new line and end with a period (.).

Most subcommands are separated by slashes (/). The slash before the first subcommand on a command is usually optional.

-   -   Variable names must be spelled out fully.     -   Text included within apostrophes or quotation marks must be         contained on a single line.     -   Each line of command syntax cannot exceed 80 characters.     -   A period (.) must be used to indicate decimals, regardless of         your Windows regional settings.     -   Variable names ending in a period can cause errors in commands         created by the dialog boxes. You cannot create such variable         names in the dialog boxes, and you should generally avoid them.

Command syntax is case insensitive, and three-letter abbreviations can be used for many command specifications. You can use as many lines as you want to specify a single command. You can add space or break lines at almost any point where a single blank is allowed, such as around slashes, parentheses, arithmetic operators, or between variable names. For example,

′Inputs: The type of item to delete (intDeleteType) ′Return Values: None ′declare SPSS object variables that will be used in this procedure Dim objOutputDoc As ISpssOutputDoc Set objOutputDoc = objSpssApp.GetDesignatedOutputDoc ′Clear all selections so that some items aren't inadvertently deleted objOutputDoc.ClearSelection ′determine what type the parameter refers to ′then select all of the items of that type Select Case intDeleteType Case SPSSChart objOutputDoc.SelectAllCharts Case SPSSLog objOutputDoc.SelectAllLogs Case SPSSNote objOutputDoc.SelectAllNotes Case SPSSPivot FREQUENCIES VARIABLES=JOBCAT GENDER /PERCENTILES=25 50 75 /BARCHART. and freq var=jobcat gender /percent=25 50 75 /bar.

-   -   are both acceptable alternatives that generate the same results.

Creating Command Syntax from Dialog Boxes

The easiest way to build a command syntax file is to make selections in dialog boxes and paste the syntax for the selections into a syntax window. Then in the syntax window, you can run the pasted syntax, edit it, and save it in a syntax file.

-   -   Open the dialog box and make selections. (i.e. when making a         graph or table)     -   Click on the Paste button and the command syntax will be pasted         directly into the designated syntax window, or if a syntax         window isn't open it will create a new syntax window         automatically to paste your commands into.

Using Command Syntax from the Output Log

You can copy command syntax from the log that appears in the Viewer.

-   -   Open Edit>Options.     -   Select the Viewer tab and select ‘Display commands in the log’.         (As you run analyses, the commands for your dialog box         selections are recorded in the log)     -   Open a syntax file by File>New>Syntax.     -   In the Output Viewer, double-click on the log item to activate         it. (If it is hidden, click on the closed book icon of the log         to display it)     -   Highlight the syntax you want to copy.     -   Edit>Copy.     -   In the syntax window choose Edit>Paste.

Using Command Syntax from the Journal File

All commands executed during a session are recorded in ajournal file named spss.jnl. You can edit the journal file and save it as a syntax file that you can use to repeat a previously run analysis, or you can run it in an automated job with the production facility.

-   -   Open File>Open.     -   Locate the journal file spss.jnl (by default located in the temp         directory)     -   Edit the file to remove any error messages or warnings,         indicated by the > sign.

Save the edited journal file using a different filename (with the extension .sps for a syntax file).

Defining the Working Data File

The file that appears in the Data Editor window is the working data file. When you open a data file, it becomes the working data file. All analysis is performed on the working data file, and most analytical commands are unavailable unless you have a working data file.

The working data file is the data file you build to use in the current session. You can retrieve an SPSS-format data file using GET, which in effect makes a working copy of the specified file. The working data file is not created until SPSS encounters a command (usually a procedure) that causes it to read the data. At this point, SPSS executes all of the preceding data definition and transformation commands and the command that causes the data to be read. The working data file is then available for further transformations and procedures, and it remains available until replaced by a new working data file or until the end of the session.

Any transformations and statistical analyses you request during a session are performed on the working data file. Transformations performed during a session apply to the working data file only. Changes to the file are lost if the working data file is erased or replaced before you have saved it.

EXAMPLE SYNTAX DEFINING THE WORKING DATA FILE

GET CAPTURE ODBC /CONNECT=‘DSN=MSDN:’+ ‘dbse;UID=solomoj;PWD=solomoj;SERVER=IPSA01;’ /SELECT “T0”.“MON_(—)DT” AS “MON_(—)DT”, “T0”.“SYSTEM_(—)NM” AS “SYSTEM_(—)N”, “T0”.“FILE_(—)READ_(—)OPS_(—)AMT” AS “FILE_(—)REA”, “T0”.“FILE_(—)WRITE_(—)OPS_(—)AMT” AS “FILE WRI”, “T0”.“FILE_(—)CONTROL_(—)OPS_(—)AMT” AS “FILE_(—)CON”, “T0”.“FILE_(—)READ_(—)BYTES_(—)AMT” AS “FILE_(—)RBY”, “T0”.“FILE_(—)WRITE_(—)BYTES_(—)AMT” AS “FILE_(—)WBY”, “T0”.“FILE_(—)CNTRL_(—)BYTES_(—)AMT” AS “FILE_(—)CNT” FROM “SPSS_(—)TEST” “T0”. Execute. VARIABLE LABELS MON_(—)DT “MON_(—)DT” SYSTEM_(—)N “SYSTEM_(—)NM” FILE_(—)WRI “FILE_(—)WRITE_(—)OPS_(—)AMT” FILE_(—)CON “FILE_(—)CONTROL_(—)OPS_(—)AMT” FILE_(—)RBY “FILE_(—)READ_(—)BYTES_(—)AMT” FILE WBY “FILE_(—)WRITE_(—)BYTES_(—)AMT” FILE_(—)CNT “FILE_(—)CNTRL_(—)BYTES_(—)AMT”. FREQUENCIES VARIABLES=file_(—)wri file_(—)rby file_(—)cnt /ORDER ANALYSIS.

(***This includes the GET CAPTURE command that retrieves data from a database and converts them to a format that can be used by program procedures. GET CAPTURE retrieves data and data information and builds a working data file for the current session.)

CONNECT subcommand is required to access any database that has an installed Microsoft ODBC driver. You cannot specify the connection string directly in the syntax window, but you can paste it with the rest of the command from the Results dialog box, which is the last of the series of dialog boxes opened with the Database Capture command from the File menu.

SELECT specifies any SQL select statement accepted by the database you access.

Running Command Syntax

-   -   Highlight the commands you want to run in the syntax window.     -   Click the Run button (the right-pointing triangle) on the syntax         window toolbar. OR     -   Open Run>(select command).     -   1. All—runs all commands in the syntax window     -   2. Selection—runs the currently selected commands     -   3. Current—runs the command where the cursor is currently         located     -   4. To End—runs all commands from the current cursor location to         the end of the file         The Scripting Facility

The scripting facility allows you to automate tasks, including:

-   1. Automatically customize output in the Viewer. -   2. Open and save data files. -   3. Display and manipulate dialog boxes. -   4. Run data transformations and statistical procedures using command     syntax. -   5. Export chars as graphic files in a number of formats.     Scripts

Many scripts are included with the software. You can use these scripts as they are or you can customize them to your needs. If you want to create your own scripts, you can begin by choosing from a number of starter scripts.

To Create a Script:

-   -   Open New>Script.     -   Select a starter script if you want to begin with one.     -   If you do not want to use a starter script, click Cancel.         To Edit a Script:     -   Open File>Open.     -   Look in j:\myproducts\spss\scripts or         j:\myproducts\spss\scripts\starter to find a SPSS Script (*.sbs)         to open.     -   Modify the script. (The starter scripts are helpful in that they         are commented with hints on how to customize the script to your         particular needs)     -   Save your new script.         To Run a Script:     -   To apply a script to a table, click on the table to select it in         the Output Viewer window.     -   Open Utilities>Run Script.     -   Select the script from the dialog box you wish to execute and         click Run.

EXAMPLE SCRIPT

-   File Name: CleanOutput.sbs -   Begin Description -   End Description -   SPSS Autoscript file -   Do not edit the text between HeaderBegin and HeaderEnd -   HeaderBegin -   HeaderEnd

************************************************************

Use this Starter Script if you want to remove items from the Navigator.

This Starter Script can be modified to delete items based on their type (e.g., Note, Warning, Log, Chart, Pivot, Table, Text, Title, or All)

This is a modified version of the starter script (Delete Navigator 'Items.sbs located in the Starter folder) that will delete the Log, Notes, Text and Warnings from the Navigator for better output when making HTML output items.

′********************************************************** Option Explicit Public Const ALL_(—)ITEMS As Integer = 10 Sub Main Declare variables that will be used in this procedure Dim intTypeToDelete As Integer Dim intTypeToErase As Integer Dim intTypeToDiscard As Integer Dim intTypeToEliminate As Integer Dim strSearchForLabel As String ′****Modification to original starter script**** ′because only one item is allowed to be deleted at a time due to only ′one variable declared (intTypeToDelete), by creating separate ′variable names for each of the items you wish to delete, you can call ′the function several times With the various variables and delete ′multiple items within this script. ′*********************************************** intTypeToDelete = SPSSLog intTypeToErase = SPSSNote intTypeToDiscard = SPSSText intTypeToEliminate = SPSSWarning ′***Call the DeleteAllByType function for each variable you produced***** Call DeleteAllByType(intTypeToDiscard) Call DeleteAllByType(intTypeToEliminate) Call DeleteAllByType(intTypeToDelete) Call DeleteAllByTpe(intTypeToErase) End Sub Sub DeleteAllByType(intDeleteType As Integer) ′Purpose: Deletes all items that are a specific type, regardless of whether ′they are selected. ′Assumptions: The items are in the designated output document ′Effects: Deletes all the items that are a specific type (e.g., Note, ′Warning) objOutputDoc.SelectAllTables Case SPSSText objOutputDoc.SelectAllText Case SPSSTitle objOutputDoc.SelectAllTitles Case SPSSWarning objOutputDoc.SelectAllWarnings Case ALL_(—)ITEMS objOutputDoc.SelectAll End Select ′Now only those items that should be deleted are selected, so delete them objOutputDoc.Remove End Sub Including Scripts in Syntax Documents:

To have a script run within a syntax document, use the SCRIPT command.

The syntax is: SCRIPT ‘filename’ [(quoted string)]

The basic specification is keyword SCRIPT with a filename. The filename is required. The optional quoted string, enclosed in parentheses, can be passed to the script.

Example Syntax: GET CAPTURE ODBC /CONNECT=‘DSN=MSDN:’+ dbse;UID=solomoj;PWD=solomoj;SERVER=ISPAO 1;’ /SELECT “T0”.“MON_(—)DT” AS “MON_(—)DT”, “T0”.“SYSTEM_(—)NM” AS “SYSTEM N”, “T0”.“FILE_(—)READ_(—)OPS_(—)AMT” AS “FILE_(—)REA”, “T0”.“FILE_(—)WRITE_(—)OPS_(—)AMT” AS “FILE_(—)WRI”, “T0”.“FILE_(—)CONTROL_(—)OPS_(—)AMT” AS “FILE_(—)CON”, “T0”.“FILE_(—)READ_(—)BYTES_(—)AMT” AS “FILE_(—)RBY”, “T0”.“FILE_(—)WRITE_(—)BYTES_(—)AMT” AS “FILE_(—)WBY”, “T0”.“FILE_(—)CNTRL_(—)BYTES_(—)AMT” AS “FILE_(—)CNT” FROM “SPSS_(—)TEST” “T0”. Execute. VARIABLE LABELS MON_(—)DT “MON_(—)DT” SYSTEM_(—)N “SYSTEM_(—)NM” FILE_(—)WRI “FILE_(—)WRITE_(—)OPS_(—)AMT” FILE_(—)CON “FILE_(—)CONTROL_(—)OPS_(—)AMT” FILE_(—)RBY “FILE_(—)READ_(—)BYTES_(—)AMT” FILE_(—)WBY “FILE_(—)WRITE_(—)BYTES_(—)AMT” FILE_(—)CNT “FILE_(—)CNTRL_(—)BYTES_(—)AMT”. FREQUENCIES VARIABLES=file_(—)con file_(—)wby file_(—)wri /ORDER ANALYSIS. SCRIPT ‘j :\myproducts\spss\scripts\cleanoutput.sbs’.

(This particular SCRIPT command will call the cleanoutput.sbs script which is coded to remove all unwanted items from the exported output. It is put at the end of the code so it can remove the items generated by the output of the FREQUENCIES command.)

Autoscripts

Autoscripts run automatically when triggered by the creation of a specific piece of output by a given procedure. For example, an autoscript can automatically make the ‘Totals’ row or column in a table into bold typeface and highlighted in the color blue each time a frequency table is created.

Creating Autoscripts:

-   -   You create an autoscript by starting with the output object that         you want to serve as the trigger. For example, to create an         autoscript that runs whenever a frequency table is produced,         create a frequency table in the usual manner.     -   Single-click the table in the Output Viewer to select it.     -   Right-click and select Create/Edit Autoscript or use         Utilities>Create/Edit Autoscript from the menu.     -   (If no autoscript exists for the selected object, a new         autoscript is created. If an autoscript already exists, the         existing script is displayed).     -   Type in code.     -   Open Edit>Options to enable or disable the autoscript under the         Script tab.         The Autoscript File

All autoscripts are saved in a single file. Any new autoscripts you create are also added to this file. The name of the current autoscript file is displayed on the Scripts tab in the Options dialog box. The Options dialog box also displays all of the autoscripts in the currently selected autoscript file, allowing you to enable and disable individual scripts. The default autoscript file is autscript.sbs. You can specify a different autoscript file, but only one can be active at a time.

The Production Facility

The production facility helps run programs in an automated mode. It runs unattended and terminates after executing the last command, so you can run other tasks while it runs. This production mode is useful if you often run the same set of analyses like weekly reports.

Running an Automated Production Job

-   -   Create a command syntax file (in the syntax editor) which is a         simple text file containing command syntax.     -   Select from the Start menu, Start>Programs>SPSS 8.0 Production         Facility.     -   Click Add to select the command syntax files you want to include         in the productionjob.     -   After you create syntax files and include them in a production         job, you can view and edit them from the production facility.     -   Save the production job and click the Run button on the tool bar         (button with the right arrow) or select Run>Production Job from         the menu bar to run the production job. Each production run         produces an output file with the same name as the production job         and the extension .SPO. i.e. the production job file:         PRODJOB.SPP would become PRODJOB.SPO.     -   You can then automatically print the results at the end of the         production run, specify the location for the production results,         export output and charts in external formats, and create user         prompts that enable you to use the same syntax files for         multiple data files and analyses.

Production Facility syntax files and INCLUDE Files

For command files run via the Production Facility or the INCLUDE command, the syntax rules are slightly different:

-   -   Each command must begin in the first column of a new line     -   Continuation lines must be indented at least one space     -   The period at the end of the command is optional

If you generate command syntax by pasting dialog box choices into a syntax window, the format of the commands is suitable for any mode of operation.

Running Production Jobs From a Command Line

Command line switches enable you to schedule production jobs to run at certain times with scheduling utilities like the one available in Microsoft Plus!. You can run production jobs from a command line with the following switches:

-   -   -r Runs the production job. If the production job has any user         prompts, you must supply the requested information before the         production job will run.     -   -s Runs the production job and suppresses any user prompts or         alerts. The default user prompt values are used automatically.

To get to the command line . . . just open Start>Run. The command line will then appear. Another option is opening up the DOS shell and typing the command in there at the prompt. You should provide the full path for both the production facility (SPSSPROD.EXE) and the production job. Both should be enclosed in quotes with the desired switch last.

 “c:\program files\spss\spssprod.exe” “c:\spss\datajobs\prodjob.spp”-s

Changing HTML Output Format

To change what is displayed in the HTML document when it is exported from the automated production facility, several steps need to be followed.

-   -   Write a script that executes the desired commands. Open         J:\myproducts\spss\scripts\starter\delete navigator items.sbs         and modify the script to your desired specifications using the         comments in the code to help you.     -   This code only allows you to delete one feature at a time (log,         notes, charts, pivot, text, title, warnings, or all items). If         you want to remove the log AND notes feature you can:         -   1. Write two different scripts, each deleting one feature             and include them both in the syntax file using two SCRIPT             commands.         -   2. Modify the one script to accommodate removing both             features by redefining one of the variables and calling the             remove function twice (this is done so you don't overwrite             the first value). In the second function, use the new             variable name as the parameter.             -   i.e.             -   'define variables as so . . .                 -   intTypeToDelete=SPSSLog                 -   intTypeToErase=SPSSNote             -   'then call the functions . . .                 -   Call DeleteAllByType(intTypeToDelete)                 -   Call DeleteAllByType(intTypeToErase)     -   Save the script (or scripts).     -   Include the script (or scripts) in the syntax document you want         to apply it to by using the SCRIPT command. This will         automatically run the script that you created when the syntax         command is encountered. The effect is the same as opening the         script file in the Script Editor and mming it from there. The         syntax is SCRIPT ‘filename’.         -   i.e. SCRIPT ‘j:\myproducts\spss\scripts\deletetest.sbs’.

Make sure that this command is located after all of the commands on the working data file. This will ensure that it will run on all of the output you designated.

-   -   Save the syntax file.     -   Open the production facility, add the syntax file you just made,         and follow the steps outlined earlier to complete the automated         production of your new formatted HTML file.

Other starter scripts are available in the J:\myproducts\spss\scripts\starter directory. Each script supplies code for one or more common procedures and is commented with hints on how to customize the script to your particular needs.

AT Command

The AT command schedules commands and programs to run on a computer at a specified time and date. The Schedule service must be running to use the at command. To check this, go into your control panel and open Services. Scroll down to find the scheduler to check its status.

The syntax for the AT command is as follows.

-   -   at [\\computername] [[id] [/delete [/yes]]     -   at [\\computername] time [/interactive] [/every:         -   date[, . . .] |/next:date[, . . .]] “command”

Type these command in the command line found by opening Start>Run, or enter it at the prompt in the DOS shell.

Parameters

none

Used without parameters, at lists scheduled commands.

\\computername

Specifies a remote computer. If this parameter is omitted, the commands are scheduled on the local computer.

id

Is an identification number assigned to a scheduled command.

/delete

Cancels a scheduled command. If id is omitted, all the scheduled commands on the computer are canceled.

/yes

Forces a yes answer to all queries from the system when deleting scheduled events.

time

Specifies the time when command is to run. Time is expressed as hours:minutes in 24-hour notation (00:00 [midnight] through 23:59).

/interactive

Allows the job to interact with the desktop of the user who is logged on at the time the job runs.

/every:date[, . . .]

Runs the command on every specified day(s) of the week or month (for example, every Thursday, or the third day of every month). Specify date as one or more days of the week (M,T,W,Th,F,S,Su) or one or more days of the month (using numbers 1 through 31). Separate multiple date entries with commas. If date is omitted, the current day of the month is assumed.

/next:date[, . . .]

Runs the specified command on the next occurrence of the day (for example, next Thursday). Specify date as one or more days of the week (M,T,W,Th,F,S,Su) or one or more days of the month (using numbers 1 through 31). Separate multiple date entries with commas. If date is omitted, the current day of the month is assumed.

“command”

Is the Windows NT command, program (.EXE or .COM file) or batch program (.BAT or .CMD file) to be run. When the command requires a path as an argument, use the absolute path, that is, the entire pathname beginning with the drive letter. If command is on a remote computer, specify the server and sharename, rather than a remote drive letter. You may use quotation marks around the command, whether you are using at at the command line or in a batch file. If the command includes switches that are used by both the command and at, you must enclose command in quotation marks. If the command is not an executable (.EXE) file, you must precede the command with cmd /c; for example cmd /c dir>c:\test.out.

At-Notes

The AT command requires you be a member of the local Administrator group. Also, the AT command does not automatically load cmd, the command interpreter, before running commands. Unless you are running an executable (.EXE) file, you must explicitly load CMD.EXE at the beginning of the command; for example, cmd /c dir>c:\test.out.

Viewing Scheduled Commands:

The AT command has two displays. When you use at without options, you see a display similar to the following:

STATUS ID Day Time Command Line 0 Each F 04:30 PM net send group leads status due 2 Each M 12:00 AM chkstor > check.fil 3 Each F 11:59 PM backup2.bat

When you include the identification number for the command, the display provides information for a single entry and is similar to the following:

-   Task ID: 0 -   Status: OK -   Schedule: Each F -   Time of Day: 04:30 PM -   Command: net send group leads status due

After you schedule a command with at (especially a command that has option variables), check that the command is entered properly by typing at without options. If the information in the “Command Line” column isn't correct, delete the command and retype it. If it still isn't correct, retype the command with fewer option variables.

Viewing Results:

Commands scheduled with the AT command run as background processes, so no output is displayed on the computer's screen. To redirect output to a file, use the redirection symbol (>). If you redirect output to a file, enclose the name of the command you are scheduling in quotation marks. The current directory for the executing command is the % systemroot % directory.

Changing System Time:

If you change the system time at a computer after scheduling a command to run with at, synchronize the AT scheduler with the revised time by typing at without options.

Storing Commands:

Scheduled commands are stored in the registry, so scheduled tasks are not lost if you have to restart the Schedule service.

Connecting to Network Drives:

Scheduled jobs that access the network should not use redirected drives made by the user. The Schedule service may not be able to access these drives and they may not be present if a different user is logged on at the time the scheduled job runs. Instead, scheduled jobs should use UNC paths. For example,

-   at 1:00 pm my_(—)backup\\server\share -   and not -   at 1:00 pm mybackup x: -   where x: is a connection made by the user.

If you schedule an AT command that uses a drive letter to connect to a shared directory, you should include an AT command to disconnect the drive when you are finished using it. If the drive is not disconnected, the drive letter assigned will not be available or seen at the command prompt.

At

EXAMPLES

-   -   To display a list of commands scheduled on the server MARKETING,         type         -   at \\marketing     -   To learn more about a command with the identification number 3         on the server CORP, type         -   at \\corp 3     -   To schedule a net share command to run on the CORP server at         8:00 A.M., and redirect the listing to the server MAINTENANCE,         shared directory REPORTS, and file CORP.TXT, type         -   at \\corp 08:00 “cmd /c net share             reports=d:\marketing\reports>>\\maintenance\reports\corp.txt”     -   To back up the MARKETING server's hard disk to a tape drive at         midnight every five days, create a batch program (ARCHIVE.CMD)         containing the backup commands. Then schedule the batch program         to run by typing         -   at \\marketing 00:00/every:5,10,15,20,25,30 archive     -   To cancel all commands scheduled on the current server, clear         the at schedule information by typing         -   at/delete

Running a Production Job Using AT

-   -   Go into Services in the Control Panel and highlight the         scheduler.     -   Click on Stop button to interrupt the scheduler.     -   Now double-click on the scheduler to bring up a dialog box.     -   Make sure in the dialog box that appears, that the “Log on as”         is your correct domain and user name (used to log on to NT) and         password. (i.e. CSCOE\solomoj and password: xxxxxx)     -   Click OK.     -   Now restart the scheduler by clicking on the Start button and         then Close the dialog box.

Make a .bat file that contains the command to run the production facility. This command will include the path name to the production facility executable (spssprod.exe)<space> path name to the production job (command.spp)<space> with any switches appended to the end. If any of these commands are located on a different server, use the server and sharename rather than a remote drive letter to specify the path name.

-   -   i.e. \\nsmmt10\solomoj\myproducts\spss\spssprod.exe         c:\spss\command.spp -S         -   where \\nsmmnt10solomoj\myproducts\spss\spssprod.exe is the             path to the production facility     -   c:\spss\command.spp is the path to the production job         -   -s is the switch that runs the production job and suppresses             any user prompts or alerts.

To run the AT command from the DOS command shell, at the prompt type your at command calling the .bat file using the specified parameters as noted earlier.

-   -   at 13:40 “c:\temp\test.bat”

This schedules test.bat to run at 12:40 p.m. on the local computer. To check if it was scheduled correctly, type at (with no parameters) to see a listing of all of the commands scheduled to run, or type at <id>, where ‘id’ is the identification number given to the scheduled command when you entered it. The latter will just give information on the command specified.

To run the AT command from the Winat.exe application, open up the application. From the menu open Edit>Add. In the dialog box that occurs, enter the time, days, and frequency information and type the “c:\temp\test.bat” command into the command line. Click OK and it will appear as a scheduled command.

When the specified time/times occur, the production facility will run the production job and export the output to the directory that is specified in the production job.

HTML Information

Customizing HTML

You can automatically add customized HTML code to documents exported in HTML format, including:

-   -   HTML document titles     -   Document type specification     -   Meta tags and script code (for example, JavaScript)     -   Text displayed before and after exported output

To customize HTML documents, you need to create or modify a text file that contains the custom HTML (htmlfram.txt—located in the directory in which SPSS is installed).

Contents and format of the text file for customized HTML:

The HTML code that you want to add automatically to your HTML documents must be specified in a simple text file that contains six fields, each delimited by two open angle brackets on the preceding line (<<):

-   <<

Text or code that you want to insert at the top of the document before the <HTML> specification (for example, comments that include document type specifications) <<

Text used as the document title (displayed in the title bar) <<

Meta tags or script code (for example, JavaScript code) <<

HTML code that modifies the <BODY> tag (for example, code that specifies background color) <<

Text and/or HTML code that is inserted after the exported output (for example, copyright notice) <<

Text and/or HTM\IL code that is inserted before the exported output (for example, company name, logo, etc.)

Sample Text file for Customized HTML:

<< <!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC “-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN”> << NVI, Inc. << <META NAME=“keywords” CONTENT=“gizmos, gadgets, gimcracks”> << bgcolor=“#FFFFFF” << <H4 align=center>This page made possible by... <br><br> <IMG SRC=“spss2.gif” align=center></H4> << <h2 align=center>NVI Sales</h2> <h3 align=center>Regional Data</h3>

To Use a Different File or Location for Custom HTML Code

If you change the name or location of HTMLFRAM.TXT, you must modify the system registry to use the file in customized HTML output.

-   -   From the Windows Start menu choose Run, type regedit, and click         OK.     -   In the left pane of the Registry Editor, choose:         -   HHKEY_(—)CURRENT_(—)USER             -   Software             -   SPSS                 -   SPSS for Windows 8.0                 -   Spsswin     -   In the right pane, double-click the string HTMLFormatFile.     -   For Value data, enter the full path and name of the text file         containing the custom HTML specifications (for example,         C:\MYFILES\HTMLSTUF.TXT).         Samnple HTML source for customized HTML:

<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC “-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN”> <HTML> <HEAD> <TITLE> NVI Sales, Inc. </TITLE> <META NAME=“keywords” CONTENT=“gizmos, gadgets, gimcracks”> </HEAD> <BODY bgcolor=“#FFFFFF”> <h2 align=center>NVI Sales</h2> <h3 align=center>Regional Data</h3> [Exported output] <H4 align=center>This page made possible by... <br><br> <IMG SRC=“spss2.gif” align=center></H4> </BODY> </HTML> Oracle Installing Oracle Client 7.3.4

-   -   Follow instructions in the install mode up until the dialog box         which asks what you wish to install.     -   Choose ‘Custom Installation’ and in the new dialog box that         appears, highlight the following for installation:     -   1. Oracle Call Interface     -   2. SQL+     -   3. Oracle 7 32 bit ODBC Driver     -   4. Oracle 7 Utilities     -   5. Oracle Network Products     -   6. Oracle Client Configuration Manager     -   Finish up the installation by following the rest of the dialog         boxes.         Inserting Data Into a Table     -   To change the date and time configuration for the session:         -   >alter session set nls_(—)date_(—)format=‘dd_(—)mon_(—)rr             hh24:mi:ss’;     -   *>insert into spss_(—)test values (‘01-mar-99 00:40:26’,         ‘NSMMNT10’, 0.047, 0.173, 59.468, 51.039, 24.7, 0);

(The values for the table are put inside parentheses in order of the data found in the table. Date/Time and Character variables are put in single quotes and numeric values can stand alone. Each data entry is separated by a comma)

-   -   >select from spss_(—)test;

This command will show the table with the values.

-   -   >comniit

Type this command at the end of the session to commit all of the information that you entered into the table.

TABLE 18 SNMP/PATROL LER METRICS DESCRIPTION PLATFORM UNITS busyPer Provides the percent of CPU usage Router percentage over the first 5 second period in the scheduler. ifInOctets The total number of octets received Router Interface octets on the interface, including framing characters. ifOutOctects The total number of octets Router Interface octets transmitted out of the interface, including framing characters. ifSpeed An estimate of the interface's Router Interface bits per second current bandwidth in bits per second. For interfaces which do not vary in bandwidth or for those where no accurate estimation can be made, this object should contain the nominal bandwidth. CPUCpuUtil Displays the percentage of CPU UNIX percentage utilization. MEMFreeMem Displays the number of pages of UNIX pages memory available. NETPacketsIn Displays the total number of UNIX packets incoming packets within a sample interval. NETPacketsOut Displays the total number of UNIX packets outgoing packets within a sample interval. DSKPercentBusy Displays the percentage of time that UNIX percentage the device is busy servicing a transfer request. CPUprcrProces- Displays a percentage of the elapsed NT percentage sorTimePercent time that a processor is busy executing a non-idle thread. MEMmemAvaila- Displays the size of the virtual NT megabytes bleBytes memory currently on the zeroed, free, and standby memory lists. NETniPcktsPerSec Displays the rate that the packets NT packets per are sent and received on the second network. PDpdDiskTimePer- Displays the percentage of elapsed NT percentage cent time that the disk spends servicing read or write requests.

Project Event Handling

Creating Event Correlation Alarms With ECM as the Event Correlator and Manager

Introduction

-   -   This section is intended as a lessons-learned encapsulation for         ECM environment configurations.     -   This section is intended as an aid in the creation and         modification of event correlation models/alarm definitions in         ECM.     -   Included in this section are references to event correlation         models/alarm definitions and PERL scripts that were devised in         the development of this component of the Service Assurance final         phase 2 deliverable. These pieces are included in the phase 2         repository for importation into an install of ECM.         Declarations

-   1. Items enclosed in greater/less than symbols (     ) contain installation dependent data.

-   2. Items enclosed in single quotes are as seen on the screen.     Definitions

-   HPOV—Hewlett Packard's OpenView Network Node Manager

-   IDE—Interactive Development Environment

-   OID—Object Identifier

-   ECM—Event Correlator and Manager     ECM Event Correlation Components     The Theory

The various components of ECM allow for the graphical creation of event correlation maps. These maps contain alarms, polls and traps, and inside each given alarm reside various states and transitions.

To fully comprehend the essence of the correlation utilities contained within ECM would require a primer on state transition diagrams. This falls out of the scope of this document, but a brief overview is in order.

Each alarm consists of a separate state transition diagram. The orderly composition of the states and transitions defines the boundaries of the diagram, the actions on the transitions define the outputs, and the SNMP polls and SNMP trap masks define the inputs. Therefore, the masks and polls bring in data for correlation. The data enters an alarm and through its unique course through the diagram (the unique set of states through which it transitions) a specific result is generated. This result consists of the actions that are generated by the transitions that it passes through.

The Components

The theory behind the software generates three distinct functional areas to the diagrarns. These functional areas contain a distinct series of components that are the user-modifiable pieces of ECM. These are as follows:

-   1. Inputs     -   Polls—Are an SNMP request for information from a management         station to a managed node.     -   Traps—Are SNMP variables that have been “pushed” from managed         node to management station. -   2. Alarms     -   States—Are actual, defined points of being in a system.     -   Transitions—The passages from one state to the next. -   3. Results     -   Traps—Same as above, but are instead sent out either to another         management station or a managed node.     -   There are others, but they fall out of the scope of this         document.         Creating New Polls         The New Poll Definition

Begin by running the ECM client and logging in as appropriate to your designed environment. Open the ‘Admin’ then the ‘Poll List’ menu options, and the ‘<Server Name>: Poll List’ dialog window is opened. At the bottom of this window is a series of buttons. Look for the button labeled ‘New’ and click on it. A new window will appear with the title reading ‘<Server Name>: Alarm Definition’.

This window is tabbed with two panels. The lead panel is the ‘Poll’ with the second tab being the ‘Poll Condition’. On the ‘Poll’ panel resides a number of basic interface components. The simplest of these components are obvious in that they are the name, poll rate, enabled, port and the true/false trigger that is fired when the poll is run. The important thing to realize here is that the triggers can either be reused from elsewhere in the program or else created right here by entering an arbitrary, previously unused, new trigger name. As with the name, these items should be part of a larger naming convention in order to simplify their utilization (i.e. <project name>_(—)<associated alarm><descriptive poll name>).

More complicated are the ‘Property’ drop-down and the ‘Poll Condition’ tab. The property string in this case is important as one of the core tenets that drives ECM is that of the property string and it's relation to the observed node.

The Property String has to be in the Node's Property Group

The different property groups work as containers. In this way, the string that you choose must have a correspondence with the node(s) being observed. (i.e. the string must either be already inside of the given node's property group, or else added to the property group at a later time).

Lastly is the ‘Poll Condition’ tab. This is straightforward to use, and consists of choosing the necessary base object and checking the attributes that you would like to monitor. To do the very minimum, and grab variables for entry into logs, you would simply select the attribute in question and select ‘present’ (if more select ‘AND’ then select the next attribute and ‘present’ and so on).

NOTE that the base object that you used in your poll needs to be specified in the property group that is used by your node(s).

The Base Object has to be in the Property Group

Use this last statement as a guideline for developing your polls. Just put any base object used inside the corresponding property group ANY time you use one in a poll used.

Creating New SNMP Trap Masks

New Trap Mask Definitions

Begin by running the ECM client and logging in as appropriate to your designed environment. Open the ‘Admin’ then the ‘Mask List’ menu options, and the ‘<Server Name>: Mask List’ dialog window is opened. At the bottom of this window is a series of buttons. Look for the button labeled ‘New’ and click on it. A new window will appear with the title reading ‘<Server Name>: Alarm Definition’.

This window is tabbed with two panels. The lead panel is the ‘Mask’ with the second tab being the ‘Trigger Function’. On the ‘Mask’ panel resides a number of basic interface components. The simplest of these components is the name of the mask. These items should be part of a larger naming scheme in order to simplify their utilization (i.e. <project name>_(—)<associated alarm>_(—)<descriptive poll name>).

In the next field comes the ‘Generic’ trap ID. This is a value from negative one to positive six and represents a number of standardized responses as well as industry/vendor specific predefined (SNMP) values. In most modified occasions, this is going to be six.

Next comes the ‘Enterprise’ OID field. Each received trap comes with an SNMP enterprise OD that allows for specificity with regards to the data's base object. This can be found in numerous ways, but one possible way to discover this information is to enable the ‘TrapLogger’ alarm and its' associated poll. Once activated, this alarm will log all incoming traps to a file predefined to be ‘alltraps.log’. This can be found in the /<base directory>/seasoft/userfiles/logs directory, and is in flat text file format (i.e. more or cat will work).

Once the mask is defined, the next test is to define whether you are interested in a simple trigger call or a more complex trigger function. While describing the trigger function falls outside the scope of this paper, one note that can be shared is that the PERL functionality in this release is quite limited. The trigger function is focused on little more than extended ‘if else’ statements that fire triggers.

If the trigger function is not required then the use of a simple trigger allows for the creation of new or reused triggers. As stated earlier, these triggers should be created under a naming scheme.

Creating New Alarm Models

The New Alarm Canvas—Interface Basics

Begin by mmning the ECM client and logging in as appropriate to your designed environment. Open the ‘Admin’ then the ‘Alarm Definition List’ menu options, and the ‘<Server Name>: Alarm Definition List’ dialog window is opened. At the bottom of this window is a series of buttons. Look for the button labeled ‘New’ and click on it. A new window will appear with the title reading ‘<Server Name>: Alarm Definition’.

The basic layout of this window begins in the upper left corner with a four-button toolbar that allows for the creation of new alarm components. Below this is the alarm canvas that usually opens with a single state listed. This state is labeled ‘Ground’.

Beneath the canvas section are three textbox/drop-down listboxes. The textbox labeled ‘Name’ is nothing more than the name chosen for the new alarm. Select a name that is appropriate for your project. It is extremely easy to get lost in the alarm definitions so it is vehemently suggested to keep everything standardized around a naming convention.

The list-box immediately to the right of ‘Name’ is that of ‘Property’. This is an extremely important piece of the ECM design puzzle. The property group is termed as being a ‘container for properties’. While all these kinds of theoretical understandings are important, keep in mind that the individual alarm's property needs to appear in the main property group under which your nodes will appear. It is in this manner that the property groups work as “keys” to allow various nodes to adhere to various property groups. The more complex the scheme, the more important this understanding becomes.

Our next interface component is that of the ‘Scope’ which appears immediately to the right of the ‘Property’ drop-down box. This has three options labeled ‘Subobject’, ‘Node’, and ‘Enterprise’.

-   -   Subobject applies to an alarm configured to observe multiple         instances of a single type of object attached to a single node.     -   Node applies to an alarm configured to observe various objects         attached to an individual node.     -   Enterprise applies to instances that come from various nodes.

Essentially this scheme allows for “grading” alarms across the entire installation. Some alarms can be focused on a given router for instance while other alarms may be correlating across multiple nodes.

Below these interface components are various other components, but short of the ‘Save’, ‘Cancel’, and ‘Enabled’ sections, there is nothing of extreme importance.

One final note is that of saving. ANY time a new trigger or a major change is made to the system, save as soon as possible. There are various flaws with the IDE which will appear when you create various new interface pieces (i.e. triggers, state) that don't appear in the choice boxes for implementation until AFTER a save is made.

Building The Alarm

Utilizing the toolbar, building basic new alarms is quite simple, but make sure that the totality of the design is understood before undertaking more extreme alarms. In any case, in this creation phase there are a number of important points to take into account.

Begin with state creation. In the eventuality that ECM is being interfaced with HPOV, the state creation itself becomes important. The color chosen for the state in question is what will appear on the IPMap in HPOV. This again falls into the realm of “prior proper planning” to make the best utilization of the available colors. HPOV has five available, and ECM has many, many more. These must be distilled properly for the interaction to occur.

Transition definition is just as important from a planning perspective. Once the transition trigger has been selected, the actions attached to it should be chosen carefully. Please remember to save frequently (especially if you notice a missing trigger in the drop down list after you just created it).

An important note is that the given transition must be pending for the trigger to be generated. This is what ECM refers to as ‘Smart Polling’. This design says that the individual poll or trap mask will NOT occur unless the trigger that they generate is waiting on a transition in an active alarm in the product. The polls do not occur unless they could possibly generate a transition. Therefore, even if all the polls were enabled in the product. If they did not have an attached transition waiting to occur, then they would wait idly until a transition necessitated their action.

The actions associated with any given transition fall into two categories. That of PERL subroutines, and then everything else. It is conceivable that whole transitions could consist of vast PERL subroutines that would generate all the triggers and maintain all the correlation required by the product/installation. PERL subroutines will be considered in a separate section of this document, but their existence as a transition action is of extreme importance in defining your state transition diagrams.

If the use of PERL on the transition seems overkill for your needs then the remaining actions fall into internal and external categories:

-   -   Internal—Action Router, Alarm Counter, Clear Trigger, Delete         Node, Fire Trigger, Set Attribute and Notes     -   External—Beep, Command, EventLog, Inform, Inform OpC, Log to         File, Log To dB, Microsoft Mail, Paging, Send Trap, SNMP Set and         SMTP Mail

These actions should be examined thoroughly in defining what requirements are set for your alarm in particular.

The Patroller To Event Correlator and Manager Interface—SNMP Method

An Introduction

For application and server monitoring, the patroller is used. This creates a monitoring layer that resides on individual systems in the form of agents. These agents poll for user-defined information on pre-selected intervals and typically push this data up to a central point of control. From this point of control the data can be collated and correlated to provide historical data on the performance of the systems in the environment.

Another possibility with the system is that SNMP traps can be generated. These traps are typically generated in dealing with thresholds that have been defined for their agents, and upon their generation ECM can receive and handle these much like any other trap that would come in.

The Specifics

Remember that ECM has mask definitions. These mask definitions allow “screens” to be established that observe incoming SNMP trap information and “screen” out the information that you require. Remember also that there were three important sections to the mask. There was the generic and specific trap ID's as well as the enterprise OID. It is through these specifics that the mask definition is set-up to watch for data that it needs.

Using the generic trap number of ‘6’ and the enterprise OID of 1.3.6.1.4.1.1031, the traps can be received and handled through mask definitions. The actual configuration of the traps to be sent is outside the scope of this document, but the specific trap ID is set during the PATROLLER configuration and implementation. For instance, in the case of the development environment, ID's 41 and 42 were used. Once a mask is configured for these parameters, the traps can be received into ECM for correlation.

As in most cases, it is probably a good idea to enable the ‘AllTraps’ alarm to receive the traps and write them to log. With the ‘log to file’ action enabled in the alarm, you can set the action to verbose and actually see the incoming traps as they are written. From these logs you can derive the necessary modifications to the masks that you wish to produce.

The PATROLLER Trap—Handling The Trap

Once the actual trap has been received into the system, the parsing of the trap has to be done through PERL in most cases. There are other means to deal with traps, but PERL is native to ECM. This led to its' use in the phase two development of this product for the Service Assurance project.

ECM has reserved a number of “special” variables. These variables allow for interaction with the incoming trap, and provide a means by which to parse the trap without having to resort to all manner of regular expressions or some other form of tawdry pattern matching. Of particular interest is the “Vb” series of variables.

Utilizing these “Vb” variables, you can get at the variable bindings that are appended to the end of the SNMP trap that was transmitted via PATROLLER. As this is where the actual data resides, these variables make extraction and correlation a breeze. PATROLLER builds its' variable bindings in a single dimension, and to retrieve this data requires nothing more than extraction of the ‘VbValue(0)’ variable. This comes in as straight text in the form of “Application:Instance Parameter: State:Value”.

Parsing requires the ‘split’ function from the PERL libraries, and with some simple logic and variable creation, the values can be parsed quite easily. There are some problems with ECM at this point though. Refer to the section on PERL that is contained in this document for more information.

With the trap parsed in this manner, the values can be easily correlated. This step can be imbedded in a PERL function and reused across multiple alarms with relative ease. One precaution that must be stated again is that of naming conventions. This point can not be belabored enough. Make sure that you put the PERL that is created into some kind of standardized format both by name and by the comments placed within.

PERL-Notes And Addenda

The Pluses

The installation of PERL that comes with ECM has much to offer to the correlation model designer. The flexibility is just about boundless, and with the addition of external PERL modules, the boundaries that do exist are spread even further away.

The PERL variables allow for deep SNMP trap broadcasts. Through the variable bindings that are attached, the extraction of this data is basic. The included functions allow for interaction both with the ECM structure (the FireTrigger and AssignPropertyGroup functions) as well as system level or beyond (limitless PERL modules). In our case we even went to the extreme of handling SNMP outbound traps through a PERL ‘system’ call to an external trap generation utility.

The Minuses

PERL is gawky and complex to the uninitiated, and the code can be somewhat complex to operate. ECM also has a buggy interpreter that causes some concern with regards to larger scale subroutines. This buggy-ness results in open statements that only work in particular ways (i.e. open(LOG,“filename\.log”);).

In addition to the above weaknesses, the lack of a sensible IDE makes for some extremely time consuming code development. Liberal use of ‘echo’ statements is just about the only way to achieve a solution for broken code.

Also, there is the extreme problem of testability as noted above. Either through the lack of a debugger or the lack of a test environment, this weakness creates some time consuming development of code. Do not attempt to get around this by writing code out of the IDE either. Regular PERL code doesn't work most of the time in ECM. The differences are subtle, but as you experience larger and larger code, the differences become more problematic.

The Reality

Coding can be difficult anywhere. The flexibility that PERL offers within the product seems to outweigh this though. The predefined transition functions will only get you so far. PERL has to pick up the pace and carry models beyond this. One may build in some basic functionality, but without the impetus of an API into the toolset, adaptation of these functions is limited. Some of the more basic features are extremely useful (i.e. FireTrigger and AlarmCounter), but more advanced functionality screams PERL.

Some Notes

There is no native way to get timing. The way that was utilized in phase two design was with the ‘localtime’ PERL function.

Traps and masks have somewhat different formats (i.e. not trap parameters)

Keep in mind that the namespace/environment variables are normally global for the entire ECM environment. To this end, any alarm out there can access variables from any other alarm that is in existence with the installation. Liberal use of the ‘my’ scope limiter will allow for some separation of the variables in theory, but this theory has not been put to the test. The best idea is to logically separate variables through some sort of naming convention. This kind of organization is difficult but recommended.

Loading the Archived Models

The models and associated materials created in the phase 1 and 2 development environments were subsequently exported to two files currently located in the \\nsmmnt10\IPSA\IProduct Development\Phase2 Deliverables\Event Handling System directory. These files are SA_(—)Phase2_(—)Models.mod and .txt. Below are listings of their contents and instructions on the importation process.

To import the files into your ECM installation.

-   -   Gain filesystem access to the above listed files.     -   Open an ECM client and log in to the system that will serve as         your host ECM server.     -   Go to Server on the menu bar.     -   Click on Import.     -   Enter the full path and name of the mod file.     -   The files will be imported and established within ECM.

A listing of the imported files and attachments (this was derived from the SA_(—)Phase2_(—)Models.txt file).

-   -   exportAlarnMap contains 10 items:         -   alarm SA_(—)ifEntry_(—)Logger is Off     -   alarm SA_(—)allTraps_(—)Logger is On         -   alarm SnmpStatus is On         -   alarm IcmpStatus is On         -   alarm SA_(—)NodeMonitor is On         -   alarm SA_(—)lsystem Logger is On         -   alarm SA_(—)ifentry_(—)C2Rate_(—)Util is On         -   alarm SA_(—)CorrEnt_(—)Final is On         -   alarm SA_(—)CorrEnt_(—)BusyPerMon is On         -   alarm Test is Off     -   exportPropertyMap contains 23 items:         -   property udpEntry         -   property udp         -   property tcpConnEntry         -   property tcp         -   property snmp         -   property ipRouteEntry         -   property ipNetToMediaEntry         -   property ipAddrEntry         -   property egp         -   property atEntry         -   property nl-ping         -   property system         -   property NO_(—)PROP         -   property ip         -   property interfaces         -   property icmp         -   property egpNeighEntry         -   property ifEntry         -   property SA_(—)Router_(—)Collection_(—)Property         -   property lsystem         -   property SA_(—)Normal_(—)Snmp         -   property SA_(—)CheckLater         -   property icmpStatus     -   exportPropGroupMap contains 35 items:         -   group Icmp         -   group CHIPCOM-MIB         -   group SYNOPTICS-ATM-ETHERCELL-MIB         -   group UNGERMAN-BASS-MIB         -   group SYNOPTICS-LINKSWITCH-MIB         -   group SYNOPTICS-5000-MIB         -   group SYNOPTICS-3000-MIB         -   group RETIX-MIB         -   group ODS-MIB         -   group FIBERMUX-MIB         -   group COMPAQ-MIB         -   group ATT-SMARTHUB-MIB         -   group Mib-II-router-sub1         -   group Mib-II-sub1         -   group Mib-II         -   group HP-UNIX-MIB         -   group CISCO-ROUTER-11.x-MIB         -   group CISCO-ROUTER-10.x-MIB         -   group RFC1289-phivMIB         -   group Router         -   group CISCO-ROUTER-9.x-MIB         -   group XYPLEX-MIB         -   group WELLFLEET-SERIES7-MIB         -   group WELLFLEET-MIB         -   group SUN-MIB         -   group NAT-MIB         -   group EPIX-MB         -   group DEC-ELAN-MIB         -   group 3COM-ECSV2-MIB         -   group NETLABS-PING-MIB         -   group RFC1213-MIB2-MIB         -   group SA_(—)Router_(—)Collection_(—)Group         -   group lesgroup         -   group SA_(—)Normal_(—)Snmp         -   group SA_(—)CheckLater     -   exportOIDToGroupMap contains 0 items:     -   exportPollMap contains 6 items:         -   poll SA_(—)if Entry is On         -   poll SA_(—)NodeMonitor_(—)freeMem is On         -   poll SA_(—)NodeMonitor_(—)busyPer is On         -   poll SA_(—)lsystem is On         -   poll SA_(—)CorrEnt_(—)busyPer is On         -   poll Test is Off     -   exportMaskMap contains 2 items:         -   mask PatrolTrapsClear is On         -   mask PatrolTrapsAlarm is Off     -   exportTriggerMap contains 34 items:         -   trigger NO_(—)TRIGGER         -   trigger coldStart         -   trigger warmStart         -   trigger allTraps         -   trigger PatrolNamedFailure         -   trigger PatrolNamedRecovery         -   trigger SA_(—)CorrEnt_(—)Recover         -   trigger SA_(—)CorrEnt_(—)PATROLLERRecover         -   trigger nodeUp         -   trigger nodeUpFast         -   trigger agentUpFast         -   trigger agentUp         -   trigger SA_(—)if Entry         -   trigger SS_(—)ICMP_(—)Failed         -   trigger SA_(—)CorrEnt_(—)busyPer_(—)Alarm         -   trigger SA_(—)CorrEnt_(—)busyPer_(—)Recovery         -   trigger SA_(—)lsystem         -   trigger SA_(—)NodeMonitor_(—)busyPer_(—)Recovery         -   trigger SA_(—)NodeMonitor_(—)freeMem_(—)Recovery         -   trigger SA_(—)NodeMonitor_(—)busyPer_(—)Alarm         -   trigger SA_(—)NodeMonitor_(—)freeMem_(—)Alarm         -   trigger Test         -   trigger IS_(—)ICMPFailed         -   trigger TestA         -   trigger SA_(—)CorrEnt_(—)XOver         -   trigger SA_(—)CorrEnt_(—)AlarmFail         -   trigger SA_(—)NodeMonitor_(—)NotiftHPOV         -   trigger SA_(—)NodeMonitor_(—)BuildTrap         -   trigger NODE_(—)UNREACHABLE         -   trigger ICMP_(—)TIMEOUT         -   trigger NET_(—)UNREACHABLE         -   trigger PORT_(—)UNREACHABLE         -   trigger SNMP_(—)TIMEOUT trigger RESPONSE     -   exportSeverityMap contains 5 items:         -   severity Normal         -   severity Critical         -   severity Major         -   severity Minor         -   severity Warning     -   exportRuleMap contains 0 items:     -   exportOpcMaskMap contains 0 items:     -   exportPerlSubMap contains 16 items:         -   perl subroutine Test         -   perl subroutine SA_(—)Parameters_(—)TestScript         -   perl subroutine SA_(—)NodeMonitor_(—)RecoverHPOV         -   perl subroutine SA_(—)NodeMonitor_(—)NotifyHPOV         -   perl subroutine SA_(—)NodeMonitor_(—)BuildTrap         -   perl subroutine SA_(—)ifEntry_(—)C2Rate_(—)Util         -   perl subroutine SA_(—)CorrEnt_(—)VerifyNode         -   perl subroutine SA_(—)CorrEnt_(—)RecoverHPOV     -   perl subroutine SA_(—)CorrEnt_(—)PATROLLERID         -   perl subroutine SA_(—)CorrEnt_(—)NotifyHPOV         -   perl subroutine SA_(—)allTraps_(—)EventCodeScreen         -   perl subroutine PatrolTrapsAlarm         -   perl subroutine SA_(—)SnmpStatus_(—)RecoverHPOV         -   perl subroutine SA_(—)SnmpStatus_(—)NotifyHPOV         -   perl subroutine SA_(—)IcmpStatus_(—)RecoverHPOV         -   perl subroutine SA_(—)IcmpStatus_(—)NotifyHPOV

The above contains all of the actual modifications that were made to ECM during phase 2 and 1 of the IPSA development effort. In addition to these files are any tangential pieces that were “touched” by the modified ECM components (models, polls, et.al.).

External Applications

Trapgen

This is an executable that allows for manual trap generation through either the command line or PERL. The set-up used in phase 2 consists of the following:

-   -   trapgen nsmmws16 1.3.6.1.4.1.78 nsmmws17 6 3 105         1.3.6.1.4.1.78.0.3 octetstringascii ‘string’

Of particular interest is the ‘octetstringascii’ option. This allows strings to be collated and passed through the utility. Note that this was being passed across to an HPOV receiver that had to be configured separately.

Establishing this requires some HPOV experience and falls out of the scope of this document, but one heads up would be that you need to go inside the ‘Event Configuration Utility’ inside HPOV. Once inside, either build a new enterprise instance or adapt an old one. After picking the enterprise though, you need to create an event instance that fits the event id that you choose in your trapgen command line (i.e. the 1.3.6.1.4.1.78.0.3 part of the example above).

Once finished, you should be able to pass events via traps from ECM to HPOV. To observe these events, open the ‘Events Browser’, and they should be listed in date received order.

MIB Browser

A component of the HPOV toolset is the SNMP MIB browser. This is a useful tool for exploring the base objects that we have access to through ECM. Gain access to this tool from the HPOV manager, and you can use it to explore remote MIB's, and dig through the available MB's for objects of interest.

Remember that the compiled MIB's that are engaged with ECM limit the number of base objects to the ones specified in the ASN.1 file that was specified at compile time. These optional MIB's extend and expand the capabilities of the polls and alarms, thus allowing for more specificity in SNMP data collections.

TABLE 19 Identify and Describe Requirement Description: Provide information regarding the requirements, plan and implementation of Incident Reporting on the SA project Scenarios: Type: Business Process Flow: Overall Rating: Business Need Desc: Affected Parties: Service Assurance Team Project Sponsor: Network Line of Business Existing/New: External Dependencies: Method for Verification: In Scope: Service Assurance Internal Initiative (Phase 2) Complete after Requirements are Scheduled into a Release:

TABLE 20 Increment: App/Subsyst Desc/Flow:

TABLE 21 Required if Modifications are made after the Requirement has been signed-off Change Request: Event Handling Requirements

FIG. 31 illustrates an embodiment of the present invention which maps events on a network with service assurance capabilities. In operation 3100, a network is monitored for the occurrence of availability events, threshold events, and trap events. At least one occurred event is correlated to at least one other occurred event in operation 3102 to generate at least one correlating event. In operation 3104, the occurred events and correlating events are mapped on at least one network map. The network map is subsequently displayed in operation 3106.

In one embodiment of the present invention, the step of monitoring the network further comprises: tracking the availability of individual components of network for events, tracking the availability of individual services of the network for events, tracking the availability of individual processes of an operating system of the network for events, tracking the status of agent processes on individual components of the network for events, monitoring the operating system and application performance of network for threshold events, and monitoring traps of the network for events.

In yet another embodiment, the network map is a node level map and/or an event level map. The node level map displays node responding events, agent not responding events, and/or node down events. The step of mapping the occurred events and correlating events when the network map comprises the event level map further comprise of additional steps. In particular, the occurred events and correlating events may be filtered based upon predetermined criteria. The filtered events may also be mapped on the event level map. In still yet another embodiment, at least one notification action is generated based upon the occurred events and/or correlating events.

Availability Events

This section details the three availability events monitored.

Node Up and Node Down/Interface Up and Interface Down—Tracking an individual network component (such as a router, server, workstation, etc.). This will be tracked using Network Node Manager and ECM. We will track all nodes which we monitor on the test network, including the following: nsmmws16, nsmmws09, twmmnt02, twmmdb02, nsmmrt03, nsmmrt04. When a Node or Interface fails to respond to a ping, a Node or Interface Down event for the specific node will be generated. When a Node or Interface responds to a ping after immediately after failing to respond to a ping, a Node or Interface Up for the specific node event will be generated.

Service Up and Service Down—Tracking an individual network service (FTP, NNTP, POP3, SMTP, DNS, HTTP, and RADIUS (RADIUS is tracked as a probe only)). This will be tracked using the Collector Internet Service Monitor. When a service fails to respond to the ISM a Service Down event for the specific service will be generated. When a Service responds to the ISM immediately after failing to respond to the ISM, a Service Up event for the specific service will be generated.

Process Up and Process Down—Tracking an individual process on a Windows NT or UNIX system. This will be tracked using Patroller Process KMs. When the number of specific processes with a specific name running under a specific owner changes from a preset number, a Process Down event will be generated for the specific process, owner, and number of processes. When the number of specific processes with a specific name running under a specific owner changes back to the preset number from another number, a Process Up event event will be generated for the specific process, owner, and number of processes.

SNMP Agent Up and SMMP Agent Down—Tracking the status of the SNMP agent process on individual nodes. This will be tracked using ECM. When an SNMP agent fails to respond to a ECM SNMP status query, an SNMP Agent Down event will generated for the specific node. When an SNMP agent responds to a ECM SNMP status query after immediately after failing to respond to a SNMP status query, an SMP Agent Up event will be generated for the specific node.

Operating System and Application Performance Threshold Events

This section details the operating system threshold events and the application performance threshold events monitored. Patroller will be used to monitor processes and send a Parameter High event for a specific parameter and node when a parameter crosses a threshold by increasing its value and send a Parameter Low event for a specific parameter and node when a parameter crosses a threshold by decreasing its value.

The following parameters should be monitored for Phase 2. Note that these parameters are for proof of concept only, as parameters can be added or removed very easily.

TABLE 22 Patroller Metrics UNIX Server (Generic Name) Parameter CPU Utilization CPUprcrProcessorTimePercent CPUCpuUtil increased to >= n % CPU Utilization CPUprcrProcessorTimePercent CPUCpuUtil decreased to <n % Memory Utilization MEMmemAvailableBytes MEMFreeMem increased to >= n % Memory Utilization MEMmemAvailableBytes MEMFreeMem decreased to <n % SNMP Performance Threshold Events

This section details the operating system threshold events and the application performance threshold events monitored. ECM will be used to monitor SNMP variables and send a Parameter High event for a specific parameter and node when a parameter crosses a threshold by increasing its value and send a Parameter Low event for a specific parameter and node when a parameter crosses a threshold by decreasing its value.

The following parameters should be monitored and possibly more:

TABLE 23 Patroller Metrics (Generic Name) SNMP Object Name Interface Util increased to >= 20% ? Interface Util decreased to <20% ? Generic SNMP Traps Events

This section details the requirements for monitoring any MIB defined trap from any monitored SNMP device. The SNMP trap will by generated asynchronously by any monitored node and will be translated into an event.

TABLE 24 Event Name SNMP Object Name Standard: Cold Start ? Enterprise Specific: Cisco 7500: ? ? Generic Trap sent by NNM's ? sendmsg Event Correlation

This section details the requirements for Event Correlation. The architecture will allow arbitrary correlation of any of the above events with regard to each other and time. This means that we will be able to generate new, correlated events based upon any combination of the above events. We will use ECM for all correlation in Phase 2; we may also use Collector for limited non SNMP-correlation in later phases. For Phase 2, we will perform the following correlations: ICMP/SNMP Status—We will determine the status of both the ICMP and SNMP agent status of nodes. We will then generate one or more events based upon this combined status.

Downstream Suppression—We will suppress node down events from nodes behind a certain network elements (for Phase 2, routers) when the network element is down.

Availability/Service/Process Status—Suppress service events and process events when a node is down.

Event Notification

This section details the requirements for Event Notification. Each event must be able to trigger one or more notification actions. A notification action consists of:

-   -   An alphanumeric text page to an arbitrary pager     -   An internet email to an arbitrary account     -   An initiation of an arbitrary script on the network management         workstation (remote script initiations will not be imeplemted in         Phase 2)     -   Open a Remedy trouble ticket with arbitrary information

Configuring what actions should be taken as a result of what events will be configurable with pattern matching of Element Names, Event Codes, and schedule (including day and time).

Additionally, actions will not be taken when an Element is listed in Scheduled Downtime table with the same Event Code and occurs within the Downtime window.

Network Maps

This section details the requirements for the network maps. There will be two network maps:

-   -   Node Level Map—a node level map may be provided by HP OpenView         Network Node Manager. It will display each managed in one of         three different colors, corresponding to Node Responding, SNMP         Agent Not Responding, and Node Down.     -   Event Level Map—an event level map can be provided by Collector         Objective View. It will display entities driven by arbitrary         event filters, but will not contain a node level view. These         entities will be set to monitor specific groups of events and         will change color to match the most critical severity of any         event in the event filter.         Event Correlator and Manager (ECM) Model PERL Scripts

This section outlines the PERL scripts utilized in the alarm models from the Event Correlator and Manager for phase 2.

DESCRIPTION

The below listed scripts delineate the entirety of the final development effort of the IPSA phase 2 ECM installation. These scripts have been culled together and separated at the version header contained at their beginning. The individual headers begin with # Subroutine: and continue with a number of # separated comments describing the following script. Look for each of these as separators for the individual scripts.

# # Subroutine: SA_(—)allTraps_(—)EventCodeScreen # Overview: Simple screening mechanism for associating # event codes with incoming trapped events. # Once the incoming event is matched with a # corresponding event code, the event is # wrapped into an SNMP trap variable binding # and fired into HP OpenView. # # Fires ‘Alarm’ trap into HP OpenView for # processing using the PERL ‘system’ # function and the ‘trapgen’ command. # #_(————————————————————————————————) # # Configuration Of Variables # # Instantiate Local Variables # - Make the variables (“my”) local to keep them out of #   the global name space. Single step alarm, so no #   need for global variables. # my @VbVals,$EventCode,$AlarmCode,$SnmpTrapVbValue; my $EpochTime=0; my @DaysPerMonth=(31, 28, 31, 30, 31, 30, 31, 31, 30, 31, 30, 31); my $year,$mon,$day,$hour,$min,$sec; my $TZAdjust,$DSTAdjust; my $ShowDebug,$NumLeapYears,$SecondsThisInterval; my $SnmpTrapTimestamp,$SnmpTrapNode; # Initialize Date/Time Variables # - 2d line turns year into 4-digit year (i.e. 19xx) #   as localtime function returns year-1900. Timestamp #   design is standard for phase 2 development. # $year = ((localtime( ))[5]); $mon = ((localtime( ))[4]); $day = ((localtime( ))[3]); $hour = ((localtime( ))[2]); $min = ((localtime( ))[1]); $sec = ((localtime( ))[0]); # Determine number of seconds for years if ($year < 200) { # year is in two digit form if ($year < 90) { # year is presumably in the 21st century $year += 2000; } else { # year is presumably in the 20th century $year += 1900; } } # Do not return negatives − and if 2100 or later, add to leap year calcs if ($year < 1970 || $year >= 2100) { return 0; } $year = 1970; $SecondsThisInterval = $year * 365 * 24 * 60 * 60; # leap year calculations $NumLeapYears = int(($year+2)/4); if (($year+2) % 4 ═ 0) { # this is a leap year (assuming 1970–2099) # check if we have hit feb 29 yet: # recall, mon is 0-based if ($mon <= 1) { # we need to subtract a year, as this is jan $NumLeapYears--; } } $SecondsThisInterval += $NumLeapYears * 24 * 60 * 60; $EpochTime += $SecondsThisInterval; # Determine number of seconds for months so far while($mon--) { $EpochTime += $DaysPerMonth[$mon] * 24 * 60 * 60; } # Determine number of seconds for days so far $EpochTime += ($day − 1) * 24 * 60 * 60; # Determine number of seconds for hours so far $EpochTime += $hour * 60 * 60; # Determine number of seconds for minutes so far $EpochTime += $min * 60; # Determine number of seconds for seconds so far $EpochTime += $sec; # Adjust for time zone (which should be of the form −12:00 .. 12:00) # THIS IS CURRENTLY IMPLEMENETED POORLY, IT SHOULD USE ACTUAL TIME ZONE CODES $TZAdjust = “5:00”; if ($TZAdjust =~ /{circumflex over ( )}(−?)(\d):(\d*)$/) { # Time Zone adjustment needs to subtract if ($1) { $EpochTime −= ($2 * 60 * 60) + ($3 * 60); } else { $EpochTime += ($2 * 60 * 60) + ($3 * 60); } } # Adjust for day light savings time $SnmpTrapNode = $A; $SnmpTrapVbValue = VbValue(0); @VbVals = split /:/, $SnmpTrapVbValue; # Main Event Code Correlation Loop # # Event Codes Are Standardized For Phase 2 Development # In Local Document In Repository. # if ((ContainsString($VbVals[2] , “root@ named”)) && (ContainsString($VbVals[3] , “ALARM”))) { $EventCode = “1002000”; $AlarmCode = “Alarm”; } elsif ((ContainsString($VbVals[2] , “root@named”)) && (ContainsString($VbVals[3] , “OK”))) { $EventCode = “1002001”; $AlarmCode = “Recover”; } elsif ((ContainsString($VbVals[2] , “CPUCpuUtil”)) && (ContainsString($VbVals[3] , “ALARM”))) { $EventCode = “1003000”; $AlarmCode = “Alarm”; } elsif ((ContainsString($VbVals[2] , “CPUCpuUtil”)) && (ContainsString($VbVals[3] , “OK”))) { $EventCode = “1003001”; $AlarmCode = “Recover”; } elsif ((ContainsString($VbVals[2] , “CPUprcrProcessorTimePercent”)) && (ContainsString($VbVals[3] , “ALARM”))) { $EventCode = “1003000”; $AlarmCode = “Alarm”; } elsif ((ContainsString($VbVals[2] , “CPUprcrProcessorTimePercent”)) && (ContainsString($VbVals[3] , “OK”))) { $EventCode = “1003001”; $AlarmCode = “Recover”; } elsif ((ContainsString($VbVals[2] , “MEMmemAvailableBytes”)) && (ContainsString($VbVals[3] , “ALARM”))) { $EventCode = “1003002”; $AlarmCode = “Alarm”; } elsif ((ContainsString($VbVals[2] , “MEMmemAvailableBytes”)) && (ContainsString($VbVals[3] , “OK”))) { $EventCode = “1003003”; $AlarmCode = “Recover”; } # Fire The Trap Into HP OpenView # # The 6th value on the trapgen string (right next to # the generic trap number (6)) is the specific trap # number. This has to be associated with some event # configured in HP OpenView. (i.e. 6 3 105 - The ‘3’ # is the specific trap ID) # if(ContainsString($AlarmCode, “Alarm”)) { system(“/opt/seasoft/bin/trapgen nsmmws16 1.3.6.1.4.1.78 $SnmpTrapNode 6 3 105 1.3.6.1.4.1.78.0.3 octetstringascii $EventCode 1.3.6.1.4.1.78.0.3 octetstringascii $EpochTime 1.3.6.1.4.1.78.0.3 octetstringascii 5”); } else { system(“/opt/seasoft/bin/trapgen nsmmws16 1.3.6.1.4.1.78 $SnmpTrapNode 6 4 105 1.3.6.1.4.1.78.0.4 octetstringascii $EventCode 1.3.6.1.4.1.78.0.4 octetstringascii $EpochTime 1.3.6.1.4.1.78.0.4 octetstringascii 1”); } # # Subroutine: SA_(—)CorrEnt_(—)NotifyHPOV # Overview: Fires alarm trap notifying the # NMS that the enterprise alarm is # instantiated. # # Fires ‘Alarm’ trap into HP OpenView for # processing using the PERL ‘system’ # function and the ‘trapgen’ command. # #_(————————————————————————————————) # # Configuration Of Variables # # Instantiate Local Variables # - Make the variables (“my”) local to keep them out of #   the global name space. Single step alarm, so no #   need for global variables. # my $EpochTime=0; my @DaysPerMonth = (31, 28, 31, 30, 31, 30, 31, 31, 30, 31, 30, 31); my $year,$mon,$day,$hour,$min,$sec; my $TZAdjust,$DSTAdjust; my $ShowDebug,$NumLeapYears,$SecondsThisInterval; my $SnmpTrapTimestamp,$SnmpTrapNode, $SA_(—)CorrEnt_(—)NotifyOvTrapString ; # Initialize Date/Time Variables # - 2d line turns year into 4-digit year (i.e. 19xx) #   as localtime function returns year-1900. Timestamp #   design is standard for phase 2 development. # $year = ((localtime( ))[5]); $mon = ((localtime( ))[4]); $day = ((localtime( ))[3]); $hour = ((localtime( ))[2]); $min = ((localtime())[1]); $sec = ((localtime( ))[0]); # Determine number of seconds for years if ($year < 200) { # year is in two digit form if ($year < 90) { # year is presumably in the 21st century $year += 2000; } else { # year is presumably in the 20th century $year += 1900; } } # Do not return negatives − and if 2100 or later, add to leap year calcs if ($year < 1970 || $year >= 2100) { return 0; } $year −= 1970; $SecondsThisInterval = $year * 365 * 24 * 60 * 60; # leap year calculations $NumLeapYears = int(($year+2)/4); if (($year+2) % 4 ═ 0) { # this is a leap year (assuming 1970–2099) # check if we have hit feb 29 yet: # recall, mon is 0-based if ($mon <= 1) { # we need to subtract a year, as this is jan $NumLeapYears--; } } $SecondsThisInterval += $NumLeapYears * 24 * 60 * 60; $EpochTime += $SecondsThisInterval; # Determine number of seconds for months so far while($mon--) { $EpochTime += $DaysPerMonth[$mon] * 24 * 60 * 60; } # Determine number of seconds for days so far $EpochTime += ($day − 1) * 24 * 60 * 60; # Determine number of seconds for hours so far $EpochTime += $hour * 60 * 60; #Determine number of seconds for minutes so far $EpochTime += $min * 60; # Determine number of seconds for seconds so far $EpochTime +=$sec; # Adjust for time zone (which should be of the form −12:00 .. 12:00) $TZAdjust = “5:00”; if ($TZAdjust =~ /{circumflex over ( )}(−?)(\d):(\d*)$/) { # Time Zone adjustment needs to subtract if ($1) { $EpochTime −= ($2 * 60 * 60) + ($3 * 60); } else { $EpochTime += ($2 * 60 * 60) + ($3 * 60); } } # Adjust for day light savings time # Fire The Trap Into HP OpenView # # The 6th value on the trapgen string (right next to # the generic trap number (6)) is the specific trap # number. This has to be associated with some event # configured in HP OpenView. (i.e. 6 3 105 - The ‘3’ # is the specific trap ID) # system(“/opt/bin/trapgen nsmmws16 1.3.6.1.4.1.78 nsmmws09 6 3 105 1.3.6.1.4.1.78.0.3 octetstringascii 5000000 1.3.6.1.4.1.78.0.3 octetstringascii $EpochTime 1.3.6.1.4.1.78.0.3 octetstringascii 5”); # # Subroutine: SA_(—)CorrEnt_(—)PATROLLERID # Overview: Stores Environment Variable For Further # Usage In System Code # #_(————————————————————————————————) $SA_(—)CorrEnt_(—)PATROLLERID = $A; # # Subroutine: SA_(—)CorrEnt_(—)RecoverHPOV # Overview: Fires recovery trap notifying the # NMS that the enterprise alarm is # recovered. # # Fires ‘Alarm’ trap into HP OpenView for # processing using the PERL ‘system’ # function and the ‘trapgen’ # command. # #_(————————————————————————————————) # # Configuration Of Variables # # Instantiate Local Variables # - Make the variables (“my”) local to keep them out of #   the global name space. Single step alarm, so no #   need for global variables. # my $EpochTime=0; my @DaysPerMonth = (31, 28, 31, 30, 31, 30, 31, 31, 30, 31, 30, 31); my $year,$mon,$day,$hour,$min,$sec; my $TZAdjust,$DSTAdjust; my $ShowDebug,$NumLeapYears,$SecondsThisInterval; my $SnmpTrapTimestamp,$SnmpTrapNode, $SA_(—)CorrEnt_(—)NotifyOvTrapString ; # Initialize Date/Time Variables # - 2d line turns year into 4-digit year (i.e. 19xx) #   as localtime function returns year-1900. Timestamp #   design is standard for phase 2 development. # $year = ((localtime( ))[5]); $mon = ((localtime( ))[4]); $day = ((localtime( ))[3]); $hour = ((localtime( ))[2]); $min = ((localtime( ))[1]); $sec = ((localtime( ))[0]); # Determine number of seconds for years if ($year < 200) { # year is in two digit form if ($year < 90) { # year is presumably in the 21st century $year += 2000; } else { # year is presumably in the 20th century $year += 1900; } } # Do not return negatives − and if 2100 or later, add to leap year calcs if ($year < 1970 || $year >= 2100) { return 0; } $year −= 1970; $SecondsThisInterval = $year * 365 * 24 * 60 * 60; # leap year calculations $NumLeapYears = int(($year+2)/4); if (($year+2) % 4 ═ 0) { # this is a leap year (assuming 1970–2099) # check if we have hit feb 29 yet: # recall, mon is 0-based if ($mon <= 1) { # we need to subtract a year, as this is jan $NumLeapYears--; } } $SecondsThisInterval += $NumLeapYears * 24 * 60 * 60; $EpochTime += $SecondsThisInterval; # Determine number of seconds for months so far while($mon--) { $EpochTime += $DaysPerMonth[$mon] * 24 * 60 * 60; } # Determine number of seconds for days so far $EpochTime += ($day − 1) * 24 * 60 * 60; # Determine number of seconds for hours so far $EpochTime += $hour * 60 * 60; # Determine number of seconds for minutes so far $EpochTime += $min * 60; # Determine number of seconds for seconds so far $EpochTime += $sec; # Adjust for time zone (which should be of the form −12:00 .. 12:00) $TZAdjust = “5:00”; if ($TZAdjust =~ /{circumflex over ( )}(−?)(\d):(\d*)$/) { # Time Zone adjustment needs to subtract if ($1) { $EpochTime −= ($2 * 60 * 60) + ($3 * 60); } else { $EpochTime += ($2 * 60 * 60) + ($3 * 60); } } # Adjust for day light savings time # Fire The Trap Into HP OpenView # # The 6th value on the trapgen string (right next to # the generic trap number (6)) is the specific trap # number. This has to be associated with some event # configured in HP OpenView. (i.e. 6 3 105 - The ‘3’ # is the specific trap ID) # system(“/opt/bin/trapgen nsmmws16 1.3.6.1.4.1.78 nsmmws09 6 4 105 1.3.6.1.4.1.78.0.4 octetstringascii 5000001 1.3.6.1.4.1.78.0.4 octetstringascii $EpochTime 1.3.6.1.4.1.78.0.4 octetstringascii 1”); # # Subroutine: SA_(—)CorrEnt_(—)VerifyNode # Overview: Node verification subroutine to keep # alarm restrained to single node instances. # #_(————————————————————————————————) # if(ContainsString($SA_(—)CorrEnt_(—)BusyPerID,$A)) { FireTrigger(“SA_(—)CorrEnt_(—)Recover”); }elsif(ContainsString($SA_(—)CorrEnt_(—)PATROLLERID,$A)) { FireTrigger(“SA_(—)CorrEnt_(—)PATROLLERRecover”); } #_(————————————————————————————————) # # Subroutine: SA_(—)IcmpStatus_(—)NotifyHPOV # Overview: Fires alarm trap notifying the # NMS that the enterprise alarm is # instantiated. # # Fires ‘Alarm’ trap into HP OpenView for # processing using the PERL ‘system’ # function and the ‘trapgen’ command. # #_(————————————————————————————————) # # Configuration Of Variables # # Instantiate Local Variables # - Make the variables (“my”) local to keep them out of #   the global name space. Single step alarm, so no #   need for global variables. # my $EpochTime=0; my @DaysPerMonth = (31, 28, 31, 30, 31, 30, 31, 31, 30, 31, 30, 31); my $year,$mon,$day,$hour,$min,$sec; my $TZAdjust,$DSTAdjust; my $ShowDebug,$NumLeapYears,$SecondsThisInterval; my $SnmpTrapTimestamp,$SnmpTrapNode, $SA_(—)CorrEnt_(—)NotifyOvTrapString ; # Initialize Date/Time Variables # - 2d line turns year into 4-digit year (i.e. 19xx) #   as localtime function returns year-1900. Timestamp #   design is standard for phase 2 development. # $year = ((localtime( ))[5]); $mon = ((localtime( ))[4]); $day = ((localtime( ))[3]); $hour = ((localtime( ))[2]); $min = ((localtime( ))[1]); $sec = ((localtime( ))[0]); # Determine number of seconds for years if ($year < 200) { # year is in two digit form if ($year < 90) { # year is presumably in the 21st century $year += 2000; } else { # year is presumably in the 20th century $year += 1900; } } # Do not return negatives − and if 2100 or later, add to leap year calcs if ($year < 1970 || $year >= 2100) { return 0; } $year −= 1970; $SecondsThisInterval = $year * 365 * 24 * 60 * 60; # leap year calculations $NumLeapYears = int(($year+2)/4); if (($year+2) % 4 ═ 0) { # this is a leap year (assuming 1970–2099) # check if we have hit feb 29 yet: # recall, mon is 0-based if ($mon <= 1) { # we need to subtract a year, as this is jan $NumLeapYears--; } } $SecondsThisInterval += $NumLeapYears * 24 * 60 * 60; $EpochTime += $SecondsThisInterval; # Determine number of seconds for months so far while($mon--) { $EpochTime += $DaysPerMonth[$mon] * 24 * 60 * 60; } # Determine number of seconds for days so far $EpochTime += ($day − 1) * 24 * 60 * 60; # Determine number of seconds for hours so far $EpochTime += $hour * 60 * 60; # Determine number of seconds for minutes so far $EpochTime += $min * 60; # Determine number of seconds for seconds so far $EpochTime += $sec; # Adjust for time zone (which should be of the form −12:00 .. 12:00) # THIS SHOULD USE ACTUAL TIME ZONE CODES $TZAdjust =“5:00”; if ($TZAdjust =~ /{circumflex over ( )}(−?)(\d):(\d*)$/) { # Time Zone adjustment needs to subtract if ($1) { $EpochTime −= ($2 * 60 * 60) + ($3 * 60); } else { $EpochTime += ($2 * 60 * 60) + ($3 * 60); } } # Adjust for day light savings time # Fire The Trap Into HP OpenView # # The 6th value on the trapgen string (right next to # the generic trap number (6)) is the specific trap # number. This has to be associated with some event # configured in HP OpenView. (i.e. 6 3 105 - The ‘3’ # is the specific trap ID) # system(“/opt/bin/trapgen nsmmws16 1.3.6.1.4.1.78 $A 6 3 105 1.3.6.1.4.1.78.0.3 octetstringascii 1000002 1.3.6.1.4.1.78.0.3 octetstringascii $EpochTime 1.3.6.1.4.1.78.0.3 octetstringascii 5”); # # Subroutine: SA_(—)IcmpStatusRecoverHPOV # Overview: Fires recovery trap notifying the # NMS that the enterprise alarm is # recovered. # # Fires ‘Alarm’ trap into HP OpenView for # processing using the PERL ‘system’ # function and the ECM ‘trapgen’ # command. # #_(————————————————————————————————) # # Configuration Of Variables # # Instantiate Local Variables # - Make the variables (“my”) local to keep them out of #   the global name space. Single step alarm, so no #   need for global variables. # my $EpochTime=0; my @DaysPerMonth = (31, 28, 31, 30, 31, 30, 31, 31, 30, 31, 30, 31); my $year,$mon,$day,$hour,$min,$sec; my $TZAdjust,$DSTAdjust; my $ShowDebug,$NumLeapYear,$SecondsThisInterval; my $SnmpTrapTimestamp,$SnmpTrapNode, $SA_(—)CorrEnt_(—)NotifyOvTrapString ; # Initialize Date/Time Variables # - 2d line turns year into 4-digit year (i.e. 19xx) #   as localtime function returns year-1900. Timestamp #   design is standard for phase 2 development. # $year = ((localtime( ))[5]); $mon = ((localtime( ))[4]); $day = ((localtime( ))[3]); $hour = ((localtime( ))[2]); $min = ((localtime( ))[1]); $sec = ((localtime( ))[0]); # Determine number of seconds for years if ($year < 200) { # year is in two digit form if ($year < 90) { # year is presumably in the 21st century $year += 2000; } else { # year is presumably in the 20th century $year += 1900; } } # Do not return negatives − and if 2100 or later, add to leap year calcs if ($year < 1970 || $year >= 2100) { return 0; } $year −= 1970; $SecondsThisInterval = $year * 365 * 24 * 60 * 60; # leap year calculations $NumLeapYears = int(($year+2)/4); if (($year+2) % 4 ═ 0) { # this is a leap year (assuming 1970–2099) # check if we have hit feb 29 yet: # recall, mon is 0-based if ($mon <= 1) { # we need to subtract a year, as this is jan $NumLeapYears--; } } $SecondsThisInterval += $NumLeapYears * 24 * 60 * 60; $EpochTime += $SecondsThisInterval; # Determine number of seconds for months so far while($mon--) { $EpochTime += $DaysPerMonth[$mon] * 24 * 60 * 60; } # Determine number of seconds for days so far $EpochTime += ($day − 1) * 24 * 60 * 60; # Determine number of seconds for hours so far $EpochTime += $hour * 60 * 60; # Determine number of seconds for minutes so far $EpochTime += $min * 60; # Determine number of seconds for seconds so far $EpochTime += $sec; # Adjust for time zone (which should be of the form −12:00 .. 12:00) # THIS SHOULD USE ACTUAL TIME ZONE CODES $TZAdjust = “5:00”; if ($TZAdjust =~ /{circumflex over ( )}(−?)(\d):(\d*)$/) { # Time Zone adjustment needs to subtract if ($1) { $EpochTime −= ($2 * 60 * 60) + ($3 * 60); } else { $EpochTime += ($2 * 60 * 60) + ($3 * 60); } } # Adjust for day light savings time # Fire The Trap Into HP OpenView # # The 6th value on the trapgen string (right next to # the generic trap number (6)) is the specific trap # number. This has to be associated with some event # configured in HP OpenView. (i.e. 6 3 105 - The ‘3’ # is the specific trap ID) # system(“/opt/seasoft/bin/trapgen nsmmws16 1.3.6.1.4.1.78 $A 6.4 105 1.3.6.1.4.1.78.0.4 octetstringascii 1000003 1.3.6.1.4.1.78.0.4 octetstringascii $EpochTime 1.3.6.1.4.1.78.0.4 octetstringascii 1”); # # Subroutine: SA_(—)ifEntry_(—)C2Rate_(—)Util # Overview: Counter To Rate Conversion Script # Builds Utilization Percentage And # Rate For Interface Instances. # #_(————————————————————————————————) # # Configuration # # Declare Local Variables. # my $ifSpeed,$Old_(—)ifInOctets,$Old_(—)ifOutOctets; my $New_(—)ifInOctets,$New_(—)ifOutOctets; my $Old_(—)ifInOctets,$Old_(—)ifOutOctets; my $Delta_(—)ifInOctets,$Delta_(—)ifOutOctets; my $Summed_(—)Octets,$Converted_(—)To_(—)Bits; my $New_(—)Timestamp,$Old_(—)Timestamp,$Delta_(—)Time; my $BPS,$Utilization_(—)Percentage; my $sec,$min,$hour,$mday,$mon,$year,$wday,$yday,$isdst; my $Maximum_(—)Counter_(—)Size = 4294967295; # Construct Initial Time Variables ($sec,$min,$hour,$mday,$mon,$year,$wday,$yday,$isdst) = localtime (time); # Fix 19xx Year $year = 1900 + $year; $New_(—)Timestamp = “$year-$mon-$mday $hour:$min:$sec”; $Old_(—)Timestamp = $Saved_(—)Timestamp {$pollkey}; # Get New Interface Values $ifSpeed = ifEntry.ifSpeed; $New_(—)ifInOctets = ifEntry.ifInOctets; $New_(—)ifOutOctets = ifEntry.ifOutOctets; # Retrieve Old Interface Values $Old_(—)ifInOctets = $Saved_(—)ifInOctets {$pollkey}; $Old_(—)ifOutOctets = $Saved_(—)ifOutOctets {$pollkey}; #_(——————————————) # # Data Manipulation # # Gather And Build ifInOctets Delta # $Delta_(—)ifInOctets = $New_(—)ifInOctets − $Old_(—)ifInOctets; if($Delta_(—)ifInOctets < 0) { $Delta_(—)ifInOctets = ($Maximum_(—)Counter_(—)Size − $Old_(—)ifInOctets) + $New_(—)ifInOctets; } # Gather And Build ifOutOctets Delta # $Delta_(—)ifOutOctets = $New_(—)ifOutOctets − $Old_(—)ifOutOctets; if($Delta_(—)ifOutOctets < 0) { $Delta_(—)ifOutOctets = ($Maximum_(—)Counter_(—)Size − $Old_(—) ifOutOctets) + $New_(—)ifOutOctets; } # Gather And Build Timestamp Delta # - Octets Are Made Of 8 Bits - i.e. The Conversion # $Summed_(—)Octets = $Delta_(—)ifInOctets + $Delta_(—)ifOutOctets; $Converted_(—)To_(—)Bits = $Summed_(—)Octets * 8; $Delta_(—)Time = SubtractTime($Old_(—)Timestamp,$New_(—)Timestamp); # Do The Math - Create Deliverable Values (Rate And Counter) # $BPS = $Converted_(—)To_(—)Bits/$Delta_(—)Time; $Utilization_(—)Percentage = ($BPS / $ifSpeed) * 100; #_(————————————————————————————————) # # Report Data Findings To Log File # # Open The Log File And Write The Data To Disk # open(LOG,“>>/opt/seasoft/userfiles/logs/SA_(—)ifEntry_(—)C2Rate_(—)Util.dat”); if(LOG) { printf LOG “%s,InterfaceUtilization_(—)Percent,%s,%s,%.3f\n”,$N,$OI,$New_(—) Timestamp,$Utilization_(—)Percentage; printf LOG “%s,InterfaceUtilization_(—)BPS,%s,%s,%.3f\n”,$N,$OI,$New_(—)Timestamp, $BPS; close LOG; } else { # # If An Error On Opening The Log File Then Open Error File # And Write To Disk # open(LOG,“>>/usr/seasoft/userfiles/logs/SA_(—)ifEntry_(—)C2Rate_(—)Util.err”); print LOG “$New_(—)Timestamp:Unable To Write To Log SA_(—)ifEntry_(—)C2Rate_(—)Util.log”; close LOG; } #_(————————————————————————————————) # # Update The Global Data Hashes # $Saved_(—)ifInOctets {$pollkey} = $New_(—)ifInOctets; $Saved_(—)ifOutOctets {$pollkey} = $New_(—)ifOutOctets; $Saved_(—)Timestamp {$pollkey} = $New_(—)Timestamp; # #_(————————————————————————————————) #_(————————————————————————————————) # # Subroutine - Builds Deltas For Use By Main Handler # Script. Inputs timestamps in form of # ‘YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss’ and returns # delta in form of seconds elapsed. # sub SubtractTime { # Declare Local Variables my $date1,$date2,$year1,$year2,$months1; my $months2; my $days1,$days2,$time1,$time2,$hours1; my $hours2,$mins1,$mins2,$secs1,$secs2; my $result1,$result2,$DifferenceInSeconds; # assuming YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss format # (24hr representation) # Convert Date/Time To Seconds ($date1,$time1) = split(“ ”,$_(—)[0]); ($year1,$months1,$days1) = split(“−”,$date1); ($hours1,$mins1,$secs1) = split(“:”,$time1); $result1 = $year1*31104000+$months1*2592000+$days1*86400+$hours1*3600+ $mi ns1*60+$secs1; # assuming YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss format # (24hr representation) # Convert Date/Time To Seconds ($date2,$time2) = split(“ ”,$_(—)[1]); ($year2,$months2,$days2) = split(“−”,$date2); ($hours2,$mins2,$secs2) = split(“:”,$time2); $result2 = $year2*31104000+$months2*2592000+$days2*86400+$hours2*3600+ $mi ns2*60+$secs2; # Get Delta $DifferenceInSeconds = $result2 − $result1; return($DifferenceInSeconds); } # # Subroutine: SA_(—)NodeMonitor_(—)BuildTrap # Overview: Trap VarBind Builder # #_(————————————————————————————————) # # Configuration # # Declare Local Variables # my $sec,$min,$hour,$mday,$mon,$year,$wday,$yday,$isdst; ($sec,$min,$hour,$mday,$mon,$year,$wday,$yday,$isdst) = localtime (time); my $Timestamp,$Node; # Assign Values To Variables # $Node = $A; $year = 1900 + $year; $Timestamp = “$year-$mon-$mday $hour:$min:$sec”; # Build The Trap VarBind # $SA_(—)NodeMonitor_(—)varBind{$Node} = “Alarm|3000000|$Timestamp|$Node”; #_(————————————————————————————————) # # Subroutine: SA_(—)NodeMonitor_(—)NotifyHPOV # Overview: Fires ‘Alarm’ trap into HP OpenView for # processing using the PERL ‘system’ # function and the ECM ‘trapgen’ # command. # #_(————————————————————————————————) # # Configuration Of Variables # # Instantiate Local Variables # - Make the variables (“my”) local to keep them out of #   the global name space. Single step alarm, so no #   need for global variables. # my $EpochTime=0; my @DaysPerMonth = (31, 28, 31, 30, 31, 30, 31, 31, 30, 31, 30, 31); my $year,$mon,$day,$hour,$min,$sec; my $TZAdjust,$DSTAdjust; my $ShowDebug,$NumLeapYears,$SecondsThisInterval; my $SnmpTrapTimestamp,$SnmpTrapNode, $SA_(—)CorrEnt_(—)NotifyOvTrapString ; # Initialize Date/Time Variables # - 2d line turns year into 4-digit year (i.e. 19xx) #   as localtime function returns year-1900. Timestamp #   design is standard for phase 2 development. # $year = ((localtime( ))[5]); $mon = ((localtime( ))[4]); $day = ((localtime( ))[3]); $hour = ((localtime( ))[2]); $min = ((localtime( ))[1]); $sec = ((localtime( ))[0]); # Determine number of seconds for years if ($year < 200) { # year is in two digit form if ($year < 90) { # year is presumably in the 21st century $year += 2000; } else { # year is presumably in the 20th century $year += 1900; } } # Do not return negatives − and if 2100 or later, add to leap year calcs if ($year < 1970 || $year >= 2100) { return 0; } $year −= 1970; $SecondsThisInterval = $year * 365 * 24 * 60 * 60; # leap year calculations $NumLeapYears = int(($year+2)/4); if (($year+2) % 4 ═ 0) { # this is a leap year (assuming 1970–2099) # check if we have hit feb 29 yet: # recall, mon is 0-based if ($mon <= 1) { # we need to subtract a year, as this is jan $NumLeapYears--; } } $SecondsThisInterval +=$NumLeapYears * 24 * 60 * 60; $EpochTime += $SecondsThisInterval; # Determine number of seconds for months so far while($mon--) { $EpochTime += $DaysPerMonth[$mon] * 24 * 60 * 60; } # Determine number of seconds for days so far $EpochTime += ($day − 1) * 24 * 60 * 60; # Determine number of seconds for hours so far $EpochTime += $hour * 60 * 60; # Determine number of seconds for minutes so far $EpochTime += $min * 60; # Determine number of seconds for seconds so far $EpochTime += $sec; # Adjust for time zone (which should be of the form −12:00 .. 12:00) # THIS SHOULD USE ACTUAL TIME ZONE CODES $TZAdjust = “5:00”; if ($TZAdjust =~ /{circumflex over ( )}(−?)(\d):(\d*)$/) { # Time Zone adjustment needs to subtract if ($1) { $EpochTime −= ($2 * 60 * 60) + ($3 * 60); } else { $EpochTime += ($2 * 60 * 60) + ($3 * 60); } } # Adjust for day light savings time # Fire The Trap Into HP OpenView # # The 6th value on the trapgen string (right next to # the generic trap number (6)) is the specific trap # number. This has to be associated with some event # configured in HP OpenView. (i.e. 6 3 105 - The ‘3’ # is the specific trap ID) # system(“/opt/seasoft/bin/trapgen nsmmws16 1.3.6.1.4.1.78 $A 6 3 105 1.3.6.1.4.1.78.0.3 octetstringascii 3000000 1.3.6.1.4.1.78.0.3 octetstringascii $EpochTime 1.3.6.1.4.1.78.0.3 octetstringascii 5”); #_(————————————————————————————————) # # Subroutine: SA_(—)NodeMonitor_(—)RecoverHPOV # Overview: Fires ‘Recover’ trap into HP OpenView for # processing using the PERL ‘system’ # function and the ECM ‘trapgen’ # command. # #_(————————————————————————————————) # Variable Declarations # # # Configuration Of Variables # # Instantiate Local Variables # - Make the variables (“my”) local to keep them out of #   the global name space. Single step alarm, so no #   need for global variables. # my $EpochTime=0; my @DaysPerMonth = (31, 28, 31, 30, 31, 30, 31, 31, 30, 31, 30, 31); my $year,$mon,$day,$hour,$min,$sec; my $TZAdjust,$DSTAdjust; my $ShowDebug,$NumLeapYears,$SecondsThisInterval; my $SnmpTrapTimestamp,$SnmpTrapNode, $SA_(—)CorrEnt_(—)NotifyOvTrapString ; # Initialize Date/Time Variables # - 2d line turns year into 4-digit year (i.e. 19xx) #  as localtime function returns year-1900. Timestamp #  design is standard for phase 2 development. # $year = ((localtime( ))[5]); $mon = ((localtime( ))[4]); $day = ((localtime( ))[3]); $hour = ((localtime( ))[2]); $min = ((localtime( ))[1]); $sec = ((localtime( ))[0]); # Determine number of seconds for years if ($year < 200) { # year is in two digit form if ($year < 90) { # year is presumably in the 21st century $year += 2000; } else { # year is presumably in the 20th century $year += 1900; } } # Do not return negatives − and if 2100 or later, add to leap year calcs if ($year < 1970 || $year >= 2100) { return 0; } $year −= 1970; $SecondsThisInterval = $year * 365 * 24 * 60 * 60; # leap year calculations $NumLeapYears = int(($year+2)/4); if (($year+2) % 4 ═ 0) { # this is a leap year (assuming 1970–2099) # check if we have hit feb 29 yet: # recall, mon is 0-based if ($mon <= 1) { # we need to subtract a year, as this is jan $NumLeapYears--; } } $SecondsThisInterval += $NumLeapYears * 24 * 60 * 60; $EpochTime += $SecondsThisInterval; # Determine number of seconds for months so far while($mon--) { $EpochTime += $DaysPerMonth[$mon] * 24 * 60 * 60; } # Determine number of seconds for days so far $EpochTime += ($day − 1) * 24 * 60 * 60; # Determine number of seconds for hours so far $EpochTime += $hour * 60 * 60; # Determine number of seconds for minutes so far $EpochTime += $min * 60; # Determine number of seconds for seconds so far $EpochTime += $sec; # Adjust for time zone (which should be of the form −12:00 .. 12:00) # THIS SHOULD USE ACTUAL TIME ZONE CODES $TZAdjust = “5:00”; if ($TZAdjust =~ /{circumflex over ( )}(−?)(\d):(\d*)$/) { # Time Zone adjustment needs to subtract if ($1) { $EpochTime −= ($2 * 60 * 60) + ($3 * 60); } else { $EpochTime += ($2 * 60 * 60) + ($3 * 60); } } # Adjust for day light savings time # Fire The Trap Into HP OpenView # # The 6th value on the trapgen string (right next to # the generic trap number (6)) is the specific trap # number. This has to be associated with some event # configured in HP OpenView. (i.e. 6 3 105 - The ‘3’ # is the specific trap ID) # system(“/opt/bin/trapgen nsmmws16 1.3.6.1.4.1.78 nsmmws09 6 4 105 1.3.6.1.4.1.78.0.4 octetstringascii 3000001 1.3.6.1.4.1.78.0.4 octetstringascii $EpochTime 1.3.6.1.4.1.78.0.4 octetstringascii 1”); #_(————————————————————————————————) # # Subroutine: SA_(—)Parameters_(—)TestScript # Overview: Simple test script to show variable # values in an ECM environment # #_(————————————————————————————————) open (LOG1,“>/opt/userfiles/logs/testTmp”); print LOG1 “nodeName = $nodeName\n”; print LOG1 “community string of the transition = $COM\n”; print LOG1 “property group of the transition's node = $NPG\n”; print LOG1 “address of the transition's node = $trapPduAgentAddress\n”; print LOG1 “NAL = $NAL\n”; print LOG1 “property listed in the alarm definition's property field = $APG\n”; print LOG1 “Alarm definition name = $ADN\n”; print LOG1 “State name where transition begins − the origination state = $OSN\n”; print LOG1 “NC severity of the origination state = $OSS\n”; print LOG1 “State name where transition ends − the dest state = $DSN\n”; print LOG1 “NC severity of the dest state = $DSS\n”; print LOG1 “Platform sev name for the orig. state = $POSS\n”; print LOG1 “Platform sev name for the dest. state = $PDSS\n”; print LOG1 “Max NC sev of the orig. state = $MOSS\n”; print LOG1 “Max NC sev of the dest. state = $MDSS\n”; print LOG1 “Max platform sev name for the orig. state = $MPOSS\n”; print LOG1 “Max platform sev name for the dest. state = $MPDSS\n”; print LOG1 “Trigger name = $TRN\n”; print LOG1 “The trigger's base obj. = $ON\n”; print LOG1 “Instance info of the base obj = $OI\n”; print LOG1 “pollkey = $pollkey\n”; print LOG1 “Trap generic = $TGN\n”; print LOG1 “Trap specific = $TSN\n”; print LOG1 “Trap enterprise = $TEN\n”; print LOG1 “Trap timestamp = $TTN\n”; print LOG1 “Trap community = $TCS\n”; print LOG1 “VbObject = $VbObject(0)\n”; print LOG1 “VbAttrib = $VbAttribute(0)\n”; print LOG1 “VbValue = $VbValue(0)\n”; close LOG1; # # Subroutine: SA_(—)SnmpStatus_(—)NotifyHPOV # Overview: Fires alarm trap notifying the # NMS that the enterprise alarm is # instantiated. # # Fires ‘Alarm’ trap into HP OpenView for # processing using the PERL ‘system’ # function and the ECM ‘trapgen’ # command. # #_(————————————————————————————————) # # Configuration Of Variables # # Instantiate Local Variables # - Make the variables (“my”) local to keep them out of #   the global name space. Single step alarm, so no #   need for global variables. # my $EpochTime=0; my @DaysPerMonth = (31, 28, 31, 30, 31, 30, 31, 31, 30, 31, 30, 31); my $year,$mon,$day,$hour,$min,$sec; my $TZAdjust,$DSTAdjust; my $ShowDebug,$NumLeapYears,$SecondsThisInterval; my $SnmpTrapTimestamp,$SnmpTrapNode, $SA_(—)CorrEnt_(—)NotifyOvTrapString ; # Initialize Date/Time Variables # - 2d line turns year into 4-digit year (i.e. 19xx) #   as localtime function returns year-1900. Timestamp #   design is standard for phase 2 development. # $year = ((localtime( ))[5]); $mon = ((localtime( ))[4]); $day = ((localtime( ))[3]); $hour = ((localtime( ))[2]); $min = ((localtime( ))[1]); $sec = ((localtime( ))[0]); # Determine number of seconds for years if ($year < 200) { # year is in two digit form if ($year < 90) { # year is presumably in the 21st century $year += 2000; } else { # year is presumably in the 20th century $year += 1900; } } # Do not return negatives − and if 2100 or later, add to leap year calcs if ($year < 1970 || $year >= 2100) { return 0; } $year −= 1970; $SecondsThisInterval = $year * 365 * 24 * 60 * 60; # leap year calculations $NumLeapYears = int(($year+2)/4); if (($year+2) % 4 ═ 0) { # this is a leap year (assuming 1970–2099) # check if we have hit feb 29 yet: # recall, mon is 0-based if ($mon <= 1) { # we need to subtract a year, as this is jan $NumLeapYears--; } } $SecondsThisInterval += $NumLeapYears * 24 * 60 * 60; $EpochTime += $SecondsThisInterval; # Determine number of seconds for months so far while($mon--) { $EpochTime += $DaysPerMonth[$mon] * 24 * 60 * 60; } # Determine number of seconds for days so far $EpochTime += ($day − 1) * 24 * 60 * 60; # Determine number of seconds for hours so far $EpochTime += $hour * 60 * 60; # Determine number of seconds for minutes so far $EpochTime += $min * 60; # Determine number of seconds for seconds so far $EpochTime += $sec; # Adjust for time zone (which should be of the form −12:00 .. 12:00) # THIS SHOULD USE ACTUAL TIME ZONE CODES $TZAdjust = “5:00”; if ($TZAdjust =~ /{circumflex over ( )}(−?)(\d):(\d*)$/) { # Time Zone adjustment needs to subtract if ($1) { $EpochTime −= ($2 * 60 * 60) + ($3 * 60); } else { $EpochTime += ($2 * 60 * 60) + ($3 * 60); } } # Adjust for day light savings time # Fire The Trap Into HP OpenView # # The 6th value on the trapgen string (right next to # the generic trap number (6)) is the specific trap # number. This has to be associated with some event # configured in HP OpenView. (i.e. 6 3 105 - The ‘3’ # is the specific trap ID) # system(“/opt/seasoft/bin/trapgen nsmmws16 1.3.6.1.4.1.78 $A 6 3 105 1.3.6.1.4.1.78.0.3 octetstringascii 1001014 1.3.6.1.4.1.78.0.3 octetstringascii $EpochTime 1.3.6.1.4.1.78.0.3 octetstringascii 5”); # # Subroutine: SA_(—)SnmpStatus_(—)RecoverHPOV # Overview: Fires recovery trap notifying the # NMS that the enterprise alarm is # recovered. # # Fires ‘Alarm’ trap into HP OpenView for # processing using the PERL ‘system’ # function and the ECM ‘trapgen’ # command. # #_(————————————————————————————————) # # Configuration Of Variables # # Instantiate Local Variables # - Make the variables (“my”) local to keep them out of #   the global name space. Single step alarm, so no #   need for global variables. # my $EpochTime=0; my @DaysPerMonth = (31, 28, 31, 30, 31, 30, 31, 31, 30, 31, 30, 31); my $year,$mon,$day,$hour,$min,$sec; my $TZAdjust,$DSTAdjust; my $ShowDebug,$NumLeapYears,$SecondsThisInterval; my $SnmpTrapTimestamp,$SnmpTrapNode,$SA_(—)CorrEnt_(—) NotifyOvTrapString ; # Initialize Date/Time Variables # - 2d line turns year into 4-digit year (i.e. 19xx) #   as localtime function returns year-1900. Timestamp #   design is standard for phase 2 development. # $year = ((localtime( ))[5]); $mon = ((localtime( ))[4]); $day = ((localtime( ))[3]); $hour = ((localtime( ))[2]); $min = ((localtime( ))[1]); $sec = ((localtime( ))[0]); # Determine number of seconds for years if ($year < 200) { # year is in two digit form if ($year < 90) { # year is presumably in the 21st century $year += 2000; } else { # year is presumably in the 20th century $year += 1900; } } # Do not return negatives − and if 2100 or later, add to leap year calcs if ($year < 1970 || $year > 2100) { return 0; } $year −= 1970; $SecondsThisInterval = $year * 365 * 24 * 60 * 60; # leap year calculations $NumLeapYears = int(($year+2)/4); if (($year+2) % 4 ═ 0) { # this is a leap year (assuming 1970–2099) # check if we have hit feb 29 yet: # recall, mon is 0-based if ($mon <= 1) { # we need to subtract a year, as this is jan $NumLeapYears--; } } $SecondsThisInterval += $NumLeapYears * 24 * 60 * 60; $EpochTime += $SecondsThisInterval; # Determine number of seconds for months so far while($mon--) { $EpochTime += $DaysPerMonth[$mon] * 24 * 60 * 60; } # Determine number of seconds for days so far $EpochTime += ($day − 1) * 24 * 60 * 60; # Determine number of seconds for hours so far $EpochTime += $hour * 60 * 60; # Determine number of seconds for minutes so far $EpochTime += $min * 60; # Determine number of seconds for seconds so far $EpochTime += $sec; # Adjust for time zone (which should be of the form −12:00 .. 12:00) # THIS SHOULD USE ACTUAL TIME ZONE CODES $TZAdjust = “5:00”; if ($TZAdjust =~ /{circumflex over ( )}(−?)(\d):(\d*)$/) { # Time Zone adjustment needs to subtract if ($1) { $EpochTime −= ($2 * 60 * 60) + ($3 * 60); } else { $EpochTime += ($2 * 60 * 60) + ($3 * 60); } } # Adjust for day light savings time # Fire The Trap Into HP OpenView # # The 6th value on the trapgen string (right next to # the generic trap number (6)) is the specific trap # number. This has to be associated with some event # configured in HP OpenView. (i.e. 6 3 105 - The ‘3’ # is the specific trap ID) # system(“/opt/bin/trapgen nsmmws16 1.3.6.1.4.1.78 $A 6 4 105 1.3.6.1.4.1.78.0.4 octetstringascii 1001015 1.3.6.1.4.1.78.0.4 octetstringascii $EpochTime 1.3.6.1.4.1.78.0.4 octetstringascii 1”); Collector Process Control

This section provides information regarding Collector Process Control.

DESCRIPTION

Collector Process Control is used to start and stop Collector components and monitor their execution. It allows for a single point of control for the components of the system. The process control system contains the following elements:

-   -   Process Control Agents, which are programs installed on each         host with the responsibility of managing processes.     -   A set of command line utilities to provide an interface to         process management

The process control agents cooperate automatically and have memory for their configuration.

Configuration

All configuration for Collector Process Control is done in NCO_(—)PA.conf. This file is referenced at start-up time to establish configuration information. The file is made up of a number of records each of which contain various attributes and associated val ues. One should edit this file directly to add any new processes or modify configuration information. There are three sections to the NCO_(—)PA.conf file:

Processes:

-   -   Processes are programs that are executed by a process control         agent.     -   Processes can be configured to be dependent on each other.     -   Process definitions take on the following format:

nco_(—)process ‘MasterObjectServer’ { Command ‘/opt/ECM/bin/nco_(—)objserv -name NCOMS -pa NCO_(—)PA’ run as 0 Host     =  ‘twmmdb02’ Managed =  True RestartMsg =  ‘Master Object Server running as $ {EUID} has been restored on $ {HOST}.’ AlertMsg  =  ‘Master Object Server running as $ {EUID} has died on $ {HOST}.’ RetryCount = 0 ProcessType = PaPA_(—)AWARE } Services:

-   -   A service is made up of several processes, which are executed by         process control agents.     -   A service may be configured to start up automatically when the         process control agent starts or to wait until the service is         started manually.     -   There are two grades of service: master and non-master. These         grades are used when services are automatically started.     -   A master service will have its processes started before a         non-master service.     -   Service definitions have the following format:

nco_(—)service ‘Core’ { ServiceType =  Master ServiceStart =  Auto process ‘MasterObjectServer’ NONE } Agent Hosts: Used to specify the available hosts to contact Host definitions have the following format: nco_(—)routing { host ‘twmmdb02’ ‘NCO_(—)PA’ } Commands NCO_(—)PAD

The NCO_(—)PAD command is used to begin COllector Process Control. In order to start process control the following comand should be entered:

-   -   Nco_(—)pad-name NCO_(—)PA-debug 1

This command begins the process agent named NCO_(—)PA with a debug option of 1. Error and debug information is listed in the nco_(—)pa.log file located in the /opt/Collector/log directory.

Collector Gateway

Description of Use

The Collector Gateway is used to integrate the Collector system with databases. The gateway is made up of three items: readers, writers and routes. The readers extract alerts from the object server, while the writer is used to forward the alerts to the database. Routes create the link between the readers and writers.

Configuration

The configuration information for the Collector Gateway is stored in the COLLECTOR_(—)GATE.cortf file in the /opt/Collector/etc directory. In this file, mappings are created. The mappings tell the gateway which fields from the Object Server table should be placed in the database and with what name. It is important to make sure that the number of items detailed in the mapping configuration equals the number and name of fields setup in the database. This file also contains configuration information for the readers, writers and routes. Below is an example Gateway configuration file:

CREATE MAPPING COLLECTOR_(—)MAP ( ‘ELEMNT_(—)KEY_(—)CD’ =‘@DatabaseElementKey’, ‘EVENT_(—)KEY_(—)CD’ =‘@EventCode’, ‘PERF_(—)TIME_(—)KEY_(—)CD’=‘@LastOccurrence’, ‘EVENT_(—)DURATION_(—)VALUE’=‘@Duration’, ‘EVENT_(—)STRING_(—)TXT’=‘@Summary’, ‘EVENT_(—)SVRTY_(—)CD’ =‘@OriginalSeverit’ ); # Start up the reader - connect to the Object Server NCOMS CREATE FILTER LOG AS ‘LoggedToDatabase = 0’; START READER COLLECTOR_(—)READ CONNECT TO NCOMS USING FILTER LOG ORDER BY ‘Serial asc’ AFTER IDUC DO ‘update alerts.status set LoggedToDatabase=1’; # Start up the writer # START WRITER COLLECTOR_(—)WRITE ( TYPE = COLLECTOR, REVISION = 1, MAP = COLLECTOR_(—)MAP, USERNAME = ‘Collector’, PASSWORD = ‘Collector’, STATUS_(—)TABLE = ‘EVENTS_(—)FACT_(—)TB’, FORWARD_(—)INSERTS = TRUE, FORWARD_(—)UPDATES = TRUE, FORWARD_(—)DELETES = TRUE ); # Add a route from the reader to the writer so the info gets passed ADD ROUTE FROM COLLECTOR_(—)READ TO COLLECTOR_(—)WRITE; Commands NCO_(—)GATE

The NCO_(—)GATE command is used to startup the Collector gateway. The syntax of the command is as follows:

-   -   opt/Collector/bin/Nco_(—)gate-name COLLECTOR_(—)GATE-debug 1;

The debug option sends debug and error information to the file opt/ECM/log/COLLECTOR_(—)GATE.log.

NCO_(—)XIGEN

The NCO_(—)XIGEN command is used to access the Servers Editor window to edit port and name configuration of the Collector Gateway. The command syntax is as follows:

-   -   opt/Collector/bin/nco_(—)xigen

You will need to add the Collector Gateway to the Servers Editor window with its own port number in order for the gateway to communicate with the Object Server as well as the Databases.

Environment Variables

In order for the gateway to open and communicate with databases, environment variables must be set before starting the gateway. In order to do this, a wrapper script was created around the nco_(—)gate command in order to set the environment variables as well as start the gateway. The wrapper script is located in the directory /opt/Collector/bin. When run from the command line the script sets the needed variables and starts the Collector gateway. The environment variables set within the script are as follows:

COLLECTOR_(—)SID=IPSA01 COLLECTOR_(—)HOME=/files0/ipsa/vendor/Collector/product/7.3.4 COLLECTOR_(—)BASE=/files0/ipsa/vendor/Collector LD_(—)LIBRARY_(—)PATH=/files0/ipsa/vendor/Collector/product/7.3.4/lib TNS_(—)ADMIN=/files0/ipsa/vendor/Collector/product/7.3.4/network/admin Collector Internet Service Monitoring (ISM)

This section will discuss the Service Assurance test environment specific details of the Collector Internet Service Monitors (ISM's) and requirements for a remote installation.

Internet Service Monitors Remote Installation

Location of the Collector ISM's

The remote installation of the ISM's in on nsmmws09. The ISM's are installed in the /opt/Collector directory.

Prerequisites for a remote installation of the ISM's

In order to create all of the required directories and shared libraries for the ISM's an installation of Collector must proceed the ISM's installation on the same remote host.

Probes and Process Control should be the only two components selected for the Collector installation on the remote host.

Even if the use of Probes is not required on the remote host, selecting Probes will create the directories required by components that allow the ISM's to run properly (Collector/etc and Collector/var directories and required API libraries).

The Collector/etc directory is where the interfaces file (discussed bellow) will be placed. The Collector/var directory is where all event data is kept while any Monitors are in Store and Forward mode (when the ObjectServer is off-line).

Process Control will insure that the Monitors are restarted in the event they unexpectedly go down.

Remote Communication Between the ISM's and Collector (Objectserver)

The Collector installation comes with a file (/opt/Collector/etc) that generates interfaces.platform files, where platform is the OS of the machine remote Collector components (software) will be installed on. The interfaces.platform files contain information on where to look for the license server as well as how and were to communicate with the Collector ObjectServer.

The interfaces platform file should be placed in the ECM/etc directory of the remote installation for use by remote components.

Internet Service Monitoring Configuration

Extended Use of the On-Line Configuration Tool

The on-line configuration tool, if run from a web server, requires the start_(—)java.sh script (/opt/Collector/monitors/config) to be running. This script has a timeout line, which by default is set to ten minutes (in seconds). If the on-line configuration tool is idle for more than ten minutes, a server error will be generated the next time the tool is requested. Running the script from the command line is required before using the tool again. For a work around, the timeout value has been set to 3600 seconds (one hour) to increase the time the configuration tool can be accessed.

Store and Forward Function

Store and forward is a function that allows monitors and probes to record all event messages to an ObjectServer.store file while the Objectserver is down. This file will be located in the Collector/var directory.

The store and forward function is set to 0 (off) by default with the ISM's. The store and forward function has been turned on for the ISM's installed on nsmmws09 by using VI to set store and forward to 1 (on). This is done in the monitor.props files (/opt/Collector/monitors/solaris2).

HTTP Service

The Web Servers on twmmnt02 (Microsoft IIS) and nsmmws09 (Netscape Fast-Track Server) are being monitored. The polling interval is set at fifteen minutes.

A method of sending intentional “Server down” events to Collector is to stop the Fast-Track Server on nsmmws09. This can be done by running the start-admin script in the /opt/netscape/suitespot directory. Then open a Netscape browser and enter http://nsmmws09:26339 (username: webadmin password: same as noc) which opens the on-line, Fast-Track Server administration page. This page contains an on/off switch for the server.

FTP Service (file transfer protocol)

FTP service will be tested on nsmmws16. The service is downloading a 3 mb file from nsmmws16 (/sa/dev/dat/tmp/ism_(—)test_(—)data) to nsmmws09 (/opt/Collector/ftp_(—)test_(—)file)

NNTP Service (network news transport protocol)

Comp.protocols.snmp has been used as the news group to test. The polling interval is set at fifteen minutes.

SMTP Service (simple mail transport protocol)

The polling interval is set at fifteen minutes.

POP-3 Service (post office protocol)

The polling interval is set at fifteen minutes.

Collector Configuration

Object Server Customizations

The customizations to the object server include alterations to the alerts.status tables, custom triggers, and custom automations.

Table Customizations: alerts.status table

The structure of all the object server tables is defined in the file NCOMS.sql. The following table lists all the additional fields added to the object server table alerts.status:

TABLE 25 Field Name Data Type Description EventCode int Unique event code Duration int CheckedNotify int SustainedAlert int 0 = No regeneration needed 1 = This event has been regenerated 2 = This event needs to be regenerated NotifyAction char(255) NotifyPending int LoggedToDatabase int −2 = Do not log this event −1 = Wait 0 = This event is ready to be logged 1 = This event has been logged DatabaseElementKey int DatabaseTimeKey int OpenTicket int 0 = Do not open a ticket for this event 1 = Open a ticket for this event TicketNumber char(64) Remedy trouble ticket number OriginalSeverity int AlertType int 0 = This event is non-paired 1 = This event is a paired alert start 2 = This event is a paired alert stop AlertStopTime int OriginalOccurrence Int TimeKeyLogged Int MidnightTime Int Time (in epoch seconds) of the first previous midnight RegenMidnightTime Int RegenIdentifier char(255) TempInt Int TempChar char(64) DebugFieldInt Int DebugFieldChar char(64) Cusotm Triggers and Automations

Event Expiration Trigger: DeleteClears delete from alerts.status where Severity = 0 and StateChange < (getdate - 129600); Action: None Match alert stops Trigger: FindAlertStops select * from alerts.status where AlertType = 2; Action: RemoveAlertStops update alerts.status set Severity = 0, AlertStopTime = @FirstOccurrence, DebugFieldChar = \‘RemoveAlertStops ran\’ where Severity < > 0 and AlertType = 1 and Node = \‘@Node\’ and EventCode = @EventCode − 1 ‘,’and LastOccurrence <= @LastOccurrence; delete from alerts.status where Serial = @Serial; Duration Calculation Trigger: CalculateDuration select * from alerts.status where AlertType = 1 and Severity = 0 and Duration =−1; Action: SetDuration update alerts.status set LoggedToDatabase = 0,DebugFieldChar = \‘SetDuration just ran\’,Identifier = \‘@Node.@EventCode.@FirstOccurrence\’,Duration = (@AlertStopTime − @FirstOccurrence) whereSerial = @Serial; Regenerate Events Trigger1: FindEventsToRegen1 select * from alerts.status whereAlertType = 1 andDuration = 0 andFirstOccurrence > getdate − (hourofday*60*60) − (minuteofhour*60) − 86400 − 60 andFirstOccurrence < getdate − (hourofday*60*60) − (minuteofhour*60) − 60; Action1: ModifyAlertToRegen update alerts.statussetDuration = 86400 − (@FirstOccurrence − @MidnightTime), AlertStopTime = @MidnightTime + 86400, RegenIdentifier = \‘@Node @EventCode @MidnightTime\’, RegenMidnightTime = @MidnightTime + 86400, SustainedAlert = 2,‘,’ DebugFieldChar = \‘ModifyAlertToRegen\’ whereSerial = @Serial; Trigger2: FindEventsToRegen2 select * from alerts.status whereSustainedAlert = 2; Action2: InsertRegenAlert update alerts.statussetSustainedAlert = 1, Severity 0whereSerial = @Serial;insert into alerts.status values(\‘169 RegenIdentifier\’ ,0 ,\‘@Node\’ ,\‘@Node Alias\’ ,\‘@Manager\’ ,\‘@Agent\’ ,\‘@AlertGroup\’ ,‘,’\‘@AlertKey\’ ,@Severity ,\‘@Summary\’ ,0 ,@RegenMidnightTime ,@RegenMidnightTime ,0 ,@Poll ,@Type ,0 ,@Class ,@Grade ,\‘@Location\’,@OwnerUID ,@OwnerGID ,@Acknowledged ,@Flash ,\‘@S’,‘erverName\’ ,@ServerSerial ,@EventCode ,0 ,@CheckedNotify ,1 , \‘@NotifyAction\’ ,@NotifyPending ,0 ,@DatabaseElementKey ,0 ,@OpenTicket ,\‘@TicketNumber\’ ,@OriginalSeverity ,@AlertType ,0 ,‘,’@OriginalOccurrence ,@TimeKeyLogged ,@RegenMidnightTime ,0 ,\‘\’ ,0 ,\‘\’ ,0 ,\‘InsertRegenAlert\’ ); Logging Time Key Trigger: TimeKeyLogged select * from alerts.status where TimeKeyLogged= 0; Action: GenerateTimeKey update alerts.status setTimeKeyLogged=1whereSerial=@Serial; Notifications Trigger: AgetEventsToNotify select * from alerts.status where NotifyPending = 1; Action: TakeNotifyAction update alerts.statussetNotifyPending = 0whereSerial = @Serial; AND /opt/cOLLECTOR/utils/notify_(—)spooler.p1 @Node @EventCode @LastOccurrence @Summary Database logging Trigger: SelectLoggedToDbse select * from alerts.status where LoggedToDatabase=0andDatabaseElementKey< >0; Action: ChangeLoggedToDbse update alerts.status set LoggedToDatabase=1 whereSerial=@Serial; NCOMS.sql -- -- Collector definition file -- -- create database master; use database master; create table names ( Name char(64), UID int, GID int, Passwd char(64), Type int, unique ( Name ), permanent ); create table profiles ( UID int, HasRestrictionint, Restrict1 char(255), Restrict2 char(255), Restrict3 char(255), Restrict4 char(255), AllowISQL int, unique ( UID ), permanent ); create table groups ( Name char(64), GID int, unique ( Name ), permanent ); create table members ( KeyField char(64), UID int, GID int, unique( KeyField ), permanent ); -- -- The following table controls the statistics option -- Remove the comments to enable statistics gathering. Currently, this data -- is gathered but not used. -- -- You can comment out individual fields to stop that statistic being recorded -- but the StatTtime must be present for the statistics gather to work -- -- create table stats -- ( -- StatTime time, -- NumClients int, -- NumRealtime int, -- NumProbes int, -- NumGateways int, -- NumMonitors int, -- NumProxys int, -- EventCount int, -- JournalCount int, -- DetailCount int, -- unique( StatTime ), -- permanent -- ); create database auto; use database auto; create table triggers ( Name char(64), Cond1 char(255), Cond2 char(255), Cond3 char(255), Cond4 char(255), AutoExec char(64), DecExec char(64), OwnerUID int, Active int, Level int, EvalPeriod int, Threshold int, Hits int, ProcessAllHits int, Comment1 char(255), Comment2 char(255), Comment3 char(255), Comment4 char(255), unique ( Name ), permanent ); create table actions ( Name char(64), HasData int, Data1 char(255), Data2 char(255), Data3 char(255), Data4 char(255), HasExec int, ExecPath char(255), ExecArgs char(255), ExecHost char(64), EUID int, HasPhone int, PhoneArgs1 char(255), PhoneArgs2 char(255), PhoneArgs3 char(255), PhoneArgs4 char(255), Comment1 char(255), Comment2 char(255), Comment3 char(255), Comment4 char(255), unique ( Name ), permanent ); create database alerts; use database alerts; create table status ( Identifier char(255), Serial incr, Node char(64), NodeAlias char(64), Manager char(64), Agent char(64), AlertGroup char(64), AlertKey char(64), Severity int, Summary char(255), StateChange optime, FirstOccurrence time, LastOccurrence 1time, InternalLast timestamp, Poll int, Type int, Tally opcount, Class int, Grade int, Location char(64), OwnerUID int, OwnerGID int, -- Groups Option Acknowledged int, Flash int, -- Flash Option ServerName char(64), ServerSerial int, EventCode int, Duration int, CheckedNotify int, SustainedAlert int, NotifyAction char(255), NotifyPending int, LoggedToDatabase int, DatabaseElementKey int, DatabaseTimeKey int, OpenTicket int, TicketNumber char(64), OriginalSeverity int, AlertType int, AlertStopTimeint, OriginalOccurrence int, TimeKeyLogged int, MidnightTime int, RegenMidnightTime int, RegenIdentifier char(255), TempInt int, TempChar char(64), DebugFieldInt int, DebugFieldChar char(64), unique ( Identifier ), notify on ( change ), iduc on ( Serial ), permanent ); create table objclass ( Tag int, Name char(64), Icon char(255), Menu char(64), unique ( Tag ), permanent ); create table objmenus ( Menu char(64), Columns int, unique ( Menu ), permanent ); create table objmenuitems ( KeyField char(255), Menu char(64), Sequence int, Title char(64), Command1 char(255), Command2 char(255), Command3 char(255), Command4 char(255), RedirectStdin int, RedirectStdout int, RedirectStderr int, unique ( KeyField ), permanent ); create table resolutions ( KeyField char(255), Tag int, Sequence int, Title char(64), Resolution1 char(255), Resolution2 char(255), Resolution3 char(255), Resolution4 char(255), unique ( KeyField ), permanent ); create table journal ( KeyField char(255), Serial int, UID int, Chrono time, Text1 char(255), Text2 char(255), Text3 char(255), Text4 char(255), Text5 char(255), Text6 char(255), Text7 char(255), Text8 char(255), Text9 char(255), Text10 char(255), Text11 char(255), Text12 char(255), Text13 char(255), Text14 char(255), Text15 char(255), Text16 char(255), unique ( KeyField ), permanent ); create table conversions ( KeyField char(255), Colname char(255), Value int, Conversion char(255), unique ( KeyField ), permanent ); create table col_(—)visuals ( Colname char(255), Title char(255), DefWidth int, MaxWidth int, TitleJustify int, DataJustify int, unique ( Colname ), permanent ); create table details ( KeyField char(255), Identifier char(255), AttrVal int, Sequence int, Name char(255), Detail char(255), unique ( KeyField ), permanent ); -- This table is required for the NT desktop create table colors ( Severity int, AckedRed int, AckedGreen int, AckedBlue int, UnackedRed int, UnackedGreen int, UnackedBlue int, unique( Severity ), permanent ); -- The following database and table is required for the additional features -- to support the Internet Service Monitors create database service; use database service; create table status ( Name char(255), -- Service Name CurrentState int, -- Good, Marginal, Bad, Unknown StateChange time, -- Time of last service state change LastGoodAt time, -- Time service was last good LastBadAt time, -- Time service was last bad LastMarginalAt time, -- Time service was last marginal LastReportAt time, -- Time of last service status report unique ( Name ), permanent ); -- This database and table support the Java Event List and the Java JELD. -- It is maintained via the JACE configuration tool. create database jel; use database jel; create table jel_(—)props ( KeyField incr, ConfigName char(127), PropSet char(127), PropName char(127), PropVal char(255), unique ( KeyField ), permanent ); -- This database and tables are required for the NT desktop create database tools; use database tools; create table actions ( ActionID int, Name char(64), Owner int, Enabled int, Description1 char(255), Description2 char(255), Description3 char(255), Description4 char(255), HasInternal int, InternalComp1 char(255), InternalComp2 char(255), InternalComp3 char(255), InternalComp4 char(255), HasExternal int, ExternalComp1 char(255), ExternalComp2 char(255), ExternalComp3 char(255), ExternalComp4 char(255), ForEachSelected int, HasRemote int, RemoteComp1 char(255), RemoteComp2 char(255), RemoteComp3 char(255), RemoteComp4 char(255), HasURL int, URLComp1 char(255), URLComp2 char(255), URLComp3 char(255), URLComp4 char(255), Platform int, JournalText1 char(255), JournalText2 char(255), JournalText3 char(255), JournalText4 char(255), HasForcedJournal int, unique ( ActionID ), permanent ); create table action_(—)access ( ActionID int, GID int, ClassID int, ActionAccessID int, unique ( ActionAccessID ), permanent ); create table menus ( MenuID int, Name char(64), Owner int, Enabled int, unique ( MenuID ), permanent ); create table menu_(—)items ( KeyField char(32), -- menu_(—)id:menu_(—)item_(—)id MenuID int, MenuItemID int, Title char(64), Description char(255), Enabled int, InvokeType int, -- What type of invocation: Action/Submenu InvokeID int, Position int, Accelerator int, unique ( KeyField ), permanent ); NCOMS.auto.triggers.dat (Blank lines added to enhance readability.) use database auto; insert into triggers values ( ‘FindSpecifcSerial’,‘select * from alerts.status whereSerial >= 4691 andSerial <= 4693;’,″,″,″,‘DebugChangeField’,″,10431,0,1,60,0,0,1,″,″,″,″ ); insert into triggers values ( ‘DetectUnknownServices’,‘select * from service.status where LastReportAt < getdate − 3600;’,″,″,″,‘SetServiceUnknown’,″,0,0,0,600,0,0,1,‘This trigger detects services which have not been reported forthe given period. The associated action sets these services intothe unknown state.It is only needed with the Internet Service Monitors.’,″,″,″ ); insert into triggers values ( ‘CleanDetailsTable’,‘delete from alerts.details where Identifier not in ((select Identifier from alerts.status));’,″,″,″,″,″,0,1,1,601,0,0,0,‘This is a standard automation for clearing old entries from the details table.’,″,″,″); insert into triggers values ( ‘DeleteAllEvents’,‘delete from alerts.status where Serial < 4700;’,″,″,″,″,″,10431,0,1,60,0,0,1,″,″,″,″ ); insert into triggers values ( ‘AGetEventsToNotify’,‘select * from alerts.status where NotifyPending = 1;’,″,″,″,‘TakeNotifyAction’,″,10431,1,1,1,0,0,1,″,″,″,″ ); insert into triggers values ( ‘SelectLoggedToDbse’,‘select * from alerts.status where LoggedToDatabase=0andDatabaseElementKey< >0;’,″,″,″,‘ChangeLoggedToDbse’,″, 0,0,1,5,0,0,1,″,″,″,″ ); insert into triggers values ( ‘EscalateOff’,‘update alerts.status set Flash = 0, Grade = 0 where ((Flash = 1 or Grade > 0) and Acknowledged = 1) or (Severity = 0);’,″,″,″,″,″,0,0,1,6,0,0,0,‘Will set Flash field to 0 (not flashing) and Grade to 0 (not escalated in this example) when an event that has previously had the Flash field set to 1 or greater is either Acknowledged or Cleared (Severity = 0). ’,″,″,″ ); insert into triggers values ( ‘TimeKeyLogged’,‘select * from alerts.status whereTimeKeyLogged=0;’,″,″,″,‘GenerateTimeKey’,″,0,1,1,5,0,0,1,‘99Overview: This trigger selects all records from the alert_(—)status table who have a TimeKeyLogged value equal to zero. It then takes these records and runs the script TimeKeyGen’,‘erator for each row.’,″,″ ); insert into triggers values ( ‘FindAlertStops’,‘select * from alerts.status where AlertType = 2;’,″,″,″,‘RemoveAlertStops’,″,0,1,1,1,0,0,1,‘Overview:’,″,″,″ ); insert into triggers values ( ‘FlashNotAck’,‘update alerts.status set Flash = 1, Grade = 1 where Flash = 0 and Acknowledged = 0 and Severity = 5 and FirstOccurrence <= (getdate − 600);’,″,″,″,″,″,0,0,1,31,0,0,0,‘Will set Flashing on (Flash=1) for events that are Critical (Severity=5)and are 10 minutes old but haven\'t been acknowledged by a user yet(Acknowledge = 0). It sets Grade to 1 as a further indication of the events escalation status.’,″,″,″ ); insert into triggers values ( ‘GenericClear’,‘select * from alerts.status where Type = 2 and Severity > 0;’,″,″,″,‘GenericClear’,″,10431,0,1,5,0,0,1,‘This is a standard Automation for correlating two problem/resolutionevents, ie correlating a Device Up event with a Device Down event.This is done by checking the contents of the following fields;Type 1=Problem event, 2=Resolution eventLastO’,‘ccurrence ensure resolution is more recent then problemAlertGroup same Type of event, ie Device Up/DownManager same source, same Probe reported both eventsNode same device reported both eventsAlertKey same sub-device (link, disk pa’,‘rtition etc) reported both events’,″); insert into triggers values ( ‘MailOnCritical’,‘select * from alerts.status where Severity = 5 and Grade < 2 and Acknowledged = 0 and LastOccurrence <= (getdate − (60 * 30));’,″,″,″,‘MailOnCritical’,″,0,0,1,33,0,0,1,‘Finds all events which are Critical (Severity=5) that are 30 minutes oldbut still haven\'t been Acknowledged (or escalated to level 2, Grade=2).The \’via \‘@Identifier\’\‘ command is used The Action sets Grade = 2 to show the new escalation status’,‘. The \’via \‘@Identifier\’\‘ command is used for improved lookup performance.The Action then activates the external script $OMNIHOME/utils/nco_(—)mail and passes data from the event to that script. The script is a simple script which will insert t’,‘he events data into a mail message and mail to a user (in this example \’root\‘ user on the local machine). NOTE: This tool is UNIX specific unless an equivalent NT mailer is available.’,″ ); insert into triggers values ( ‘FindEventsToRegen1’,‘select * from alerts.status whereAlertType = 1 andDuration = 0 andFirstOccurrence > getdate − (hourofday*60*60) − (minuteofhour*60) − 86400 − 60 andFirstOccurrence < getdate − (hourofday*60*60) − (minuteofhour*60) − 60;’,″,″,″,‘ModifyAlertToRegen’,″,10431,1,1,1,0,0,1,″,″,″,″ ); insert into triggers values ( ‘FindEventsToRegen2’,‘select * from alerts.status whereSustainedAlert = 2;’,″,″,″,‘InsertRegenAlert’,″,0,1,1,1,0,0,1,″,″,″,″ ); insert into triggers values ( ‘CalculateDuration’,‘select * from alerts.status where AlertType = 1 andSeverity = 0 andDuration = − 1;’,″,″,″,‘SetDuration’,″,0,1,1,1,0,0,1,‘Overview:’,″,″,″ ); insert into triggers values ( ‘Expire’,‘select * from alerts.status where Type > 10 and Severity > 0;’,″,″,″,‘Expire’,″,10431,0,1,65,0,0,1,‘This is a standard Automation for finding events that have passed their\’Expire\‘ time (stored in the Type field). The Action sets the events toClear (Severity 0).’,″,″,″ ); insert into triggers values ( ‘CleanJournalTable’,‘delete from alerts.journal where Serial not in ((select Serial from alerts.status));’,″,″,″,″,″,0,1,1,602,0,0,0,‘This is a standard automation for clearing old entries from the journal table.’,″,″,″); insert into triggers values( ‘DeleteClears’,‘delete from alerts.status where Severity = 0 and StateChange < (getdate − 129600);’,″,″,″,″,″,10431,1,1,67,0,0,0,‘This is a standard Automation for deleting Cleared events from the ObjectServer. When using in conjunction with Internet ServiceMonitors (ISMs) amend the where statement as follows;...where Severity = 0 and StateChange < (getdate − 120) and Manage’,‘rnot like \’ISM\‘;bloomje:I changed this to remove cleared events after 36 hours of no state change, not two minutes’,″,″ ); set recovery_(—)sequence for triggers to 0; -- DO NOT CHANGE OR REMOVE THIS LINE ! NCOMS.auto.actions.dat (Blank lines added to enhance readability.) use database auto; insert into actions values ( ‘InsertRegenAlert’,1,‘update alerts.statussetSustainedAlert = 1, Severity = 0whereSerial = @Serial;insert into alerts.status values(\’@RegenIdentifier\‘ ,0 ,\’@Node\‘ ,\’@NodeAlias\‘ ,\’@Manager\‘ ,\’@Agent\‘ ,\’@AlertGroup\‘ ,’,‘\’@AlertKey\‘ ,@Severity ,\’@Summary\‘ ,0 ,@RegenMidnightTime ,@RegenMidnightTime ,0 ,@Poll ,@Type ,0 ,@Class ,@Grade ,\’@Location\‘ ,@OwnerUID ,@OwnerGID ,@Acknowledged ,@Flash ,\’@S‘,’erverName\‘ ,@ServerSerial ,@EventCode ,0 ,@CheckedNotify ,1 , \’@NotifyAction\‘ ,@NotifyPending ,0 ,@DatabaseElementKey ,0 ,@OpenTicket ,\’@TicketNumber\‘ ,@OriginalSeverity ,@AlertType ,0 ,’,‘@OriginalOccurrence ,@TimeKeyLogged ,@RegenMidnightTime ,0 ,\’\‘ ,0 ,\’\‘ ,0 ,\’InsertRegenAlert\‘ );’,0,″,″,″,0,0,″,″,″,″,″,″,″,″ ); insert into actions values ( ‘GenerateTimeKey’,1,‘update alerts.status setTimeKeyLogged=1whereSerial=@Serial; ’,″,″,″,1,‘/opt/ECM/bin/bloomje/GenerateTimeKey.pl’,‘@LastOccurrence’,‘twmmdb02’ ,0,0,″,″,″,″, This script takes the field LastOccurrence and translates it into day, month, year, hour, min, seconds.′,″,″,″ ); insert into actions values ( ‘DebugChangeField’,0,‘update alerts.statussetSummary = \’Blooms @Summary\‘whereSerial = @Serial;’,″,″,″,0,″,″,″,0,0,″,″,″,″,″,″,″,″ ); insert into actions values ( ‘ModifyAlertToRegen’,1,‘update alerts.statussetDuration = 86400 − (@FirstOccurrence − @MidnightTime), AlertStopTime = @MidnightTime + 86400, RegenIdentifier = \’@Node @EventCode @MidnightTime\‘, RegenMidnightTime = @MidnightTime + 86400, SustainedAlert = 2,’,‘ DebugFieldChar = \’ModifyAlertToRegen\‘ whereSerial = @Serial;’,″,″,0,″,″,″,0,0,″,″,″,″,″,″,″,″ ); insert into actions values ( ‘SetDuration’,1,‘update alerts.status set LoggedToDatabase = 0,DebugFieldChar = \’SetDuration just ran\‘,Identifier = \’@Node.@EventCode.@FirstOccurrence\‘,Duration = (@AlertStopTime − @FirstOccurrence) whereSerial = @Serial;’,″,″,″,0,″,″,″,0,0,″,″,″,″,″,″,″,″ ); insert into actions values ( ‘GenericClear’,0,‘update alerts.status set Severity = 0 where Severity > 0 and Type = 1 and LastOccurrence < @LastOccurrence and AlertGroup =\’@AlertGroup\‘ and Manager =\’@Manager\‘ and Node = \’@Node\‘ and AlertKey = \’@AlertKey\‘;update alerts.status set Severity = ’,‘0 where Serial = @Serial;’,″,″,0,″,″,″,0,0,″,″,″,″,‘This is a standard Automation for correlating two problem/resolutionevents, ie correlating a Device Up event with a Device Down event.This is done by checking the contents of the following fields;Type 1=Problem event, 2=Resolution eventLastO’,‘ccurrence ensure resolution is more recent then problemAlertGroup same Type of event, ie Device Up/DownManager same source, same Probe reported both eventsNode same device reported both eventsAlertKey same sub-device (link, disk pa’,‘rtition etc) reported both events’,″); insert into actions values ( ‘MailOnCritical’,1,‘update alerts.status via \’@Identifier\‘ set Grade = 2;’,″,″,″,1,‘$OMNIHOME/utils/nco_(—)mail’,‘@Node @Severity NCO_(—)MAIL_(—)MESSAGE root@omnihost \’@Summary\″,‘omnihost’,0,0,″,″,″,″,″,″,″,″ ); insert into actions values ( ‘RegenAlerts’,0,‘update alerts.statussetSeverity = 0,Duration = 86400 − (@LastOccurrence − @MidnightTime),AlertStopTime = @MidnightTime + 86400,TempChar = \’@OldIdentifier (@MidnightTime)\‘,TempInt = @MidnightTime + 86400,DebugFieldChar = \’Reg‘,’enAlerts ran on me\‘whereSerial = @Serial;’,″,″,0,″,″,″,0,0,″,″,″,″,″,″,″,″ ); insert into actions values ( ‘SetServiceUnknown’,1,‘svc update \’@Name\‘ 3;’,″,″,″,0,″,″,″,0,0,″,″,″,″,‘This action sets the state of the given service to be Unknown.It is only needed with the Internet Service Monitors.’,″,″,″); insert into actions values ( ‘TakeNotifyAction’,1,‘update alerts.statussetNotifyPending = 0whereSerial = @Serial;’,″,″,″,1,‘/opt/ECM/utils/notify_(—)spooler.pl’,‘\″@Node\″ \″@EventCode\″ \″@LastOccurrence\″ \″@Summary\’″,‘twmmdb02’,0,0,″,″,″,″,″,″,″,″ ); insert into actions values ( ‘ChangeLoggedToDbse’,0,‘update alerts.status set LoggedToDatabase=1whereSerial=@Serial;’,″,″,″,0,″,″,″,0,0,″,″,″,″,″,″,″,″ ); insert into actions values ( ‘Expire’,1,‘update alerts.status set Severity = 0 where Serial = @Serial and LastOccurrence < (getdate − @Type);’,″,″,″,0,″,″,″,0,0,″,″,″,″,‘This is a standard Automation for finding events that have passed their\’Expire\‘ time (stored in the Type field). The Action sets the events toClear (Severity 0).’,″,″,″ ); insert into actions values ( ‘RemoveAlertStops’,1,‘update alerts.status set Severity = 0; AlertStopTime = @FirstOccurrence, DebugFieldChar = \’RemoveAlertStops ran\‘ where Severity < > 0 and AlertType = 1 and Node =\’@Node\‘ and EventCode = @EventCode − 1 ’,‘and LastOccurrence <= @LastOccurrence; delete from alerts.status where Serial = @Serial; ’,″,″,0,″,″,″,0,0,″,″,″,″,″,″,″,″ ); set recovery_(—)sequence for actions to 0; -- DO NOT CHANGE OR REMOVE THIS LINE ! Sample Event Codes General Information

This section is defined to allow for a single point of definition for event codes within the Service Assurance project\.

These codes are defined for event handling through the Collector network management portion of the toolset.

TABLE 26 Table of Events AlertPairs Asynch Uncorr 1,000,000 2,000,000 1,999,999 2,999,999 Node-Corr 3,000,000 4,000,000 3,999,999 4,999,999 Enter-Corr 5,000,000 6,000,000 5,999,999 6,999,999 Uncorrelated Paired Events

These consist of <Event Code>|<Event>|<Severity>.

TABLE 27 Network Availability Events 1000000 Test Alert Start 1 1000001 Test Alert Stop 5 1000002 Node Down 5 1000003 Node Up 1 1000004 Interface Down 5 1000005 Interface Up 1 Service Availability Events 1001000 DNS Service Failed 5 1001001 DNS Service Succeeded 1 1001002 POP3 Service Failed 5 1001003 POP3 Service Succeeded 1 1001004 FTP Service Failed 5 1001005 FTP Service Succeeded 1 1001006 SMTP Service Failed 5 1001007 SMTP Service Succeeded 1 1001008 NNTP Service Failed 5 1001009 NNTP Service Succeeded 1 1001010 HTTP Service Failed 5 1001011 HTTP Service Succeeded 1 1001012 RADIUS Service Failed 5 1001013 RADIUS Service Succeeded 1 1001014 SNMP Service Failed 5 1001015 SNMP Service Succeeded 1 Process Availability Events 1002000 DNS Process Failed 5 1002001 DNS Process Succeeded 1 1002002 POP3 Process Failed 5 1002003 POP3 Process Succeeded 1 1002004 FTP Process Failed 5 1002005 FTP Process Succeeded 1 1002006 SMTP Process Failed 5 1002007 SMTP Process Succeeded 1 1002008 NNTP Process Failed 5 1002009 NNTP Process Succeeded 1 1002010 HTTP Process Failed 5 1002011 HTTP Process Succeeded 1 1002012 RADIUS Process Failed 5 1002013 RADIUS Process Succeeded 1 Threshold Events 1003000 CPU Util Threshold Warn 5 1003001 CPU Util Threshold Normal 1 1003002 Mem Util Threshold Warn 3 1003003 Mem Util Threshold Normal 1 1003004 Interface Util Threshold Warn 3 1003005 Interface Util Threshold Normal 1

TABLE 28 Correlated Paired Events 3000000 SA_(—)NodeMonitor (Mem/Cpu-State Failure) 5 3000001 SA_(—)NodeMonitor (Mem/Cpu-State Recovery) 1

TABLE 29 Enterprise Paired Event 5000000 SA_(—)CorrEnt (PATROLLER/busyPer-State Failure) 5 5000001 SA_(—)CorrEnt (PATROLLER/busyPer-State Recovery) 1

TABLE 30 Uncorrelated Asynchronous Events 2000000 ColdStart 3 2000001 WarmStart 3 2000002 LinkDown 5 2000003 LinkUp 1 2000004 AuthFail 5 2000005 EgpNeighLoss 5

TABLE 31 Correlated Asynchronous Events 4000000 Test Alert Start 5 4000001 Test Alert Stop 1

TABLE 32 Enterprise Asynchronous Events 6000000 Test Alert Start 5 6000001 Test Alert Stop 1

exportAlarmMap contains 10 items: alarm SA_(—)ifEntry_(—)Logger is Off alarm SA_(—)allTraps_(—)Logger is On alarm SnmpStatus is On alarm IcmpStatus is On alarm SA_(—)NodeMonitor is On alarm SA_(—)lsystem_(—)Logger is On alarm SA_(—)ifEntry_(—)C2Rate_(—)Util is On alarm SA_(—)CorrEnt_(—)Final is On alarm SA_(—)CorrEnt_(—)BusyPerMon is On alarm Test is Off exportPropertyMap contains 23 items: property udpEntry property udp property tcpConnEntry property tcp property snmp property ipRouteEntry property ipNetToMediaEntry. property ipAddrEntry property egp property atEntry property nl-ping property system property NO_(—)PROP property ip property interfaces property icmp property egpNeighEntry property ifEntry property SA_(—)Router_(—)Collection_(—)Property property lsystem property SA_(—)Normal_(—)Snmp property SA_(—)CheckLater property icmpStatus exportPropGroupMap contains 35 items: group Icmp group CHIPCOM-MIB group SYNOPTICS-ATM-ETHERCELL-MIB group UNGERMAN-BASS-MIB group SYNOPTICS-LINKSWITCH-MIB group SYNOPTICS-5000-MIB group SYNOPTICS-3000-MIB group RETIX-MIB group ODS-MIB group FIBERMUX-MIB group COMPAQ-MIB group ATT-SMARTHUB-MIB group Mib-II-router-sub1 group Mib-II-sub1 group Mib-II group HP-UNIX-MIB group CISCO-ROUTER-11.x-MIB group CISCO-ROUTER-10.x-MIB group RFC1289-phivMIB group Router group CISCO-ROUTER-9.x-MIB group XYPLEX-MIB group WELLFLEET-SERIES7-MIB group WELLFLEET-MIB group SUN-MIB group NAT-MIB group EPIX-MIB group DEC-ELAN-MIB group 3COM-ECSV2-MIB group NETLABS-PING-MIB group RFC1213-MIB2-MIB group SA_(—)Router_(—)Collection_(—)Group group lesgroup group SA_(—)Normal_(—)Snmp group SA_(—)CheckLater exportOIDToGroupMap contains 0 items: exportPollMap contains 6 items: poll SA_(—)ifEntry is On poll SA_(—)NodeMonitor_(—)freeMem is On poll SA_(—)NodeMonitor_(—)busyPer is On poll SA_(—)lsystem is On poll SA_(—)CorrEnt_(—)busyPer is On poll Test is Off exportMaskMap contains 2 items: mask PatrolTrapsClear is On mask PatrolTrapsAlarm is Off exportTriggerMap contains 34 items: trigger NO_(—)TRIGGER trigger coldStart trigger warmStart trigger allTraps trigger PatrolNamedFailure trigger PatrolNamedRecovery trigger SA_(—)CorrEnt_(—)Recover trigger SA_(—)CorrEnt_(—)PATROLLERRecover trigger nodeUp trigger nodeUpFast trigger agentUpFast trigger agentUp trigger SA_(—)ifEntry trigger SS_(—)ICMP_(—)Failed trigger SA_(—)CorrEnt_(—)busyPer_(—)Alarm trigger SA_(—)CorrEnt_(—)busyPer_(—)Recovery trigger SA_(—)lsystem trigger SA_(—)NodeMonitor_(—)busyPer_(—)Recovery trigger SA_(—)NodeMonitor_(—)freeMem_(—)Recovery trigger SA_(—)NodeMonitor_(—)busyPer_(—)Alarm trigger SA_(—)NodeMonitor_(—)freeMem_(—)Alarm trigger Test trigger IS_(—)ICMPFailed trigger TestA trigger SA_(—)CorrEnt_(—)XOver trigger SA_(—)CorrEnt_(—)AlarmFail trigger SA_(—)NodeMonitor_(—)NotifyHPOV trigger SA_(—)NodeMonitor_(—)BuildTrap trigger NODE_(—)UNREACHABLE trigger ICMP_(—)TIMEOUT trigger NET_(—)UNREACHABLE trigger PORT_(—)UNREACHABLE trigger SNMP_(—)TIMEOUT trigger RESPONSE exportSeverityMap contains 5 items: severity Normal severity Critical severity Major severity Minor severity Warning exportRuleMap contains 0 items: exportOpcMaskMap contains 0 items: exportPerlSubMap contains 16 items: perl subroutine Test perl subroutine SA_(—)Parameters_(—)TestScript perl subroutine SA_(—)NodeMonitor_(—)RecoverHPOV perl subroutine SA_(—)NodeMonitor_(—)NotifyHPOV perl subroutine SA_(—)NodeMonitor_(—)BuildTrap perl subroutine SA_(—)ifEntry_(—)C2Rate_(—)Util perl subroutine SA_(—)CorrEnt_(—)VerifyNode perl subroutine SA_(—)CorrEnt_(—)RecoverHPOV perl subroutine SA_(—)CorrEnt_(—)PATROLLERID perl subroutine SA_(—)CorrEnt_(—)NotifyHPOV perl subroutine SA_(—)allTraps_(—)EventCodeScreen perl subroutine PatrolTrapsAlarm perl subroutine SA_(—)SnmpStatus_(—)RecoverHPOV perl subroutine SA_(—)SnmpStatus_(—)NotifyHPOV perl subroutine SA_(—)IcmpStauts_(—)RecoverHPOV perl subroutine SA_(—)IcmpStatus_(—)NotifyHPOV

Development Environment

Configuration Strategy Proposal and Prioritization

Some of the problems with Phase 1 are:

-   a) Multiple configuration files -   b) Multiple variables for the same path/file -   c) Utilization of different script languages

This section addresses proposed solutions for the development of a better configuration facility. These include the utilization of Perl as the scripting language, exclusively. It also includes the use of one runtime configuration file, and common methods across platforms.

Body Section

One Configuration File

Maintainability

Having one file will create an environment that is more easily maintained because all the information will be in one file. There will be no confusion where things reside and where they need to be changed, if necessary.

Configurability

With creating a common file structure (see the file structure below) in one file, the scripts, logs, etc are easily identifiable. Additionally, there is no platform dependency, which therefore, creates an environment that is more easily configurable.

Portability

Again, with one file and a common file structure, the system is more easily portable.

Exemplary File Structure

-   [Runtime Directories] -   LOG= -   OUT= -   TEMP= -   EXEC= -   SYS= -   [Runtime Extensions] -   LOG=LG (may add 0–9, A–Z, or both) -   IN=IN -   OUT=OT -   TEMP=TP -   [Runtime Extension Sequence] -   SEQ=0—Z. . . (0–9) or (A–Z) or (0–Z) to be determined -   [Application Paths] -   APPS=SPSS, HPOVNNM, PATROLLER, ECM, COLLECTOR, WEB -   [SPSS] -   [HPOVNNM] -   [PATROLLER]     Common Prep Command     Consistency

With the utilization of a common command (e.g. include, source, or require), the potential changes that need to be made will be consistent in each script. Or, if a common command for each platform is needed in each script, it will be a consistent change to activate the appropriate command.

Maintainability

If each script is utilizing the same command, the maintenance is minimal. There will not be a need to make different changes to different scripts.

Portability

With all scripts following the same command script, the only change necessary across platforms may be in the path.

Note:

We could avoid the use of a common command in each script if\-

-   1) All scripts are written in Perl -   2) Perl allows us to set or change environment variables within a     Perl script.

If so, we can set definitions with an environment variable.

Common Code/Methods

Use common cross-platform items (e.g. environment variables, command line arguments, files, DOS, Unix, NT, and 95 ANSI C compliant).

Through the use of an initiate_(—)setup script we could pull in the configuration file.

Common Scripting Language—Perl

The use of a common scripting language will help contribute to a common prep command if needed. Additionally, the barriers associated with awk, sed, and c-shell scripts will be avoided, providing improved maintainability. Any scripting changes that might.be required cross-platform will be minimized. The knowledge needed to work with the scripts is minimized as well as the time associated with ramp-up, configuration, troubleshooting and testing.

File type/configuration file type/file location

This would help with platform independence. The configuration file would reside in a database, like Oracle, as a table. It would then be pulled into a file format. The format would depend on the platform.

Priority

The following priority list is generated by what value each item will bring to the project.

-   1) 1 common file -   2) Pull in the configuration file (file name independence, directory     independence) -   3) Common Code/Methods -   4) Separate variables (remove multiples) -   5) All common script languages -   6) File type/configuration file type/file location

The IPSA project will gain the greatest value by implementing procedures and changes that make significant improvement over the current situation without jeopardizing deliverable deadlines.

Determination

One configuration file. SACommon.pm located in the /sa/usr/mod directory with a symbolic link from /usr/local/lib/perl5/site_(—)perl on twmmdb02, nsmmws09 and nsmmws16. Variables are defined as shown in Table KK. With the use of this module, each script that references it must also contain a “use” command and each variable must be referenced appropriately. See Table LL.

-   -   Table KK—SACommon variable definition example     -   #These variable is used with the data retrieval script     -   $NodeList=“/sa/dev/glueware/bin/node_(—)list.def”;     -   $DestDir=“/sa/dat”;     -   $DestHost=“twmmdb02”;     -   $CopyConunand=“rcp-p”;     -   Table LL (the bold commands are examples used with SACommon.pm)         use SACommon;     -   open (NODE_(—)F, $SACommon::NodeList)||die “error could not open         $SACommon::NodeList”;

TABLE 33 Identify and Describe Requirement Description: Development Environment Requirements Scenarios: Type: Business Process Flow: Overall Rating: Business Need Desc: Affected Parties: Project Sponsor: Existing/New: External Dependencies: Method for Verification: In Scope: Complete after Requirements are Scheduled into a Release

TABLE 34 Increment: App/Subsyst Desc/Flow:

Required if Modifications are made after the Requirement has been signed-off

TABLE 35 Change Request: General Information

The SA internal Initiative is using a homegrown version control system that is based on sccs. It is anticipated that future releases will use cccHarvest for both version controlling and configuration management.

Requirements for the Development Environment

-   -   The ability to check in and check out files so that only one         person is editing afile at a time     -   The following will be tracked on each file that is being version         controlled: date of creation, date oflast modification, version,         and change history (annotated with date, rev, user, and         comments).     -   The ability to associate revision numbers with development         environment (the environment can be set to ‘dev’, ‘tst’, or         ‘prd’). This make is it make it possible to develop multiple         releases at one time.     -   The ability to retrieve previous versions of a component or         sub-component for either edit or review.     -   Supportfor multiple development languages.     -   Ability for users to operate in a separate environment. This         includes operations on the users ‘own’ test data and         executables.     -   Backup and recovery of source code, documentation, test data,         etc. . . .     -   Tools to aid in the debugging of components and sub-components.         This would include generation of test data and unit test         conditions.

Documentation for users on how to use the tools under different conditions and situations.

-   -   Ability to tie SIR or defect number to all components and         sub-components that are.     -   Ability to migrate components and sub-components between         enviroments.     -   Documented coding standards for each type of development         language used).     -   Provide shells as a starting point for each coding language         used.     -   Strategy for software distribution.         Determine Release Strategy Requirements

From the /sa directory we will extract the version of each file that has been tagged as production.

Determine Installation Strategy Requirements

Installation of an exemplary Service Assurance Toolkit can be broken down into two parts.

-   1. Installation and configuration of software.     -   Network Node Manager     -   Event Correlator and Manager     -   Collector     -   Patroller     -   Database Software     -   Telalert     -   Server Software     -   SPSS     -   Internet Information Server -   2. Installation and customization of Service Assurance Glueware.     -   Determination of an appropriate directory structure.     -   Customization of all environment specific settings in the         Glueware scripts. This includes variables that are local to each         script as well as global variables from the SACommon.pm Perl         Module. Also, care should be taken regarding hard coded         environment specific information in each script.         Determine Build/Test Environment Requirements

The directory structure will be stored on ucmmfs02:files5. The directory /sa will be the mount point to nsmmws09, nsmmws16, and twmmdb02. The binary files for the vcs will need to be added to each users path. This will be done as a modification to each users .cshrc file. All code developing activities should only be done as the developer. In other words DO NOT develop code as the user noc. Each user's .cshrc file will be set up to source a file called sa.cshrc. The sa.cshrc file will be stored in /sa/usr. The file sa.cshrc will contain the code needed to switch the user's environment to and from dev, tst, or prd.

dev

This is the primary development environment. All code will be developed and component tested in the /dev directory. Successful component testing will result in the promotion of the code to the /tst directory.

tst

This is the primary testing environment. All code once successfully component tested will be migrated to the /tst directory for assembly level testing. Successful assembly testing will result in the promotion of the code to the /prd directory. Unsuccessful testing of the code will result in the demotion of the code to /dev for bug fixes.

prd

This is the primary production directory. All code that has passed both component and assembly testing will be promoted to the /prd directory. If a bug is found in the production environment the code will be demoted to either /tst or /dev for bug fixing.

Determine Implementation Language

Perl is recommended as the implementation language for phase 2. Perl is recommended for the following reasons:

-   -   Excellent support of text processing     -   Widely used     -   Extremely flexible     -   Efficient executables     -   Free     -   Many support libraries exist     -   Maintainable     -   ECM already uses perl         Determine Change Control Requirements

Change Control requirements include:

-   -   Outline the proper communication channels to ensure prompt and         efficient change implementation     -   Ability to view:     -   All tasks     -   Downtime tasks only     -   Tasks by assigned to     -   Tasks by affected groups     -   Tasks by current status     -   Identify the appropriate information required for a change to be         handled effectively     -   Assigned to     -   Task description     -   Priority (1, 2, 3)     -   Start Date     -   Complete Date     -   Operations Group or Area creating the request (Sales &         Marketing, Product Development.)     -   Status of request (new, on hold, scheduled, work done,         completed)     -   Effects (downtime, limited use, no effects on use)     -   Time Range     -   Affected Components and Groups     -   Type (Removal, upgrade, new install, configuration change)     -   Additional Information (contacts, requirements, implementations         . . . )     -   Creating Author     -   Creation Date     -   Last Revised By     -   Date Last Revised     -   Allow change in the development environment while maintaining         system stability     -   Schedule downtime to minimize service outage         Determine Incident Reporting Requirements         Incident Management Needs to:     -   facilitate the review, approval or rejection, and prioritization         of changes     -   facilitate communication between development cells to ensure         that changes are implemented correctly and migrated to the         proper environment in a timely manner.     -   Allow updates/fixes in the development environment while         maintaining system stability     -   Schedule downtime to minimize service outage     -   sort tickets by:         -   1. Current Status         -   2. Person assigned the task         -   3. Incident ticket number     -   identify the appropriate information required for a incident to         be handled effectively         -   1. Incident Number         -   2. Current Status (open, new, approved, disapproved)         -   3. Priority (low, medium, high, emergency)         -   4. People/Groups affected         -   5. Target Completion Date         -   6. Comments         -   7. Status Reason for rejected status         -   8. Business Reason for Change         -   9. Total hours needed to complete the implementation of fix             or repair     -   Include sections for Origination (initial information when         ticket is logged), Analysis (information obtained after         reviewing the incident ticket), and Implementation (information         gathered during implementation)         Determine Backup/Recoverv Requirements

A person should be designated to receive nightly backup confirmations. Two confirmations are sent per machine, one is for full backup and the other is for incremental backup. Incremental backups may be run every night and full backups can be run once a week between Friday evening and Monday morning.

Directory Structure

The following directory structure will be used to store code and configurations on the unix servers. See also FIG. 32, which illustrates an exemplary data structure 3200.

/sa /dev /dat /archive /log /process /tmp /glueware /bin /cfg /prod_(—)cfg /prd /dat /archive /log /process /tmp /glueware /bin /cfg /prod_(—)cfg /tst /dat /archive /log /process /tmp /glueware /bin /cfg /prod_(—)cfg /usr /mod /vcs /bin /source

The Directories /dev /prd and /tst correspond to the build and test environments discussed earlier. Below each environment directory there will be a data directory called /dat. /dat will contain the following directories:

-   -   /archive—Directory to store any files that are compressed and no         longer essential to development.     -   /log—Log files that are created during the processing cycle.     -   /process—Files that are currently in the processing cycle.     -   /tmp—Temporary location to store files that have finished being         processed.

Beneath /glueware there will be /bin and /cfg./bin stores the binary ‘glueware’ files. Glueware is the term for custom scripts to tie together the packaged applications. /cfg holds any application configuration files. The /usr directory holds user command as well as the /mod directory for perl modules./vcs holds the /bin, executables for the version control system, and the /source directory for storing the version controlled files.

TABLE 36 Identify and Describe Requirement Description: Hardware inventory, Software install locations, and memory/        disk-space reqs Scenarios: Type: Business Process Flow: Overall Rating: Business Need Desc: Affected Parties: Service Assurance Team Project Sponsor: Network Line of Business Existing/New: External Dependencies: Method for Verification: In Scope: Complete after Requirements are Scheduled into a Release

TABLE 37 Increment: App/Subsyst Desc/Flow:

TABLE 38 Required if Modifications are made after the Requirement has been signed-off Change Request: Scope

This section is intended to list the hardware inventory, software instalation locations, and software requirements of the Service Assurance development test network. This section will summarize the detailed findings of an Excel workbook that is accessible in:

Functional Repository→Capability Analysis→Hardware/Software Expense

TABLE 39 Service Assurance Application Memory and System Requirements Suggested Memory Program Requirements Suggested System Requirements Collector RAM: Hardware Requirements: Object Server: 50 SUN Workstations: will run all components of Collector. Mbytes per server SPARC 20 or better, Ultra 1 or better, with appropriate (dependant upon RAM and disk. (recommended system for desktop only: number of events SPARC 5 or better. in the Object HP Workstations: will run all components of Collector. server) C110 workstation or better, D230, K210, T520 servers or better, with appropriate RAM and disk. Desktops: AIX Workstations: AIX v3.2 will run Generic, NetView 10 Mbytes per and Syslog probes, with appropriate RAM and disk. AIX desktop (standard 4.1.2 and above will run all 3.2.1 components. user), 15 Mbytes NT Workstations: NT probes and EventList at present, per desktop with appropriate RAM and disk. (standard user plus Disk Space: objective view), 20 The following table lists the amount of disk storage required to Mbytes per store components of the Collector system. In some cases, desktop (above further economies may be possible, i.e., by discarding unused plus administrator probes. tools) Probes: 5 Mbytes per probe Gateways: 15 Common Object Process Gate Probes JEL Mbytes per Platform/OS Files Desktop Server Control way (all) daemon gateway SunOS 4.1.x 0.7M 30M 1.8M   1M 1.5M 19M 7M Java Event List: 5 Sun Solaris 0.9M 12M 2.5M 1.4M 2.0M 23M 7M Mbytes per 2.x daemon HP-UX 9.07 0.8M 11M 1.9M   1M 1.6M 18M 7M Web server: 2.5 HP-UX 0.8M 11M 2.0M   1M 1.6M 16M 7M Mbytes per user 10.10 and (typical web 10.20 server, will vary) AIX 0.8M — — 1.5M —  4M — Windows — — — — —  6M — NT In addition 10–20 Mb should be allowed for logging space on systems running Gateways, Object Servers, Probes or Process Control. Reporter It is recommended that you run the Collector server with a minimum of 128 MB and a maximum of 256 MB of memory. These values recommendations but if you have the potential for large amounts of data to report on, this is going to be vital to the efficiency of the application. This section describes what action to take on the server if you do not have these values set and you are getting memory errors while running Collector/ Reporter. See page 32 of the Admin/user guide of Reporter for making adjustments to memory for UNIX. PATROL The CPU and Operating System Requirements: LERLER PATROLLERLER Sun SPARC; Solaris2; Min version 2.4; Solaris2-sun4 Console should be run Sun SPARC; Solaris2; Min version 2.5; Solaris25-sun4 on a machine with at nls is a system prerequisite for Sun O/S 4.xx installations least 64 MB of Disk Space: memory. Each PATROLLERLER Console requires about 20 MB of disk space. The Console also requires an additional 31 MB of disk space for the supporting files such as icon images and online help files. You will need an additional 27 MB of disk space if you choose to install the optional background images for European country maps. Each PATROLLERLER Agent requires about 10 MB of disk space. Each PATROLLERLER Event Manager (PEM) Console requires about 5 MB of disk space. If the PEM Console is installed independently of the PATROLLER Console, then an additional 24 MB of disk space is required for the supporting files such as icon images and online help files. PATROLLERLER Module space requirements vary. The installation script furnishes an estimate of each module's requirements: Event ii Hardware Configuration: (minimum UNIX) Correlator 48 MB for the 200 MB disc space color monitor 1024 × 768 and server Solaris 2.5.1 or HP/UX 10.20 Manager 32 MB for the Hardware Configuration: (minimum NT) client P5-166 Intel Processor, 40 MB disc space, color monitor NT 1024 × 768 32 MB RAM Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 Note: Supports the following: OpenView Network Node Manager-versions 4.11 and 5.01 OpenView IT/Operations-version 4.0 for HP-UX HP iii Unix OpenView Computer: Unix Version 64 Mbytes Use one of the following computers as the NNM 5.01 recommended Management Station. NT minimum HP 9000 Series 700 Version 32 Mbytes HP 9000 Series 800, J and K models 5.02 minimum for Sun SPARCstation 5,10,20,2000 NNM 250 Sun SPARCclassics Note: The amount of Sun Servers RAM in your NNM Graphics Display management station X Terminal or Workstation graphics display with should be based on the 1280 × 1024 resolution, 8 color planes (recommended) number of nodes 1024 × 768 resolution, 6 color planes (minimum) which you wish to 20″ display manage. Additional Installation Device RAM may also be CD-ROM drive required to run third- Disk Space party Open View The minimal disk space for NNM installation is shown applications on top of below NNM. See the HP-UX 9.x–85 Mbytes Network Node HP-UX 10.x–85 Mbytes Manager Performance Solaris 2.x–130 Mbytes and Configuration Operating System Guide for assistance in One of the operating systems listed below must be running calculating for the on the NNM mgmt system. optimum amount of HP-UX 9.0–9.07 (9.x) RAM. HP-UX 10.01, 10.10, and 10.20 (10.x) iv Solaris 2.4 and 2.5.x 32 Mbytes of Networking Subsystem RAM to manage The appropriate TCP/IP networking subsystems (e.g. LAN 250 nodes and, Link, ARPA Services) found within the operating system 48 Mbytes of must be installed and configured to yield TCP/IP network RAM to manage connectivity up to 2500 nodes. Windowing Subsystem Note: You will need HIP-UX: X Windows/Motif to have a minimum Solaris: OpenWindows amount of paging file SNMP Agent size (available virtual The NNM management station must be running an SNMP memory) configured. agent. An SNMP agent is shipped with NNM for HP-UX 9.x If NNM is being and Solaris systems, and is automatically installed when installed as a remote installing NNM. HP-UX 10.x systems use the SNMP agent console, Paging Files shipped with the operating system. is checked to be at NT least 50 Mbytes. If Operating System this is not a remote You should be running Windows NT 3.51 or Windows NT console installation, 4.0 for NNM or higher to run successfully 60 Mbytes will be the Graphics Display minimum. Your screen resolution must be at least 600 × 800 to support NNM display objects. Networking Subsystem You should have TCP/IP services installed. Platinum v VCI (important component of CCC/Harvest) Tech- Server Microsoft Windows 95 or Windows NT nology 16 Mb main Tool that supports Microsoft's Common Source Code CCC/ memory Control (SCC) Interface. Following is a partial list of Harvest It is recommended SCC-compliant tools: that 2 Mb of Visual C++ 4.2 and 5.0 virtual memory is Visual Basic 4.0 and 5.0 allocated for each Visual J++ 1.1 user Paradigm Plus 3.5.1 Client (Solaris) PowerBuilder 5.0.03 SPARCstation or Unix SPARCserver CD-ROM drive, 8 mm tape drive, 4 mm DDS cartridge, or running Solaris 2.5 ¼-inch cartridge tape drive (SunOS 5.5) or Oracle RDBMS version 7.3 or beyond, including the with X-Windows following options: System Version SQL*Plus, PL/SQL, SQL*Loader, Pro-C, SQL*Net 11R5. Note: HP-UX 10 requires Oracle 7.3.4 or beyond. Approximately 50 NT MB of disk space IBM-compatible computer with a 486, or Pentium is required for the processor installation process Network connection to a Unix or Windows NT-based of the server using the TCP/IP protocol CCC/Harvest product files. vi Server At least 12 Mb of free hard drive space A minimum of 32 Mb main memory. The Oracle database and CC/Harvest Broker together require about 14 Mb, with an additional 3.5 Mb for each server process. Client At least 8 Mb of RAM, 16 recommended. Win95 or WinNT- minimum of 14 Mb of hard disk space TelAlert SERVERS: AIX (IBM RS/6000) AT&T GIS Unix SVR4 MP-RAS (AT&T/NCR System 3000) Digital Unix (Alpha) DYNIX/ptx (Sequent) HP-UX (9.x/10.x Series 300,400,700 and 800) Linux MIPS ABI SCO Unix SGI Irix Solaris (Sun Sparc) SunOS (Sun Sparc) Windows NT CLIENTS: All of the above, as well as: MPE/V (HP 3000) MPE/iX (HP 3000) OpenVMS (Alpha) OpenVMS (VAX) Platforms which are supported for clients, but are not delivered on the standard TelAlert distribution include: OS/400 MVS Exemplary Patroller Configuration

TABLE 40 Consoles + Agents/Modules: Host Name Machine Type Host ID IP Address nsmmws16 Sun Sparc 20 7235a79f 149.122.57.25 nsmmws09 Sun Sparc 10 7260a126 149.122.57.56

TABLE 41 Agents/KMS only: Host Name Machine Type IP Address nsmmws17 Sun Sparc 5 149.122.57.26 nsmmws18 Sun Sparc 5 149.122.57.26 nsmmws01 Sun Sparc 5 149.122.57.68 nsmmpc56 Compaq LTE5300 *149.122.57.178 nsmmpc23 Compaq LTE5300 *149.122.57.247 nsmmpd39 Compaq LTE5300 *149.122.57.221 nsmmpc39 Compaq XL6150 *149.122.57.180 nsmmpd48 Compaq XL6150 *149.122.57.223 nsmmpd93 Compaq XL6150 *149.122.57.234 mpclc1005 Compaq Proliant 149.122.61.29 2500 mpclc1006 Compaq Proliant 149.122.61.30 2500 nsmmnt01 Compaq Proliant 149.122.61.24 2500 nsmmnt02 Compaq Proliant 149.122.62.12 2500 nsmmnt03 Compaq Proliant 149.122.57.37 2500 nsmmnt04 Compaq Proliant 149.122.57.38 2500 *Denotes a dynamic (DHCP supplied) IP address Determine Backup/Recovery Requirements

This section will list Service Assurance's responsibilities to an exemplary network to insure timely backup and recovery.

Body Section

Changes to monitoring and backups should be logged as a trouble ticket with the computer related service center.

An individual from the project should be identified to receive backup completion notices. These notices are mailed at the completion of each nightly backup cycle. This person should then verify that all Service Assurance servers were adequately backed up the previous night.

SA Environment Build Index

This section provides an overview of exemplary steps to build the Service Assurance environment. The procedures ate presented as an ordered list, and unless denoted by ‘*’, should be performed in their respective order. Procedures denoted by ‘*’are independent, and can be performed out of order with respect to other procedures at their respective level in the hierarchy.

Building the Service Assurance Environment

-   Network Management Station System Build     -   Verify system requirements     -   Create ‘noc’ user     -   Create ‘netman’ group -   Install HP OpenView Network Node Manager (NNM) -   Install Patroller *     -   Patroller Product Licensing     -   Install Patroller Console     -   Install PatrolView     -   Install Patroller Agents -   Install ECM -   Install SAS * -   Telalert Installation & Configuration * -   Install Netscape FastTrack Server * -   Install Oracle * -   Install Perl * -   Install Perl Modules * -   Install custom scripts -   Event Handling System (EHS) setup and configuration -   EHS component test -   Network Availability (NA) setup and configuration -   NA component test -   Process Availability (PA) setup and configuration -   PA component test -   Service Availability (SA) setup and configuration -   SA component test -   Reporting System (RS) setup and configuration -   RS component test (Reporting Test Cases.doc)     Moving /sa Directory Structure Between Machines

This is a short explanation of the steps and commands recommended to move the /sa directory structure from one machine to another.

Body Section

-   Use the unix tar command to create an archive of /sa     -   ex: tar-cvfp <archive destination file><source directory> -   Copy or FTP the files to the destination machine. -   Use the unix tar command to extract the archive for netman and vcs.     -   ex: tar-xvfp <tar_(—)file> REMEMBER: This will keep the relative         directory structure that was used when creating the archives.         Also, all untarred files will have the correct permissions and         will take the uid and gid of the user issuing the untar command. -   NSF mount the /sa directory into the root of other directories. -   Confirm that the vcs/bin directory is in the noc users path.     Remote Shell & .rhost Configuration

This section will be a very brief overview of starting a remote shell between unix servers.

Body Section

The .rhosts file is used to control access between unix servers also known as remote authentication (see also /etc/hosts.equiv).

The .rhosts file is placed in the root of the noc users home. This will allow noc to rlogin from the specified host without a password.

EXAMPLE

The .rhosts file on twmmdb02 contains the following line:

-   -   nsmmn09+noc

This allows the local noc account on nsmmnm09 to connect to twmmdb02 using rlogin and no password. Also, we could explicitly deny access to the local noc user on nsmmnm09 with the line:

-   -   nsmmnm09-noc         Solaris System Build

Depending on the policies in place at the client, the system build and administration will very likely be handled exclusively by their operations group. For this reason guidelines are provided here that should be followed, but specific instructions will not be provided.

This section specifically discusses Sun Solaris 2.x systems. Specifics will be different, but the concepts and processes are similar for HP-UX 10.x and higher.

Body Section

Hardware Requirements

The base requirements to run all of the Service Assurance applications concurrently on one Sun Solaris system are:

-   -   Sun Ultra 2 server     -   Dual 200 MHz (or faster) CPUs     -   768 MB RAM     -   2–4 GB Internal SCSI disks (mirrored) for system     -   ˜20 GB external disk storage (mirrored and striped)

Having a single CPU system should not be considered due to the high number of applications and processes that will be running on the system. Based on prior experience, lower amounts of system memory can severely degrade performance. External disk storage will vary based on the size of the environment being monitored. The 20 GB listed above should be sufficient for a medium sized environment (˜500 monitored nodes).

Hardware Setup & Configuration

As discussed in the requirements section, dual (or more) CPUs and a large amount of physical RAM are crucial to the performance of the system. Mirroring of the system disk is critical for maintaining availability of the Service Assurance system. Mirroring and striping is crucial on the external drives to provide the performance and throughput required by the real-time data gathering portions of the system.

OS Install

Install the Base OS

Install the Solaris 2.x operating system as explained in the Solaris manual or the Teleworks—NSM procedure. You will want to ensure that the system has adequate swap space on the system disks.

Install recommended and security patches

You will want to install any recommended vendor patches so that you have an up to date system.

Install any patches that are required by applications

Some of the applications you will be installing may require specific operating system patches. If this is the case, it is easier to install the patches immediately.

Details of using the Version Control System (VCS)

-   -   The VCS should only be used on files that use ‘#’ to denote         comments. This is due to the vcs header being framed with ‘#’.     -   Ownership of the files will be noc:twsa, twsa is a nis group to         which members of the Service Assurance team belongs.     -   The ability to check in and check out files so that only one         person is editing a file at a time. A lock file is created in         the /sa/vcs/source which controls usage.     -   When a file is checked in; its file permissions are 544.     -   When a file is checked out; its file permissions are 744.     -   Each time a file is checked out, edited and checked back in; the         revision of that file is incremented. For Example, when version         1.9 is checked back in it becomes version 1.10.

Applications that will exist as part of the Version Control System

vcsclear

Clears a file lock so the file can be edited or restored by a person other than the person who checked it out. This command should be used rarely and only as required for code maintenance.

vcsedit

This is the primary command for checking afile out (for editing purposes) of the vcs. A lock on the specif tedfile is created andfile permissions are set to allow the user to edit the file. The user must manually call vi (or text editor of choice) to edit the file. This command can also be used to retrieve a previous version of a file.

vcsenv

Provides information on which version of a file belongs to which environment. Also, allows changes to be made to environment/revision associations.

vcsget

Retrieves a read-only copy of a file for viewing purposes. No lockfile is created. This command can be used to get a copy offile for off-line editing in a user's home directory. This command can also be used to retrieve a previous version of a file or recover when a file has been accidently deleted.

vcsinfo

Provides information on afile that is being version controlled, including name and location of the vcs recordfile as well as whether the file has been locked and who has it locked.

vcsput

This is the primary command for checking afile back into the vcs after editing or when it is first created. The file permissions are reset and the lockfile is removed.

EXAMPLES OF USING THE VCS

Creating a new file that needs to be version controlled.

-   prompt % vi foo.pl -   Create the file and add content. Save the file and exit. -   prompt % vcsput foo.pl

The file is added to the vcs for the first time. User will be prompted for username and a comment. The file permissions are updated and a recordfile is started.

-   prompt % vcsedit foo.pl

This creates a lock file for foo.pl and the user can now safely edit the file.

Informational Commands of the vcs

-   prompt % vcsinfo foo.pl

Indicates whether a record file currently exists and if it is locked or not.

-   prompt % vcsenv foo.pl

Indicates which version of a file belongs in which environment. Also, allows the user to make changes to environment and version association.

-   Other vcs commands -   prompt % vcsclear foo.pl

A previous user forget to check a file back in after a vcsedit command. This allows the lock file to be cleared so the next user can edit the file. Changes to the file from the previous user are lost.

-   prompt % vcsget foo.pl

A user wishes to work on a copy of a file in their home account for testing purposes. This will create a copy of the latest version of the file in the current directory without locking the file. If the file is later copied back into the development environment care must be taken not overwrite the version of the file already there.

While various embodiments have been described above, it should be understood that they have been presented by way of example only, and not limitation. Thus, the breadth and scope of a preferred embodiment should not be limited by any of the above described exemplary embodiments, but should be defined only in accordance with the following claims and their equivalents. 

1. A method for controlling a collection, manipulation and storage of network performance data and network event data of a network with service assurance capabilities, comprising the steps of: (a) receiving an activation signal; (b) transmitting a first signal to initiate retrieval of network performance data and network event data, wherein the network performance and network event data are generated from a network-monitor that monitors a network system and then relocates the data into a common directory; (c) transmitting a second signal to initiate manipulation of the data and loading of the manipulated data into a database; (d) transmitting a third signal to initiate a clean archive program for deleting files from an archive directory; (e) transmitting a fourth signal to initiate a table extract program for extracting data from tables stored in the database; (f) transmitting a fifth signal to initiate a trigger reporting program for generating reports; (g) transmitting a sixth signal to initiate a purge record program for deleting records from the database; and (h) transmitting a seventh signal to initiate a database backup program for backing up data stored on the database.
 2. A method as recited in claim 1, further comprising: initiating a a controller program.
 3. A method as recited in claim 2, wherein the controller program transmits an eighth signal to initiate calculation of statistics from the data.
 4. A method as recited in claim 3, wherein the controller program transmits a ninth signal to initiate assigning of key codes to the data.
 5. A method as recited in claim 4, wherein the controller program transmits a tenth signal to initiate sorting of the data.
 6. A method as recited in claim 5, wherein the controller program transmits an eleventh signal to initiate concatenating of the data.
 7. A method as recited in claim 6, wherein the controller program transmits a twelfth signal to initiate loading of the data into the database.
 8. A computer program embodied on a computer readable medium for controlling a collection, manipulation and storage of network performance data and network event data of a network with service assurance capabilities, comprising: (a) a code segment for receiving an activation signal; (b) a code segment for transmitting a first signal to initiate retrieval of network performance data and network event data, wherein the network performance and network event data are generated from a network-monitor that monitors network system and then relocates the data into a common directory; (c) a code segment for transmitting a second signal to initiate manipulation of the data and loading of the manipulated data into a database; (d) a code segment for transmitting a third signal to initiate a clean archive program for deleting files from an archive directory; (e) a code segment for transmitting a fourth signal to initiate a table extract program for extracting data from tables stored in the database; (f) a code segment for transmitting a fifth signal to initiate a trigger reporting program for generating reports; (g) a code segment for transmitting a sixth signal to initiate a purge record program for deleting records from the database; and (h) a code segment for transmitting a seventh signal to initiate a database backup program for backing up data stored on the database.
 9. A computer program as recited in claim 8, further comprising: initiating a a controller program.
 10. A computer program as recited in claim 9, wherein the controller program transmits an eighth signal to initiate calculation of statistics from the data.
 11. A computer program as recited in claim 10, wherein the controller program transmits a ninth signal to initiate assigning of key codes to the data.
 12. A computer program as recited in claim 11, wherein the controller program transmits a tenth signal to initiate sorting of the data.
 13. A computer program as recited in claim 12, wherein the controller program transmits an eleventh signal to initiate concatenating of the data.
 14. A computer program as recited in claim 13, wherein the controller program transmits a twelfth signal to initiate loading of the data into the database.
 15. A system for controlling a collection, manipulation and storage of network performance data and network event data of a network with service assurance capabilities, comprising: (a) logic for receiving an activation signal; (b) logic for transmitting a first signal to initiate retrieval of network performance data and network event data, wherein the network performance and network event data are generated from a network-monitor that monitors a network system and then relocates the data into a common directory; (c) logic for transmitting a second signal to initiate manipulation of the data and loading of the manipulated data into a database; (d) logic for transmitting a third signal to initiate a clean archive program for deleting files from an archive directory; (e) logic for transmitting a fourth signal to initiate a table extract program for extracting data from tables stored in the database; (f) logic for transmitting a fifth signal to initiate a trigger reporting program for generating reports; (g) logic for transmitting a sixth signal to initiate a purge record program for deleting records from the database; and (h) logic for transmitting a seventh signal to initiate a database backup program for backing up data stored on the database.
 16. A system as recited in claim 15, further comprising: logic for initiating a a controller program.
 17. A system as recited in claim 16, wherein the controller program transmits an eighth signal to initiate calculation of statistics from the data.
 18. A system as recited in claim 17, wherein the controller program transmits a ninth signal to initiate assigning of key codes to the data. 